TWI695441B - Workpiece processing device, workpiece conveying system - Google Patents

Workpiece processing device, workpiece conveying system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI695441B
TWI695441B TW108112973A TW108112973A TWI695441B TW I695441 B TWI695441 B TW I695441B TW 108112973 A TW108112973 A TW 108112973A TW 108112973 A TW108112973 A TW 108112973A TW I695441 B TWI695441 B TW I695441B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
information
workpiece
distance information
distance
rotation
Prior art date
Application number
TW108112973A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201929116A (en
Inventor
倉橋孝治
宮本玲
川上敦司
崎元直樹
Original Assignee
日商大亨股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2013249159A external-priority patent/JP6313030B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2014138373A external-priority patent/JP6348789B2/en
Application filed by 日商大亨股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商大亨股份有限公司
Publication of TW201929116A publication Critical patent/TW201929116A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI695441B publication Critical patent/TWI695441B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L22/00Testing or measuring during manufacture or treatment; Reliability measurements, i.e. testing of parts without further processing to modify the parts as such; Structural arrangements therefor
    • H01L22/10Measuring as part of the manufacturing process
    • H01L22/12Measuring as part of the manufacturing process for structural parameters, e.g. thickness, line width, refractive index, temperature, warp, bond strength, defects, optical inspection, electrical measurement of structural dimensions, metallurgic measurement of diffusions
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/418Total factory control, i.e. centrally controlling a plurality of machines, e.g. direct or distributed numerical control [DNC], flexible manufacturing systems [FMS], integrated manufacturing systems [IMS], computer integrated manufacturing [CIM]
    • G05B19/41875Total factory control, i.e. centrally controlling a plurality of machines, e.g. direct or distributed numerical control [DNC], flexible manufacturing systems [FMS], integrated manufacturing systems [IMS], computer integrated manufacturing [CIM] characterised by quality surveillance of production
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/67Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
    • H01L21/68Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for positioning, orientation or alignment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/67Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
    • H01L21/68Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for positioning, orientation or alignment
    • H01L21/681Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for positioning, orientation or alignment using optical controlling means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/20Pc systems
    • G05B2219/26Pc applications
    • G05B2219/2602Wafer processing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/31From computer integrated manufacturing till monitoring
    • G05B2219/31286Detect position of articles and equipment by receivers, identify objects by code
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P90/00Enabling technologies with a potential contribution to greenhouse gas [GHG] emissions mitigation
    • Y02P90/02Total factory control, e.g. smart factories, flexible manufacturing systems [FMS] or integrated manufacturing systems [IMS]

Abstract

[課題]在於習知技術尚未能適當地進行工件缺陷的檢測。[解決手段]係本發明的工件處理裝置具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101,供儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊為具有使圓形工件旋轉時的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊,而該第一距離資訊為關於從對應旋轉角度的工件旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的資訊;取得部103,使用儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,取得用以使工件對準位置的資訊、用以特定工件朝向的資訊、及關於工件邊緣缺陷部分的資訊;及輸出部104,用來輸出取得部103所取得的工件對準位置用的資訊、用以特定工件朝向的資訊、及關於缺陷部分的資訊。藉此工件處理裝置,可適當進行工件缺陷的檢測。[Question] It is that the conventional technology has not been able to properly detect the defects of the workpiece. [Solution Means] The workpiece processing device of the present invention includes: a first rotation distance information storage section 101 for storing a plurality of first rotation distance information, the first rotation distance information having a rotation angle when a circular workpiece is rotated Corresponding to the first distance information, and the first distance information is information about the distance from the center of rotation of the workpiece to the edge of the corresponding rotation angle; the obtaining section 103 uses a plurality of numbers stored in the first rotating distance information storage section 101 The first rotation distance information is used to obtain the information for aligning the workpiece, the information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece, and the information about the defect portion of the workpiece edge; and the output unit 104 is used to output the workpiece obtained by the acquisition unit 103 Information for alignment, information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece, and information about defective parts. With this work piece processing device, it is possible to properly detect work piece defects.

Description

工件處理裝置、工件輸送系統Workpiece processing device, workpiece conveying system

本發明係關於執行工件之定位的工件處理裝置等。The present invention relates to a workpiece processing device and the like for performing positioning of a workpiece.

習知技術中,係使晶圓旋轉,並使其邊緣位置對應旋轉角度加以檢測記憶,依據檢測訊號的最大值、最小值來計算晶圓位置的偏心量及方向,以依照該偏心數據進行晶圓的中心對正。在設於晶圓的平坦部等的開始點及結束點上,由於邊緣位置的變化較其他部分急劇,故藉由將邊緣位置數據的變化率達一定程度以上的部分加以計算,並在相同裝置上進行使該平坦部等對輸送裝置等其他作業台而言係位於特定位置的作法已為公知技術(例如,參照專利文獻1)。In the conventional technology, the wafer is rotated, and its edge position is detected and memorized according to the rotation angle. According to the maximum and minimum values of the detection signal, the eccentricity and direction of the wafer position are calculated, and the crystal is crystallized according to the eccentricity data. The center of the circle is aligned. At the start point and end point of the flat part of the wafer, etc., the edge position changes more rapidly than other parts, so by calculating the part of the edge position data change rate to a certain degree or more, and in the same device It is known that the flat portion and the like are positioned at a specific position with respect to other workbenches such as conveying devices (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

[習知技術文獻] [專利文獻] [專利文獻1] 日本專利第2729297號公報(第1頁第1圖等)[Conventional Technical Literature] [Patent Literature] [Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 2729297 (Page 1, Figure 1, etc.)

[發明所欲解決的課題] 透過利用工件輸送裝置,將使用例如上述習知裝置實施定位的工件輸送到進行CVD(化學汽相沉積,Chemical Vapor Deposition)或CMP(化學機械拋光,Chemical Mechanical Polishing)等的裝置,可對工件適當地進行所需的處理。[Problems to be solved by the invention] By using a workpiece conveying device, a workpiece that is positioned using, for example, the above-described conventional device is conveyed to a device that performs CVD (Chemical Vapor Deposition) or CMP (Chemical Mechanical Polishing), etc. To perform the required processing.

對邊緣存在有毛邊或崩缺(chipping)等的晶圓等工件進行CVD、研磨等處理時,由於加諸於工件的熱或壓力等,工件會有破損之虞。因此,對工件進行處理之前,較佳為進行檢査,以檢測有無毛邊或崩缺等缺陷部分。為了此一目的,乃期望首先能在使用上述的習知技術進行工件定位之前,進行工件缺陷部分的檢査。When a workpiece such as a wafer with burrs or chipping on the edge is subjected to CVD, polishing, etc., the workpiece may be damaged due to heat or pressure applied to the workpiece. Therefore, before processing the workpiece, it is preferable to inspect to detect the presence or absence of defective parts such as burrs or chipping. For this purpose, it is desirable to be able to inspect the defective part of the workpiece before positioning the workpiece using the above-mentioned conventional technique.

然而,進行工件缺陷部分的檢査時,係先用工件輸送裝置將工件輸送到缺陷部分檢査用裝置以進行缺陷部分的檢査,檢査後,還須用工件輸送裝置將工件輸送到執行工件定位的裝置進行定位,故有工件檢査及工件輸送到檢査裝置要耗費時間的問題。However, when inspecting the defective part of the workpiece, the workpiece conveying device is first used to convey the workpiece to the defective part inspection device to inspect the defective part. After the inspection, the workpiece conveying device must also be used to convey the workpiece to the device that performs workpiece positioning The positioning is performed, so there is a problem that it takes time to inspect the workpiece and transport the workpiece to the inspection device.

此外,除了進行定位的裝置外,也需要設置執行檢査的裝置,故在使成本升高的同時,也必須在工件輸送路徑上確保執行檢査裝置的設置場所,而有要達到節省空間是極為困難的問題。In addition to the positioning device, it is also necessary to install an inspection device. Therefore, while increasing the cost, it is also necessary to ensure the installation site of the inspection device on the workpiece conveying path, and it is extremely difficult to achieve space saving. The problem.

結果,習知技術中,乃有無法適當地進行工件缺陷檢測的課題。As a result, in the conventional technology, there is a problem that the defect detection of the workpiece cannot be properly performed.

本發明係為了解決上述的課題而研發者,其目的在提供能夠適當地進行工件缺陷檢測的工件處理裝置等。The present invention was developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its object is to provide a workpiece processing apparatus and the like that can appropriately detect workpiece defects.

[解決課題所使用的手段] 本發明的工件處理裝置具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部,供儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊為具有使圓形工件旋轉時的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊,而該第一距離資訊為關於從對應旋轉角度的工件旋轉中心至邊緣的距離資訊;取得部,使用儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,來取得工件對準位置用的資訊、特定工件之朝向用的資訊、及關於工件邊緣缺陷部分的資訊;以及輸出部,用以輸出取得部所取得的工件對準位置用的資訊、特定工件的朝向用的資訊、及關於缺陷部分的資訊。[Methods used to solve the problem] The workpiece processing device of the present invention includes: a first rotation distance information storage section for storing a plurality of first rotation distance information, the first rotation distance information is formed by having a rotation angle when rotating a circular workpiece and the first distance information Corresponding information, and the first distance information is the distance information from the center of rotation of the workpiece to the edge of the corresponding rotation angle; the obtaining section obtains the first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage section Information for alignment of the workpiece, information for the orientation of the specific workpiece, and information about the defective part of the edge of the workpiece; and an output section for outputting the information for the alignment of the workpiece acquired by the acquisition section, for the orientation of the specific workpiece Information, and information about defective parts.

藉由此種構成,在結合對準工件的位置與朝向時,可進行工件邊緣缺陷的檢測,而可適當地進行工件缺陷的檢測。With such a configuration, when the position and orientation of the aligned workpiece are combined, the edge defect of the workpiece can be detected, and the defect of the workpiece can be appropriately detected.

再者,本發明的工件處理裝置在前述工件處理裝置中進一步具備:移動部,使用輸出部輸出的有關工件邊緣缺陷部分的資訊,令工件移動,俾使工件邊緣的缺陷部分配置在預先指定區域的拍攝區域内;拍攝部,用以拍攝配置於拍攝區域内的工件邊緣缺陷部分;以及影像輸出部,用以輸出拍攝部所拍攝的影像。Furthermore, the workpiece processing apparatus of the present invention further includes: a moving unit that uses the information about the defective part of the workpiece edge output by the output unit to move the workpiece so that the defective part of the workpiece edge is arranged in a predetermined area In the shooting area; the shooting section, used to shoot the defective part of the workpiece edge arranged in the shooting area; and the image output section, used to output the image shot by the shooting section.

藉由此種構成,可容易確認工件邊緣的缺陷部分。With this configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the defective portion on the edge of the workpiece.

再者,本發明的工件輸送系統具備:前述工件處理裝置;以及對工件處理裝置進行工件傳送的工件輸送裝置。Furthermore, the workpiece conveyance system of the present invention includes: the aforementioned workpiece processing device; and a workpiece conveyance device that conveys the workpiece to the workpiece processing device.

藉由此種構成,可於輸送中在工件處理裝置一併進行結合工件位置與朝向的處理及檢測缺陷部分的處理,故可以縮短結合工件位置與朝向的處理及缺陷部分的檢測處理所需要的時間。而且,輸送時的工件移動可抑制到最小限度。With this configuration, the processing of combining the position and orientation of the workpiece and the processing of detecting the defective portion can be performed together in the workpiece processing device during transportation, so that the processing required to combine the processing of the position and orientation of the workpiece and the detection of the defective portion can be shortened time. Moreover, the movement of the workpiece during transportation can be suppressed to a minimum.

[發明的功效] 若依本發明的工件處理裝置等,可適當地進行工件缺陷的檢測。[Efficacy of invention] According to the workpiece processing apparatus of the present invention, etc., the defect detection of the workpiece can be appropriately performed.

以下,參照圖式就工件處理裝置等的實施形態加以說明。此外,實施形態中,由於附註相同符號的構成要素係執行同樣的動作,故有省略再次說明的情形。Hereinafter, embodiments of the workpiece processing apparatus and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the embodiment, since the constituent elements with the same reference signs perform the same operation, there is a case where the explanation will be omitted.

(實施形態1) 圖1為本實施形態的工件處理裝置1的方塊圖。(Embodiment 1) FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a workpiece processing apparatus 1 of this embodiment.

工件處理裝置1具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101、邊緣位置檢測器102、取得部103、輸出部104、評估相關資訊受理部105、以及設定部106。The workpiece processing apparatus 1 includes a first rotation distance information storage unit 101, an edge position detector 102, an acquisition unit 103, an output unit 104, an evaluation-related information reception unit 105, and a setting unit 106.

取得部103具備例如:合成裝置1031、合成處理裝置1032、修正資訊取得裝置1033、第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、以及缺陷檢測裝置1037。The acquisition unit 103 includes, for example, a synthesis device 1031, a synthesis processing device 1032, a correction information acquisition device 1033, a second distance information acquisition device 1034, a calculation device 1035, a notch detection device 1036, and a defect detection device 1037.

圖2為用以說明本實施形態中作為第一旋轉距離資訊之取得對象的圓形工件的一例的示意圖(圖2(a))、及用以說明取得工件修正資訊之處理的示意圖(圖2(b))。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a circular workpiece that is the target of acquiring the first rotation distance information in the present embodiment (FIG. 2(a)), and a schematic diagram for explaining the process of acquiring the workpiece correction information (FIG. 2 (b)).

圖3為本實施形態的邊緣位置檢測器102的一例的示意圖。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of the edge position detector 102 of this embodiment.

圖4為具備本實施形態的工件處理裝置1的工件輸送系統1000的一例的俯視圖。FIG. 4 is a plan view of an example of a workpiece conveying system 1000 provided with the workpiece processing apparatus 1 of this embodiment.

工件處理裝置1為例如對圓形工件(以下亦簡稱為工件)10進行工件10的位置與朝向結合用資訊的取得處理、及邊緣缺陷部分的檢測處理的裝置。所謂工件10的位置與朝向的結合用資訊,是指例如為了能將工件10朝預先指定方向配置於預先指定位置所使用的資訊。The workpiece processing device 1 is, for example, a device that performs information acquisition processing for the position and orientation combination of the workpiece 10 and detection processing of edge defects on a circular workpiece (hereinafter also simply referred to as a workpiece) 10. The information for combining the position and orientation of the workpiece 10 refers to, for example, information used to arrange the workpiece 10 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction.

圓形工件10為例如圓形半導體晶圓(以下稱為晶圓)、貼設於補強用圓形晶圓座等的晶圓、圓形玻璃基板等基板。圓形工件的材質(例如晶圓的材質)則不拘。此外,圓形工件10也可為非完整的圓形,例如,也可在邊緣11的一部具有定向扁平部(orientation flat) 17、V形槽(notch)部(未圖示)等缺口部。工件10也可具有兩個以上缺口部。所謂工件10的邊緣11係指例如工件10的周緣部分。The round workpiece 10 is, for example, a round semiconductor wafer (hereinafter referred to as a wafer), a wafer mounted on a round wafer base for reinforcement, or a substrate such as a round glass substrate. The material of the round workpiece (such as the material of the wafer) is not limited. In addition, the circular workpiece 10 may also be an incomplete circle. For example, a portion of the edge 11 may have a notch such as an orientation flat 17 or a V-notch (not shown). . The workpiece 10 may have two or more notch portions. The edge 11 of the workpiece 10 refers to, for example, the peripheral portion of the workpiece 10.

第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101是供儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。該等第一旋轉距離資訊是指具有在使圓形工件10以例如工件10上的一點為旋轉中心O進行旋轉時,旋轉角度與對應該旋轉角度的第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊。其為關於從工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的資訊。工件10的旋轉中心O不必一定要與工件10的中心Q一致。The first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is for storing a plurality of first rotation distance information. The first rotation distance information means that when the circular workpiece 10 is rotated about a point on the workpiece 10 as the rotation center O, for example, the rotation angle corresponds to the first distance information corresponding to the rotation angle. It is information about the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge. The rotation center O of the workpiece 10 does not necessarily need to coincide with the center Q of the workpiece 10.

第一距離資訊為關於從工件10的旋轉中心O至工件10的邊緣11的距離的資訊。第一距離資訊為關於例如以工件10的旋轉中心O作為一端的預先指定線段至與工件10的邊緣11重疊的位置為止的距離資訊。第一距離資訊為例如從工件10的旋轉中心O至邊緣11的距離。例如圖2所示,第一距離資訊為在以工件10的旋轉中心O作為一端的預先指定線段14上,使用沿著該線段配置的線感測器等感測器15所取得的有關邊緣11的位置的測定值、或使用該測定值取得的值。The first distance information is information about the distance from the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. The first distance information is, for example, distance information about a predetermined line segment with the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 as one end to a position overlapping the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. The first distance information is, for example, the distance from the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first distance information is the relevant edge 11 obtained by using a sensor 15 such as a line sensor disposed along the line segment on the pre-designated line segment 14 with the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 as one end The measured value of the position of, or the value obtained using the measured value.

以下,在本實施形態中,第一距離資訊以從工件10的旋轉中心O至邊緣11的距離r的情形為例來說明,而該距離r則從藉感測器15取得的表示工件10的邊緣11的位置資訊來取得。In the following, in the present embodiment, the first distance information is described by taking the distance r from the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11 as an example, and the distance r is obtained from the sensor 15 to indicate the The position information of the edge 11 is obtained.

此外,第一距離資訊只要是實質上表示與從工件10的旋轉中心O至工件10的邊緣11的距離對應的值的資訊即可。第一距離資訊也可為例如表示從作為感測器15的基準的位置(例如,0點)等至邊緣11的距離的資訊。而且,也可為表示感測器15檢測到邊緣11的部分,例如檢測到邊緣11的元件或其排列位置等的資訊。In addition, the first distance information may be information that substantially represents a value corresponding to the distance from the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. The first distance information may be, for example, information indicating the distance to the edge 11 from a position (for example, 0 o'clock) as a reference of the sensor 15. Furthermore, it may be information indicating that the sensor 15 detects the edge 11, for example, the element or the arrangement position of the edge 11 is detected.

所謂旋轉角度,例如在旋轉前、或以開始取得第一距離資訊的狀態等預先指定狀態的值當作0度等初期值時,使工件10旋轉的角度值。儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,係為具有例如使工件10逐次以預先指定角度依序旋轉時所得的第一距離資訊、及其旋轉角度的資訊。複數個第一旋轉距離資訊具有例如以預先指定的角度間隔相連續的旋轉角度。所謂預先指定角度,是指一定的角度,例如,使工件10旋轉以取得第一距離資訊時的旋轉角度的最小單位。預先指定角度較佳為例如以4的倍數分割360度所得的值。預先指定角度係指例如將360度分割為1000、或10000等所得的值,例如,0.36度、或0.036度等。此外,旋轉角度的單位等則不拘。The rotation angle is, for example, an angle value at which the workpiece 10 is rotated before the rotation or when a value in a predetermined state such as a state in which the first distance information is started is regarded as an initial value such as 0 degrees. The plurality of first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is, for example, first distance information obtained by sequentially rotating the workpiece 10 at a predetermined angle and its rotation angle information. The plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information have rotation angles that are consecutive at predetermined angular intervals, for example. The predetermined angle refers to a certain angle, for example, the minimum unit of the rotation angle when the workpiece 10 is rotated to obtain the first distance information. The predetermined angle is preferably a value obtained by dividing 360 degrees by a multiple of 4, for example. The pre-specified angle refers to a value obtained by dividing 360 degrees into 1000, or 10000, etc., for example, 0.36 degrees, 0.036 degrees, or the like. In addition, the unit of rotation angle is not limited.

第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101是供儲存例如針對一個或兩個以上工件10分別取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。例如,儲存形成對應的對應於各工件10的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊與工件10的識別符的工件識別符。The first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is for storing, for example, a plurality of first rotation distance information obtained for one or more workpieces 10 respectively. For example, a workpiece identifier forming a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information corresponding to each workpiece 10 and an identifier of the workpiece 10 is stored.

第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101中儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊對應於例如至少一次旋轉量的複數個旋轉角度,具體而言,一次旋轉量的複數個旋轉角度為由0至360度範圍的複數個旋轉角度。但,也可儲存與未達一次旋轉的複數個旋轉角度對應的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。也可儲存例如複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等旋轉距離資訊對應於比一次旋轉(0至360度)還小的旋轉量,而該旋轉量的角度又比旋轉角度的最小單位還小。此外,也可儲存多於一次旋轉(0至360度)的旋轉量的複數個旋轉角度,例如,與1.5次旋轉量或2次旋轉量的複數個旋轉角度對應的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。The first rotation distance information storage unit 101 stores a plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to, for example, a plurality of rotation angles of at least one rotation amount, specifically, a plurality of rotation angles of one rotation amount It is a plurality of rotation angles ranging from 0 to 360 degrees. However, it is also possible to store a plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to a plurality of rotation angles that have not reached one rotation. For example, a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information may be stored. The rotation distance information corresponds to a rotation amount smaller than one rotation (0 to 360 degrees), and the angle of the rotation amount is smaller than the minimum unit of the rotation angle. In addition, a plurality of rotation angles of a rotation amount of more than one rotation (0 to 360 degrees) may also be stored, for example, a plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to a plurality of rotation angles of 1.5 rotations or 2 rotations .

本實施形態中,是就在第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101中儲存邊緣位置檢測器102所取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊時的情形作為一例加以說明。但,複數個第一旋轉距離資訊以何種方式儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101則不拘。例如,也可使未圖示的受理部等經由記憶媒體或通訊線路等所受理的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。In this embodiment, the case where a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information acquired by the edge position detector 102 is stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is described as an example. However, the manner in which the plurality of first rotation distance information is stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is not limited. For example, a plurality of first rotation distance information received via a memory medium, a communication line, or the like in a reception unit (not shown) may be stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

此外,此處的儲存也包含暫時記憶的概念。例如,將邊緣位置檢測器102針對工件所取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊暫時記憶的情況,在此亦視作為儲存。In addition, the storage here also includes the concept of temporary memory. For example, a case where the plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information acquired by the edge position detector 102 for the workpiece is temporarily stored is also regarded as storage here.

第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101以非揮發性記錄媒體較合適,但也可以揮發性記錄媒體來實現。這種情形對於其他儲存部也是一樣。The first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is preferably a non-volatile recording medium, but it can also be realized by a volatile recording medium. This situation is the same for other storage units.

邊緣位置檢測器102針對工件10取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。具體而言,邊緣位置檢測器102檢測工件10的邊緣位置,並針對工件取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。邊緣位置檢測器102將所取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。The edge position detector 102 obtains a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece 10. Specifically, the edge position detector 102 detects the edge position of the workpiece 10 and obtains a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece. The edge position detector 102 stores the obtained plurality of first rotation distance information in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

邊緣位置檢測器102具備有例如線感測器等感測器15、及使所載置的工件10旋轉的轉盤52等,其使用使工件10每旋轉預先指定的旋轉角度就加以測定的邊緣位置的測定值,例如,使用從工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的測定值等,依序取得第一距離資訊及旋轉角度。工件10的旋轉中心為例如使旋轉工件10旋轉的轉盤的旋轉中心。The edge position detector 102 includes a sensor 15 such as a line sensor, a turntable 52 that rotates the placed workpiece 10, and the like, and uses an edge position that is measured every time the workpiece 10 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle The measured value of, for example, uses the measured value of the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge, etc. to sequentially acquire the first distance information and the rotation angle. The center of rotation of the workpiece 10 is, for example, the center of rotation of a turntable that rotates the rotating workpiece 10.

邊緣位置檢測器102也可具備移動裝置(未圖示),並使用後述輸出部104輸出的工件10對準位置資訊,例如修正資訊,令轉盤52等的位置移動,俾使工件10的中心位於預先指定位置。再者,邊緣位置檢測器102也可具備控制裝置(未圖示)等,並使用後述輸出部104輸出的工件10的朝向特定資訊(例如,表示缺口部的資訊),令轉盤52旋轉,俾使工件10朝向預先的指定方向。The edge position detector 102 may also be provided with a moving device (not shown), and uses the workpiece 10 output from the output section 104 described later to align position information, such as correction information, to move the position of the turntable 52, etc., so that the center of the workpiece 10 is located Specify the location in advance. In addition, the edge position detector 102 may also include a control device (not shown), etc., and use the orientation specific information of the workpiece 10 (for example, information indicating a notch) output by the output unit 104 described later to rotate the turntable 52 so that The workpiece 10 is directed in a predetermined direction.

邊緣位置檢測器102使例如針對各工件取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊與各工件的工件識別符形成對應,並儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。The edge position detector 102 associates, for example, a plurality of pieces of first rotational distance information acquired for each workpiece with the workpiece identifier of each workpiece, and stores them in the first rotational distance information storage unit 101.

取得部103使用與儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的一個工件對應的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,以取得用以使工件10對準位置的資訊、用以特定工件10的朝向的資訊、及關於工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分的資訊。The obtaining section 103 uses a plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to one workpiece stored in the first rotation distance information storage section 101 to obtain information for aligning the workpiece 10 and information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10 And information about the defective part of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10.

所謂用以使工件10對準位置的資訊,是指為了使例如工件10配置於預先指定位置而使用的資訊。所謂用以使工件10對準位置的資訊,是指例如工件10原來配置的位置和工件10實際上配置的位置的偏移的資訊、或修正資訊。修正資訊為例如修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊。取得部103以何種方式取得用以使工件10對準位置的資訊均可。例如,取得部103也可使用上述的習知技術取得對準位置用資訊。此外,本實施形態中,將於後陳述修正資訊取得裝置1033取得對準位置用資訊的處理作為具體例。The information for aligning the workpiece 10 with the position refers to information used for arranging the workpiece 10 at a predetermined position, for example. The information used to align the position of the workpiece 10 refers to, for example, information about the deviation of the position where the workpiece 10 is originally arranged and the position where the workpiece 10 is actually arranged, or correction information. The correction information is, for example, correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device 1033. The acquisition unit 103 may acquire information for aligning the workpiece 10 in any manner. For example, the acquisition unit 103 may acquire the information for alignment using the above-mentioned conventional technique. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of acquiring the information for the alignment position by the correction information acquisition device 1033 will be described later as a specific example.

所謂工件10的朝向特定用資訊,是指例如為了將工件向著預先指定的朝向配置而使用的資訊,例如表示用以特定工件的朝向的定向扁平部或V形槽部等缺口部的資訊。表示缺口部的資訊為例如表示缺口部的位置的資訊。此外,也可再具有缺口部的規格等的資訊。表示該缺口部的資訊可藉例如缺口檢測裝置1036來取得。取得部103以何種方式取得工件10的朝向特定用資訊均可。例如,取得部103也可使用上述的習知技術來取得工件的朝向特定用資訊。The information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10 refers to, for example, information used for arranging the workpiece in a predetermined orientation, for example, information indicating a notch such as an oriented flat portion or a V-shaped groove portion for specifying the orientation of the workpiece. The information indicating the notch is, for example, information indicating the position of the notch. In addition, information such as the specifications of the notch can also be provided. Information indicating the notch can be obtained by, for example, notch detection device 1036. The acquisition unit 103 may acquire the information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10 in any manner. For example, the acquiring unit 103 may acquire the information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece using the above-mentioned conventional technique.

例如,取得部103可使用關於缺口部的大小的一個或兩個以上臨界值來進行缺口部的檢測,經檢測後,取得表示缺口部的資訊。所謂關於缺口部的大小的一個或兩個以上臨界值,係指例如有關缺口部的寬度及自邊緣起算的距離中的至少一個以上臨界值。例如,所謂關於缺口部的大小的臨界值,係指表示有關自缺口部邊緣起算的距離的下限值的臨界值、或分別表示缺口部寬度的下限值及上限值的臨界值。有關自缺口部邊緣起算距離的下限值,係指例如缺口部自邊緣起算的距離較大的部分,例如距離最大的部分,沒有缺口部時自原來的邊緣位置起算的距離的下限值。For example, the acquiring unit 103 may use one or more critical values regarding the size of the notch to detect the notch, and after the detection, obtain information indicating the notch. The one or more critical values regarding the size of the notch refers to, for example, at least one critical value among the width of the notch and the distance from the edge. For example, the critical value regarding the size of the notch refers to a critical value indicating the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the notch, or a critical value indicating the lower and upper limits of the width of the notch, respectively. The lower limit of the distance from the edge of the notch refers to, for example, a portion where the distance from the edge of the notch is large, for example, a portion with the largest distance, and a distance from the original edge position when there is no notch.

例如,取得部103可使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處的朝向工件10内側呈凹狀的連續區域進行檢測,並判斷該凹狀區域内自邊緣起算的深度(亦即,自邊緣起算的距離)有無臨界值以上的部分,亦即,自邊緣起算的距離有無自缺口部邊緣起算距離的下限值的臨界值以上的部分,若有臨界值以上的部分,則將該凹狀區域判斷為缺口部,並取得表示該區域的位置的資訊,例如,以旋轉角度範圍的資訊作為表示缺口部的資訊。For example, the acquiring unit 103 may use a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information to detect a continuous area at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 that is concave toward the inside of the workpiece 10, and determine the depth from the edge in the concave area (also That is, the distance from the edge) has a portion above the critical value, that is, whether the distance from the edge has a portion above the critical value of the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the notch, and if there is a portion above the critical value, then The concave region is determined as a notch, and information indicating the position of the region is obtained, for example, information on the rotation angle range is used as information indicating the notch.

另外,所謂連續區域,是指例如第一距離資訊的取得順序相連續的部分、或第一距離資訊的對應旋轉角度相連續的部分。例如,取得部103可從第一旋轉距離資訊、和工件10的半徑或者自工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的差值來檢測連續凹部或連續凸部。此外,也可藉由例如對連續的第一距離資訊進行2階微分來檢測存在於工件10的邊緣11的凹狀部分或凸狀部分的兩端。因此,從夾介於依此方式檢測的部分的區域内的第一旋轉距離資訊的值、或與上述相同工件10的半徑等的差值,即可判斷該所檢測的區域為凹狀或凸狀。所以,透過以上述方式使用臨界值來判斷依此方式判定為凹狀的工件10的邊緣11的區域是否為缺口部,取得部103也可檢測缺口部。此外,由於依此方式進行2階微分等來檢測邊緣11的缺口部或缺陷部分的處理係屬公知技術,其詳細說明容予省略。In addition, the continuous area refers to, for example, a portion where the order of acquiring the first distance information is continuous, or a portion where the corresponding rotation angle of the first distance information is continuous. For example, the acquisition unit 103 may detect the continuous concave portion or the continuous convex portion from the difference between the first rotation distance information and the radius of the workpiece 10 or the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge. In addition, the two ends of the concave portion or the convex portion existing on the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 may be detected by, for example, performing second-order differentiation on the continuous first distance information. Therefore, it can be judged whether the detected area is concave or convex from the value of the first rotational distance information within the area of the portion detected in this way, or the difference from the radius of the same workpiece 10 as described above, etc. shape. Therefore, by using the threshold value as described above to determine whether the region of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 determined to be concave in this way is a notch, the acquisition part 103 can also detect the notch. In addition, the process of detecting the notch or defect of the edge 11 by performing second-order differentiation or the like in this way is a well-known technique, and its detailed description will be omitted.

此外,所謂使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,也包含可使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊所獲得的資訊(例如,使用後述的距離差資訊)等的概念。In addition, the use of plural first rotation distance information also includes concepts that can be obtained by using plural first rotation distance information (for example, using distance difference information described later).

再者,取得部103也可例如使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處向工件10内側呈凹狀的連續區域進行檢測,並判斷該凹狀區域的寬度是否在分別表示缺口部寬度的下限值與上限值的臨界值範圍,若在範圍,則將該凹狀區域判斷為缺口部,並取得表示該區域位置的資訊(例如,旋轉角度範圍的資訊),作為表示缺口部的資訊。In addition, the acquiring unit 103 may also use a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information to detect a continuous region that is concave toward the inner side of the workpiece 10 at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10, and determine whether the width of the concave region is expressed separately. The critical value range of the lower limit value and the upper limit value of the width of the notch, if it is within the range, the concave region is judged as a notch, and information indicating the position of the region (for example, information on the rotation angle range) is obtained as Information about the notch.

或者,也可將藉由自上述的邊緣起算的距離進行的判斷及藉由寬度進行的判斷加以組合,在自邊緣起算的距離為臨界值以上,且寬度在臨界值所示範圍時,即將連續區域判斷為缺口部。Alternatively, it is possible to combine the judgment by the distance from the above edge and the judgment by the width. When the distance from the edge is more than the critical value and the width is within the range shown by the critical value, it is about to be continuous The area is judged as a notch.

此外,本實施形態中,將於後陳述缺口檢測裝置1036取得表示缺口部資訊的處理,作為取得部103取得朝向特定用資訊的處理具體例。In addition, in the present embodiment, the process of acquiring the information indicating the notch part by the notch detection device 1036 will be described later as a specific example of the process that the acquiring unit 103 acquires the information for direction identification.

所謂關於缺陷部分的資訊,係為例如表示工件10的缺陷部分的存在位置的資訊,具體而言為表示旋轉角度、或缺陷部分存在區域範圍的資訊(例如,表示旋轉角度範圍的資訊)。而且,關於缺陷部分的資訊係為表示缺陷部分大小,例如自邊緣起算的距離、具體而言為表示缺陷部分的深度或高度、缺陷部分寬度的資訊。關於缺陷部分的資訊也可再具有辨別缺陷部分的識別符、或工件10的識別符。所謂缺陷部分,是指例如工件10的邊緣11的毛邊、崩缺、塵屑等。此外,關於缺陷部分的資訊也可為表示有無缺陷部分的資訊。再者,關於缺陷部分的資訊也可為表示缺陷部分是工件10的邊緣11的凹部或凸部的資訊。例如,關於缺陷部分的資訊為關於缺陷檢測裝置1037要取得的缺陷部分的資訊。The information about the defective part is, for example, information indicating the existence position of the defective part of the workpiece 10, specifically, information indicating the rotation angle or the area where the defective part exists (for example, information indicating the rotation angle range). Moreover, the information about the defective part is information indicating the size of the defective part, for example, the distance from the edge, specifically, information indicating the depth or height of the defective part, and the width of the defective part. The information about the defective part may further have an identifier for identifying the defective part, or an identifier for the workpiece 10. The defective portion refers to, for example, burrs, chipping, dust, and the like of the edge 11 of the work 10. In addition, the information about the defective part may also be information indicating whether there is a defective part. Furthermore, the information about the defective portion may also be information indicating that the defective portion is a concave or convex portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. For example, the information about the defective part is information about the defective part to be acquired by the defect detection device 1037.

取得部103使用例如關於缺陷部分大小的一個或兩個以上臨界值來進行缺陷部分的檢測,經檢測後,取得關於缺陷部分的資訊。所謂關於缺陷部分大小的一個或兩個以上臨界值,是指例如有關於缺陷部分的寬度及自邊緣起算的距離中至少一個以上的一個或兩個以上臨界值。The obtaining unit 103 uses, for example, one or more critical values regarding the size of the defective part to detect the defective part, and after the detection, obtains information about the defective part. The one or more critical values regarding the size of the defective portion refer to, for example, one or more critical values regarding at least one or more of the width of the defective portion and the distance from the edge.

取得部103會例如針對複數個第一旋轉距離資訊方面,計算出表示邊緣11沒有缺陷部分時自工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離(或是工件10的半徑)的差的距離,並檢測該距離在缺陷部分距離在下限值以上的第一旋轉距離資訊,經檢測後,取得關於缺陷部分的資訊。例如,取得部103會取得該第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的旋轉角度資訊等,作為關於缺陷部分的資訊。另外,上述的檢測第一旋轉距離資訊也包含檢測第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的第一距離資訊、或檢測旋轉角度的概念。The acquiring unit 103 calculates, for example, for a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information, the distance indicating the difference between the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge (or the radius of the workpiece 10) when the edge 11 has no defective part, and detects the The first rotation distance information whose distance is above the lower limit value of the defective part, after detection, obtains information about the defective part. For example, the obtaining unit 103 obtains the rotation angle information and the like of the first rotation distance information as the information about the defective part. In addition, the detection of the first rotation distance information also includes the concept of detecting the first distance information possessed by the first rotation distance information or detecting the rotation angle.

此外,取得部103也可例如使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處向工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域、或向工件10的外側呈凸狀的連續區域進行檢測,並判斷該凹狀區域或凸狀區域内是否有自邊緣起算的距離在缺陷部分自邊緣起算距離的下限值的臨界值以上的部分,若有臨界值以上的部分,即將該凹狀區域或凸狀區域判斷為缺陷部分,並取得關於該缺陷部分的資訊,例如旋轉角度範圍的資訊。In addition, the acquiring unit 103 may also use a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information to detect a continuous area that is concave toward the inner side of the workpiece 10 or a continuous area that is convex toward the outer side of the workpiece 10 at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 And determine whether there is a part in the concave or convex region whose distance from the edge is above the critical value of the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the defective part, and if there is a part above the critical value, the concave region Or the convex area is judged as a defective part, and obtains information about the defective part, for example, the information of the rotation angle range.

還有,此處所謂自邊緣起算的距離,是指例如未有缺陷或缺口部時的自邊緣起算距離、或未有缺陷或缺口部的理想工件以邊緣為基準的距離。此處所謂自邊緣起算的距離,是指例如工件10自邊緣朝工件10的旋轉中心的方向的距離、或自邊緣朝與工件10的旋轉中心相反方向的距離。例如,此處的自邊緣起算的距離,是指在工件未有缺口部或缺陷部分時自邊緣至缺口部的距離、或自邊緣至缺陷部分的距離。此處的自邊緣起算的距離也可以為邊緣的凹狀區域的深度、或凸狀區域的高度。此處的自邊緣起算的距離也可以為自邊緣起算距離的大小、或缺口部或是缺陷部分的深度或高度的大小或絕對值。這種情況在下文中亦屬相同。Here, the distance from the edge means, for example, the distance from the edge when there is no defect or notch, or the distance of the ideal workpiece without defects or notch from the edge. Here, the distance from the edge means, for example, the distance from the edge of the workpiece 10 in the direction of the rotation center of the workpiece 10 or the distance from the edge in the direction opposite to the rotation center of the workpiece 10. For example, the distance from the edge here refers to the distance from the edge to the notch or the distance from the edge to the defect when the workpiece has no notch or defect. Here, the distance from the edge may be the depth of the concave region of the edge or the height of the convex region. Here, the distance from the edge may be the size of the distance from the edge, or the size or absolute value of the depth or height of the notch or defect. This situation is the same below.

存在於工件10的邊緣11的凹狀部分或凸狀部分的兩端,如上所述,也可利用例如對連續的第一距離資訊施行2階微分來進行檢測。而且,取得部103也可使用上述的臨界值來判斷夾介於依此方式檢測的部分的工件10的邊緣11的區域是否為缺陷部分,以檢測缺陷部分。The two ends of the concave portion or the convex portion existing on the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 can be detected by, for example, performing second-order differentiation on continuous first distance information. Moreover, the acquiring unit 103 may also use the above-mentioned threshold value to determine whether the region sandwiched between the edges 11 of the workpiece 10 detected in this way is a defective part, so as to detect the defective part.

再者,取得部103也可例如使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處朝工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域、或朝工件10的外側呈凸狀的連續區域進行檢測,並判斷該凹狀區域或凸狀區域的寬度是否在缺陷部分寬度下限值的臨界值以上,若為下限值以上,則將該凹狀區域或凸狀區域判斷為缺陷部,並取得關於該缺陷部分的資訊。此外,作為下限值的臨界值,連續區域為凹狀時及為凸狀時,可使用不同的臨界值,也可使用相同的臨界值。Furthermore, the acquiring unit 103 may use, for example, a plurality of first rotation distance information to perform a continuous region that is concave toward the inner side of the workpiece 10 at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 or a continuous region that is convex toward the outer side of the workpiece 10 Detect and determine whether the width of the concave region or convex region is greater than the critical value of the lower limit of the width of the defective portion, and if it is greater than the lower limit, the concave region or convex region is determined as a defective part, and Get information about the defective part. In addition, as the critical value of the lower limit value, when the continuous region is concave and convex, different critical values may be used, or the same critical value may be used.

或者,也可將藉上述的自邊緣起算距離進行的判斷與藉寬度進行的判斷加以組合,自邊緣起算的距離為臨界值以上,且寬度為臨界值以上時,即將連續區域判斷為缺陷部分。Alternatively, it is also possible to combine the judgment by the distance from the edge and the judgment by the width. When the distance from the edge is more than the critical value and the width is more than the critical value, the continuous area is judged as a defective part.

此外,取得部103也可將使用複數個第一旋轉距離資訊檢測的工件朝向特定用缺口部的數量與原來設在工件10的缺口部的數量加以比較,兩者數量相異時,即取得表示邊緣有缺陷的關於缺陷部分的資訊。In addition, the acquiring unit 103 may also compare the number of workpiece orientation-specific notches detected using the plurality of first rotation distance information with the number of notches originally provided in the workpiece 10, and when the numbers are different, the representation Information about defective parts with defective edges.

再者,在檢測缺陷部分時,取得部103也可以將配置有工件的朝向特定用缺口部的區域除外的方式進行檢測,或者,經檢測的缺陷部分位在配置有缺口部的區域内時,也可以不取得關於該經檢測的缺陷部分的資訊。In addition, when detecting a defective portion, the acquiring unit 103 may detect the area where the orientation-specific notch portion of the workpiece is disposed, or when the detected defective portion is located in the region where the notch portion is disposed, It is also possible not to obtain information about the detected defective part.

還有,於本實施形態中,特別舉出取得部103具有:合成裝置1031、合成處理裝置1032、修正資訊取得裝置1033、第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、缺陷檢測裝置1037的情況為例來說明。In addition, in this embodiment, it is specifically mentioned that the acquisition unit 103 includes a synthesis device 1031, a synthesis processing device 1032, a correction information acquisition device 1033, a second distance information acquisition device 1034, a calculation device 1035, a gap detection device 1036, and a defect The case of the detection device 1037 will be described as an example.

合成裝置1031是用來將包含於複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中其對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊合成。此處的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,是指例如儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的有關作為處理對象之一的工件10的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。The synthesizing device 1031 is used to synthesize a plurality of first distance information whose corresponding rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information. The plurality of first rotation distance information herein refers to, for example, the plurality of first rotation distance information about the workpiece 10 as one of the processing objects stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

所謂將旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊合成,也可以為例如將對應的旋轉角度的差為90度的整數倍的複數個第一距離資訊的組對分別加以合成。所謂90度的整數倍為例如90度、180度、270度等。The so-called synthesis of a plurality of first distance information whose rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees may be, for example, a combination of a plurality of pairs of first distance information whose corresponding rotation angle difference is an integer multiple of 90 degrees. The integer multiple of 90 degrees is, for example, 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees.

合成裝置1031將例如包含於複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中對應旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊分別合成,以取得複數個合成距離資訊的方式,也可以為例如將對應的旋轉角度的差為90度的n倍(n為1至3的整數)的複數個第一距離資訊的組對分別合成的情形。The synthesizing device 1031 synthesizes four pieces of first distance information corresponding to different rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information, respectively, to obtain a plurality of synthesized distance information, or For example, it is a case where a plurality of pairs of first distance information are synthesized separately for a corresponding rotation angle difference of 90 times n times (n is an integer of 1 to 3).

合成有複數個第一距離資訊的第一距離資訊,在此是稱為合成距離資訊。合成裝置1031一般是取得複數個合成距離資訊。此處所謂的合成是指例如將一組的複數個第一距離資訊合而為一。此處的合成也可為例如取得複數個第一距離資訊的平均值,也可為將複數個第一距離資訊進行加算的情形。此外,也可為計算複數個第一距離資訊的差的平均。例如,合成裝置1031會將包含於複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中對應的旋轉角度為θ0 、θ0 +90度、θ0 +180度、及θ0 +270度的複數個第一距離資訊的組對進行合成,並取得合成距離資訊。The first distance information that is synthesized with a plurality of first distance information is referred to herein as synthesized distance information. The synthesis device 1031 generally obtains a plurality of synthesis distance information. The synthesis here refers to, for example, combining a plurality of first distance information of a group into one. The synthesis here may be, for example, obtaining an average value of the plurality of first distance information, or may be a case of adding the plurality of first distance information. In addition, it can also be the average of calculating the difference of the plurality of first distance information. For example, the synthesis device 1031 will include a plurality of first rotation angles corresponding to the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information as θ 0 , θ 0 +90 degrees, θ 0 +180 degrees, and θ 0 +270 degrees The pair of distance information is synthesized and the synthesized distance information is obtained.

合成裝置1031也可以任何一種方式將對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊彼此分別合成。例如,合成裝置1031也可藉由將對應的旋轉角度值相連續的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊持續分割為複數個組,使旋轉角度值的範圍成為90度,且將經分割的各組排列順序相同的第一旋轉距離資訊具有的第一距離資訊彼此間進行合成,以進行上述的合成。The synthesizing device 1031 can also synthesize a plurality of first distance information with corresponding rotation angles different from each other by 90 degrees one by one in any way. For example, the synthesizing device 1031 may also divide the plurality of first rotation distance information with corresponding rotation angle values into a plurality of groups continuously, the range of the rotation angle value becomes 90 degrees, and arrange the divided groups The first distance information possessed by the first rotation distance information in the same order is synthesized with each other to perform the above-mentioned synthesis.

旋轉角度的值相連續是意指例如按毎次取得第一距離資訊使工件10旋轉時的毎個旋轉角度單位的旋轉角度值相連續的情形。旋轉角度值相連續的情形在此權稱為旋轉角度相連續。The continuous rotation angle values mean that, for example, the rotation angle values of each rotation angle unit are continuous when the first distance information is obtained every time to rotate the workpiece 10. The case where the rotation angle values are continuous is referred to herein as the rotation angle is continuous.

在此所謂排列順序是指例如將經分割的各組第一旋轉距離資訊沿著第一旋轉距離資訊各自具有的旋轉角度的上升次序或下降次序排列時的排列順序。Here, the arrangement order refers to, for example, the arrangement order when the divided first rotation distance information of each group is arranged along the ascending order or the descending order of the rotation angle each of the first rotation distance information has.

例如,在藉由使工件作一個旋轉等而取得、且具有0度以上未達360度的旋轉角度的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101時,合成裝置1031首先會將第一旋轉距離資訊分割為4部份,使對應的旋轉角度範圍成為:0度以上未達90、90度以上未達180度、180度以上未達270度、270度以上未達360度。接著,合成裝置1031會將經分割的各範圍的第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的第一距離資訊值按照旋轉角度的每個排列順序(例如,旋轉角度的上升次序或下降次序)進行合成,並取得連續的複數個合成距離資訊。藉此方式,即可將對應的旋轉角度形成逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊彼此間分別合成。此外,分割時的旋轉角度範圍不必從0度開始,也可例如從15度等按毎90度設定旋轉角度範圍。For example, when a plurality of first rotation distance information obtained by rotating the workpiece by one rotation or the like and having a rotation angle of 0 degrees or more and less than 360 degrees are stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101, the synthesis device 1031 first The first rotation distance information will be divided into 4 parts, so that the corresponding rotation angle range becomes: not more than 90 degrees above 90 degrees, not more than 90 degrees above 180 degrees, more than 180 degrees below 270 degrees, more than 270 degrees below 360 degree. Next, the synthesizing device 1031 synthesizes the first distance information values possessed by the divided first range of rotation distance information in each arrangement order of the rotation angle (for example, ascending order or descending order of the rotation angle), and Obtain a plurality of continuous synthetic distance information. In this way, the four first distance information forming corresponding rotation angles different from each other by 90 degrees can be synthesized separately from each other. In addition, the rotation angle range at the time of division does not need to start from 0 degrees, and the rotation angle range may be set every 90 degrees, for example, from 15 degrees.

再者,也可從旋轉角度範圍在90度範圍的連續複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,逐一依序取得第一旋轉距離資訊,並按所取得的每個第一旋轉距離資訊,將具有對該旋轉角度分別加算90度、180度、及270度的旋轉角度的第一旋轉距離資訊進行檢測,且將所取得的第一旋轉距離資訊與經檢測的第一旋轉距離資訊分別具有的第一距離資訊加以合成。藉此方式,就可將上述的對應旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊彼此間依序合成。Furthermore, it is also possible to obtain the first rotation distance information one by one sequentially from a plurality of consecutive first rotation distance information with a rotation angle range of 90 degrees, and according to each obtained first rotation distance information, there will be The rotation angles are respectively added to the first rotation distance information of the rotation angles of 90 degrees, 180 degrees and 270 degrees for detection, and the obtained first rotation distance information and the detected first rotation distance information respectively have the first distance Synthesize information. In this way, the four first distance information corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees can be sequentially synthesized with each other.

透過依此方式將旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個,較佳為4個第一距離資訊的組對依序合成,例如因工件10之旋轉中心O從工件10的中心Q偏移所發生的第一距離資訊増減的情形就可消除。In this way, a plurality of pairs of rotation angles different from each other by 90 degrees, preferably four pairs of first distance information, are sequentially synthesized, for example, caused by the offset of the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 from the center Q of the workpiece 10 The situation in which the first distance information is reduced can be eliminated.

而且,在合成所得的各合成距離資訊中,將例如對應合成前的複數個第一距離資訊的複數個旋轉角度的組對對應儲存。或者,也可對應儲存該旋轉角度的組對中的一部分,例如將對應的複數個旋轉角度中最小值的旋轉角度對應儲存。In addition, in each synthesized distance information obtained by synthesis, for example, a pair of plural pairs of rotation angles corresponding to plural first distance information before synthesis is stored in correspondence. Alternatively, a part of the pair of pairs that stores the rotation angle may be correspondingly stored, for example, the rotation angle of the minimum value among the corresponding plurality of rotation angles may be stored correspondingly.

合成處理裝置1032會在(合成裝置1031合成第一距離資訊而取得的資訊的)複數個合成距離資訊中,將對應旋轉角度相連續的複數個合成距離資訊,且其值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊加以檢測。然後,合成處理裝置1032會取得與經檢測的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、及與合成前的複數個第一距離資訊中的一個以上第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度。The synthesis processing device 1032 will, among the plurality of synthesized distance information (the information obtained by synthesizing the first distance information synthesized by the synthesis device 1031), the plurality of synthesized distance information corresponding to the continuous rotation angle, and the value of the value changes little Multiple synthetic distance information is detected. Then, the synthesis processing device 1032 obtains a plurality of first distance information before synthesis corresponding to one or more of the detected plurality of synthesis distance information, and one or more first distances from the plurality of first distance information before synthesis The rotation angle corresponding to the information.

所謂合成距離資訊值的大小是指例如合成距離資訊的絕對值。所謂值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊,是指例如值的大小變化量的最大值等較其他相連續的複數個合成距離資訊為小的連續複數個合成距離資訊。所謂連續複數個合成距離資訊,是指預先指定的兩個以上數目以上相連續的合成距離資訊。此處所謂的連續,意指對應於合成距離資訊的一個以上旋轉角度的一個以上相連續的情形。如上所述,合成距離資訊中,因工件10的旋轉中心O從工件10的中心Q偏移而發生的第一距離資訊的増減業已消除,故大小變化較大部分的合成距離資訊即為例如工件10的邊緣11有凹凸的部分。所謂邊緣11的凹凸,是指定向扁平部17或V形槽部等缺口部、工件10的毛邊或崩缺、塵屑等。所謂崩缺,是指例如工件10邊緣的破裂或缺縫等缺損部分。大小變化較小的部分的合成距離資訊是指例如無凹凸或凹凸較小的部分,而該部分的大小變化是因例如測定時的誤差等所致者。The size of the synthesized distance information value refers to, for example, the absolute value of the synthesized distance information. The plurality of synthesized distance information with a small change in value refers to, for example, the maximum value of the change in magnitude of the value, which is a smaller number of consecutive synthesized distance information than the other consecutive synthesized distance information of other phases. The so-called continuous plural pieces of synthetic distance information refer to two or more consecutive synthetic distance information specified in advance. The continuity here means a situation in which more than one phase corresponding to more than one rotation angle of the synthesized distance information is continuous. As described above, in the synthetic distance information, the decrease in the first distance information due to the offset of the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 from the center Q of the workpiece 10 has been eliminated, so the synthetic distance information with a larger change in size is, for example, the workpiece The edge 11 of 10 has an uneven portion. The unevenness of the edge 11 refers to the notch portion such as the flat portion 17 or the V-shaped groove portion, the burr or chipping of the workpiece 10, dust, and the like. The chipping refers to, for example, a broken part such as a crack or a gap in the edge of the work 10. The synthetic distance information of the part with a small change in size means, for example, that there is no unevenness or a part with a small unevenness, and the change in the size of the part is caused by, for example, an error in measurement.

合成處理裝置1032將例如值的大小變化量較大的合成距離資訊除外,並取得其餘合成距離資訊中對應的旋轉角度呈連續的複數個合成距離資訊,作為值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊。The synthesis processing device 1032 excludes, for example, synthesis distance information with a large amount of change in value, and obtains a plurality of continuous synthesis distance information corresponding to the rotation angle in the remaining synthesis distance information, as a plurality of synthesis with small value change Distance information.

合成處理裝置1032會在例如合成裝置1031所合成的複數個合成距離資訊中,將從值較大者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第一處理、及從值較小者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第二處理的至少一個執行1次以上。此外,未經第一處理及第二處理檢測的其餘合成距離資訊係相當於合成處理裝置1032所檢測的值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊。另外,此處的合成距離資訊檢測也可以為除外對象的合成距離資訊檢測。The synthesis processing device 1032 will, for example, in the plurality of synthesized distance information synthesized by the synthesis device 1031, first process to sequentially detect more than one synthesized distance information from the larger value, and to detect more than one sequentially from the smaller value At least one of the second processes of synthesizing distance information is executed more than once. In addition, the remaining synthetic distance information that is not detected by the first processing and the second processing is equivalent to a plurality of synthetic distance information with small changes in the magnitude of the value detected by the synthetic processing device 1032. In addition, the synthetic distance information detection here may also be the synthetic distance information detection of the excluded object.

第一處理是針對例如合成裝置1031所合成的複數個合成距離資訊檢測其最大值的合成距離資訊的處理。具體而言,是為從未檢測的合成距離資訊中檢測其最大值的合成距離資訊的處理。再者,第二處理是針對例如合成裝置1031所合成的複數個合成距離資訊檢測其最小值的合成距離資訊的處理。具體而言,是為從未經檢測的合成距離資訊中檢測其最小值的合成距離資訊的處理。The first process is a process of detecting the synthesized distance information whose maximum value is for a plurality of synthesized distance information synthesized by the synthesis device 1031, for example. Specifically, it is processing for detecting the synthesized distance information whose maximum value is from the undetected synthesized distance information. Furthermore, the second process is a process of detecting the synthesized distance information of the minimum value for plural synthesized distance information synthesized by the synthesizing device 1031, for example. Specifically, it is processing for detecting the minimum synthetic distance information from the undetected synthetic distance information.

合成處理裝置1032較佳為將第一處理與第二處理分別實施複數次。也可將複數次的第一處理與複數次的第二處理以任一種次序實施複數次。例如,也可將第一處理與第二處理交替逐次實施。又,也可在複數次的第一處理結束後,實施複數次的第二處理。此外,第一處理與第二處理的任一處理最先實施均可。The synthesis processing device 1032 preferably performs the first processing and the second processing a plurality of times, respectively. The plural first processing and the plural second processing may be performed plural times in any order. For example, the first processing and the second processing may be alternately executed one by one. In addition, after the plural first processes are completed, plural second processes may be performed. In addition, either of the first processing and the second processing may be implemented first.

還有,反覆實施第一處理時,業已在剛剛處理中檢測過的合成距離資訊排除於檢測對象之外。例如,對於已檢測的合成距離資訊,是使其與表示完成檢測的旗標等資訊對應,該旗標等資訊所對應的合成距離資訊,就不再於之後的檢測處理中進行檢測。這種方式在反覆實施第二處理時也是相同。Also, when the first process is repeatedly executed, the synthesized distance information that has been detected in the just-processed process is excluded from the detection target. For example, the detected synthetic distance information corresponds to information such as a flag indicating that the detection is completed, and the synthetic distance information corresponding to the flag and other information is no longer detected in the subsequent detection process. This method is the same when the second process is repeatedly executed.

再者,合成處理裝置1032會將第一處理或第二處理等中已檢測的合成距離資訊依序刪除,或者也可對已檢測者附註表示已刪除的旗標等資訊。此時,例如合成處理裝置1032也可以從未在第一處理中刪除的合成距離資訊檢測其最大值的合成距離資訊。其次,例如合成處理裝置1032也可以從未在第二處理中刪除的合成距離資訊檢測其最小值的合成距離資訊。Furthermore, the synthesis processing device 1032 may sequentially delete the synthesized distance information detected in the first process or the second process, or may add information indicating that the deleted flag or the like has been added to the detected person. At this time, for example, the synthesis processing device 1032 may detect the synthesis distance information of the maximum value from the synthesis distance information deleted in the first process. Secondly, for example, the synthesis processing device 1032 may detect the synthesis distance information whose minimum value is the synthesis distance information deleted from the second process.

再者,反覆實施第一處理時,合成處理裝置1032會例如反覆實施第一處理,直到符合預先指定條件。例如,所謂檢測合成距離資訊直到符合預先指定條件,是指對合成距離資訊進行檢測直到到達預先指定數。此外,預先指定條件也可為未經檢測的其餘合成距離資訊的最大值與最小值之差達到預先指定臨界值以下等情況。這種方式在第二處理中也是相同。Furthermore, when the first process is repeatedly executed, the synthesis processing device 1032, for example, repeatedly executes the first process until the predetermined conditions are met. For example, the detection of the synthesized distance information until the pre-specified condition is met refers to the detection of the synthesized distance information until the pre-specified number is reached. In addition, the pre-specified condition can also be the case where the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the remaining undetected synthesized distance information reaches below the pre-specified threshold value. This method is also the same in the second process.

有關反覆第一處理及反覆第二處理的上述預先指定條件為次數時,第一處理條件的次數與第二處理條件的次數也可設為不同的次數。例如,合成距離資訊為表示將自工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的第一距離資訊加以合成所得資訊時,一般,包含將以定向扁平部或V形槽部等缺口部取得的第一距離資訊的複數個第一距離資訊加以合成所得的合成距離資訊,相較於以其他部分取得的合成距離資訊,其值較小,甚至由於這種缺口部所存在的旋轉角度範圍很廣,為了將與這種缺口部對應的合成距離資訊當作變化較大部位進行檢測,較佳為將合成距離資訊值較小者的檢測數設定成多於值較大者的檢測數。因此,在這種情況中,較佳為將針對第二處理的預先指定條件的反覆次數值設定成較針對第一處理的預先指定條件的反覆次數值為大的值。When the above-mentioned pre-specified conditions for the iterative first processing and the iterative second processing are times, the number of times of the first processing condition and the number of times of the second processing condition may be different. For example, the synthesized distance information is information obtained by synthesizing the first distance information indicating the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge, and generally includes the first distance to be obtained by the notched portion such as the oriented flat portion or the V-shaped groove portion The synthesized distance information obtained by synthesizing a plurality of first distance information of the information is smaller than the synthesized distance information obtained from other parts, and even because of the wide rotation angle range of such a gap, in order to The combined distance information corresponding to such a notch is detected as a part with a large change, and it is preferable to set the number of detections of the person with a smaller value of the combined distance information to more than the number of detections with a larger value. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to set the value of the number of repetitions of the pre-specified condition for the second process to a value larger than the value of the number of repetitions of the pre-specified condition for the first process.

合成處理裝置1032會例如在未於第一處理及第二處理檢測的其餘合成距離資訊中,取得與預先指定數以上相連續的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、及與該複數個第一距離資訊中的一個以上對應的旋轉角度。預先指定數為2以上的數目。The synthesis processing device 1032 obtains, for example, among the remaining synthesis distance information not detected in the first process and the second process, a plurality of pre-synthesis multiple firsts corresponding to more than one of the plurality of synthesis distance information continuous with a predetermined number or more Distance information, and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one of the plurality of first distance information. The number specified in advance is 2 or more.

或者,合成處理裝置1032會例如在未於第一處理及第二處理中檢測的其餘合成距離資訊中,取得與相連續數最多的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、及與該複數個第一距離資訊中的一個以上對應的旋轉角度。Alternatively, the synthesis processing device 1032 may obtain, for example, among the remaining synthesis distance information that is not detected in the first process and the second process, a plurality of pre-synthesis multiple corresponding to one or more of the plurality of synthesis distance information with the most consecutive numbers A distance information and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one of the plurality of first distance information.

合成處理裝置1032會對例如對應的旋轉角度相連續的複數個合成距離資訊,且為值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊進行檢測,並取得與經檢測的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個對應的合成前4個第一距離資訊、及與合成前的複數個第一距離資訊中的一個的第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度。合成前的4個第一距離資訊是指對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊。該4個第一距離資訊是表示通過旋轉中心且成正交的2條直線與工件10的邊緣相交的4個點、和工件旋轉中心的距離。The synthesis processing device 1032 detects, for example, a plurality of synthesized distance information that is continuous with the corresponding rotation angle, and is a plurality of synthesized distance information with a small change in the value, and obtains the information from the detected plurality of synthesized distance information. A corresponding four first distance information before synthesis and a rotation angle corresponding to the first distance information of one of the plurality of first distance information before synthesis. The four first distance information before synthesis refer to the four first distance information whose corresponding rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees. The four pieces of first distance information represent the distance between four points that intersect the edge of the workpiece 10 through two orthogonal lines passing through the center of rotation and the center of rotation of the workpiece.

作為與合成前的複數個第一距離資訊中的一個以上第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度,要取得與一個或兩個以上的那一個第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度,是按照例如後述的修正資訊取得裝置1033取得修正資訊時要使用那種旋轉角度來決定。例如,一個合成距離資訊為旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊所合成者時,合成處理裝置1032會就值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊進行檢測,並取得一旋轉角度,該旋轉角度是與已檢測的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個對應且與合成前4個第一距離資訊對應,而實質上角度值最小者。或者,也可取得與已檢測的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個對應的合成前4個第一距離資訊對應,且為自0度至90度範圍之一的旋轉角度。另外,例如,360度+D度(D為正值)的旋轉角度也可實質上為D度。而且,-D度也可實質上為360度-D度。As the rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information among the plurality of first distance information before synthesis, to obtain the rotation angle corresponding to one or more than one first distance information, it is corrected according to, for example, described later The information obtaining device 1033 uses the rotation angle to determine the correction information. For example, when a synthesized distance information is synthesized by four first distance information whose rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees, the synthesis processing device 1032 will detect a plurality of synthesized distance information with a small change in value, and obtain a The rotation angle corresponds to one of the detected plurality of synthesized distance information and corresponds to the first four pieces of first distance information synthesized, and the angle value is substantially the smallest. Alternatively, the first four pieces of first distance information corresponding to one of the detected plurality of pieces of synthesized distance information corresponding to one of the rotation angles ranging from 0 degrees to 90 degrees can also be obtained. In addition, for example, the rotation angle of 360 degrees + D degrees (D is a positive value) may be substantially D degrees. Moreover, the -D degree may be substantially 360 degrees -D degree.

此外,為了檢測與上述的定向扁平部17對應的合成距離資訊,合成處理裝置1032也可將較合成距離資訊的平均值為小的複數個合成距離資訊一併檢測。In addition, in order to detect the synthesized distance information corresponding to the above-mentioned directional flat portion 17, the synthesis processing device 1032 may also detect a plurality of synthesized distance information that is smaller than the average value of the synthesized distance information.

再者,上述中,合成處理裝置1032藉由檢測例如值較大的合成距離資訊或值較小的合成距離資訊,並將其除外,以檢測值的大小變化較小的連續複數個合成距離資訊。但,本發明中,合成處理裝置1032以那一種方式來檢測值的大小變化較小的連續的複數個合成距離資訊均可。Furthermore, in the above, the synthesis processing device 1032 detects, for example, the synthesized distance information with a larger value or the synthesized distance information with a smaller value, and detects a plurality of consecutive synthesized distance information with a small change in the magnitude of the value . However, in the present invention, in which way, the synthesis processing device 1032 may detect a plurality of consecutive synthesis distance information with a small change in the magnitude of the value.

例如,合成處理裝置1032也可透過使用對連續合成距離資訊進行微分或2階微分等所得的值,對值的大小變化較大的連續合成距離資訊進行檢測並將其除外,對值的大小變化較小的連續複數個合成距離資訊加以檢測。例如,合成處理裝置1032也可在透過相連續的合成距離資訊進行2階微分等所得的值中,檢測預先指定臨界值以上的值,對從檢測到臨界值以上之值的旋轉角度到下一個檢測到臨界值以上之值的旋轉角度之間的合成距離資訊進行檢測,作為值的大小變化較大的合成距離資訊,並將檢測到的合成距離資訊除外所得的合成距離資訊中的連續合成距離資訊進行檢測,作為值的大小變化較小的連續複數個合成距離資訊。For example, the synthesis processing device 1032 may also use values obtained by differentiating or synthesizing continuous synthetic distance information to detect and exclude continuous synthetic distance information with a large change in value, and change the magnitude of the value. A small number of consecutive composite distance information is detected. For example, the synthesis processing device 1032 may detect a value above a predetermined threshold value from values obtained by performing second-order differentiation and the like through successive synthesis distance information, and rotate the angle from the detected value above the threshold value to the next Synthetic distance information between rotation angles at a value above the critical value is detected as synthetic distance information with a large change in value, and the continuous synthetic distance in the synthesized distance information obtained except for the detected synthetic distance information The information is detected as a plurality of consecutive synthetic distance information with small changes in value.

修正資訊取得裝置1033使用合成處理裝置1032所取得的複數個第一距離資訊及旋轉角度,來取得用以使工件10的旋轉中心對準工件10的中心的修正資訊,作為工件10對準位置用資訊。修正資訊也可以為用以使工件10的旋轉中心移動到工件10的中心的資訊、或表示位置偏移方向或大小的資訊。修正資訊為例如表示旋轉中心移動方向的資訊(例如,相對於預先指定方向的角度)與移動距離的組合。此外,修正資訊也可為表示工件10的中心的移動方向及移動距離的向量等。此外,修正資訊也可為將工件10的中心及工件10的旋轉中心配置於正交座標系時用以使工件10的旋轉中心移動到工件10的中心上表示順沿各座標軸的移動量的資訊。The correction information obtaining device 1033 uses the plurality of first distance information and the rotation angle obtained by the synthesis processing device 1032 to obtain correction information for aligning the rotation center of the workpiece 10 with the center of the workpiece 10 as the alignment position of the workpiece 10 News. The correction information may be information for moving the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the center of the workpiece 10, or information indicating the direction or magnitude of the positional deviation. The correction information is, for example, a combination of information indicating the moving direction of the rotation center (for example, an angle with respect to a predetermined direction) and the moving distance. In addition, the correction information may be a vector indicating the moving direction and moving distance of the center of the workpiece 10 and the like. In addition, the correction information may be information for moving the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the center of the workpiece 10 when the center of the workpiece 10 and the rotation center of the workpiece 10 are arranged in the orthogonal coordinate system, indicating the amount of movement along each coordinate axis .

修正資訊取得裝置1033使用例如合成處理裝置1032所取得的對應旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊、及與其中的一個對應的旋轉角度,以取得用以使工件10的旋轉中心移動到工件10的中心的修正資訊。The correction information obtaining device 1033 uses, for example, four first distance information obtained by synthesizing the processing device 1032 corresponding to different rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees, and a rotation angle corresponding to one of them to obtain the rotation center for the workpiece 10 Correction information moved to the center of the workpiece 10.

以下,使用圖2(b)就修正資訊的一個取得處理例加以說明。此外,圖2(b)中,第一距離資訊ra 、rb 、rc 、rd 為合成處理裝置1032針對一個合成距離資訊所取得的對應旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊,且分別對應的旋轉角度設為θ、θ+90、θ+180、θ+270。但,θ設為任意值。此處,θ設為例如從0度至90度範圍的角度。點Pa 、Pb 、Pc 、及Pd 為工件10的邊緣11上對應於第一距離資訊ra 、rb 、rc 、及rd 的點,旋轉中心O分別與點Pa 、Pb 、Pc 及Pd 的連結線段的距離為第一距離資訊ra 、rb 、rc 及rd 。點Pa 與點Pc 的連結線段和點Pb 與點Pd 的連結線段在旋轉中心O上成正交。此處,為了方便說明,將工件10的旋轉中心O配置在xy座標的原點。此處,工件10的旋轉方向設為順時針方向。與第一距離資訊ra對應的線段和x軸所構成的角度為旋轉角度θ,反時針方向設為正值。工件10的旋轉中心O與工件10的中心Q的連結線段和x軸構成的角度α為修正資訊中表示移動方向的資訊;反時針方向在此設為正值。此外,工件10的旋轉中心O與工件10的中心Q的連結線段的長度h為表示修正資訊中的移動量(移動距離)的資訊。用以取得第一距離資訊的感測器(未圖示)係例如在y軸上沿y軸配置。Hereinafter, an example of processing for obtaining correction information will be described using FIG. 2(b). In addition, FIG. 2 (b), the first distance information r a, r b, r c , r d is the synthesizing means 1032 for processing the information corresponding to the rotation angle obtained from a synthetic successively different by 90 degrees four first Distance information, and the corresponding rotation angles are set to θ, θ+90, θ+180, θ+270. However, θ is set to an arbitrary value. Here, θ is set to an angle ranging from 0 degrees to 90 degrees, for example. Point P a, P b, P c , and P d is the upper edge 10 of the workpiece 11 corresponds to the first distance information r a, point r b, r c, r d and the rotation center point O, respectively, P a, the distance of the line segment connecting P b, P c and P d is a first distance information r a, r b, r c and r d. Point P c P a point of the line segment connecting the point and the line segment connecting the point P b and P d is orthogonal to the rotational center O. Here, for convenience of explanation, the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 is arranged at the origin of the xy coordinates. Here, the rotation direction of the workpiece 10 is set to the clockwise direction. The angle formed by the line segment corresponding to the first distance information ra and the x-axis is the rotation angle θ, and the counterclockwise direction is set to a positive value. The angle α formed by the connecting line segment of the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 and the center Q of the workpiece 10 and the x-axis is information indicating the moving direction in the correction information; the counterclockwise direction is set to a positive value here. In addition, the length h of the connecting line segment between the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 and the center Q of the workpiece 10 is information indicating the movement amount (movement distance) in the correction information. A sensor (not shown) for obtaining the first distance information is arranged along the y-axis on the y-axis, for example.

圖2(b)中,與點Pa 和點Pc 的連結線段、及點Pb 和點Pd 的連結線段對稱的線段拉到工件10的中心Q時,表示作為修正資訊的移動方向的資訊α及表示移動量的長度h從以下方程式求得。Figure 2 (b), the line segment connecting points P a and P c of the point, and a line segment connecting the point P b and P d is the center of symmetry of a line segment drawn workpiece 10 Q, represents a moving direction of the correction information The information α and the length h representing the amount of movement are obtained from the following equation.

[式1]

Figure 02_image001
[Formula 1]
Figure 02_image001

再者,上式中,由於ra -rc 及rb -rd 為距離的差,故可知即使在第一距離資訊為感測器等的讀取值、或自感測器的基準點等起算的距離時,上式也能成立。Further, in the above formula, since r a -r c and r b -r d is the distance difference, it was found that even if the read value of the first distance information to the sensor or the like, or from a reference point sensor The above formula can also be established when the distance is calculated.

此外,上述所示的修正資訊的取得處理僅為一個例子,本發明以何種方式從合成處理裝置1032取得的第一距離資訊與旋轉角度的組對以何種方式取得修正資訊,則不拘。In addition, the above-described correction information acquisition processing is only an example, and the method of the present invention is not limited to the method of acquiring the combination of the first distance information and the rotation angle from the synthesis processing device 1032.

又,上述中,修正資訊取得裝置1033使用針對合成處理裝置1032取得的一個合成距離資訊所取得的4個第一距離資訊及一個旋轉角度來取得修正資訊,但合成處理裝置1032也可針對複數個合成距離資訊分別取得的複數個第一距離資訊與旋轉角度的組對,與上述同樣地分別來取得修正資訊,且取得針對各組對所取得的修正資訊的平均值作為最終的修正資訊。In addition, in the above, the correction information obtaining device 1033 uses four first distance information and one rotation angle obtained for one combined distance information obtained by the combining processing device 1032 to obtain correction information, but the combining processing device 1032 may also be used for plural The plurality of pairs of the first distance information and the rotation angle obtained by synthesizing the distance information are respectively obtained in the same manner as above, and the average value of the obtained correction information for each pair is obtained as the final correction information.

第二距離資訊取得裝置1034使用修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊,來取得工件10為邊緣11無凹凸的圓形時表示旋轉角度與相應於旋轉角度的第二距離資訊的關係的關係式。第二距離資訊係指關於邊緣11無凹凸的工件10自旋轉中心至邊緣11的距離資訊。接著,將與儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度分別代入所取得的關係式,以取得第二距離資訊。The second distance information obtaining device 1034 uses the correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device 1033 to obtain the relational expression representing the relationship between the rotation angle and the second distance information corresponding to the rotation angle when the workpiece 10 is a circle with no unevenness at the edge 11 . The second distance information refers to the distance information about the workpiece 10 with no unevenness on the edge 11 from the center of rotation to the edge 11. Next, a plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 are respectively substituted into the obtained relational expression to obtain second distance information.

第二距離資訊係為例如與第一距離資訊同樣的資訊。第二距離資訊係為相當於例如將邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件取代工件10時可取得的第一距離資訊距離的資訊。The second distance information is, for example, the same information as the first distance information. The second distance information is information equivalent to the first distance information distance that can be obtained when, for example, a round workpiece with no unevenness at the edge 11 is substituted for the workpiece 10.

所謂邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件,係指邊緣沒有例如定向扁平部、或V形槽部、或毛邊、或崩缺、或塵屑的圓形工件,也可以為與工件10相同規格的理想形狀型工件。The so-called round workpiece with no unevenness at the edge 11 refers to a round workpiece without an edge such as an oriented flat portion, or V-shaped groove portion, or burr, or chipping, or dust. It can also be ideal for the same specifications as the workpiece 10 Shaped workpiece.

關係式係為例如表示使邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件10旋轉時的旋轉角度與對應旋轉角度的第二距離資訊的關係的式子。此處的關係式也可以為表示工件10的旋轉角度與從對應旋轉角度的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的關係的理想曲線的式子。再者,第二距離資訊也可以為從理想型工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離。另外,關係式也可為近似於使邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件10旋轉時的旋轉角度和對應旋轉角度的第二距離資訊的關係的近似式。The relational expression is, for example, an expression representing the relationship between the rotation angle when rotating the round workpiece 10 with no irregularities on the edge 11 and the second distance information corresponding to the rotation angle. The relational expression here may be an expression that represents an ideal curve of the relationship between the rotation angle of the workpiece 10 and the distance from the rotation center to the edge of the corresponding rotation angle. Furthermore, the second distance information may also be the distance from the center of rotation of the ideal workpiece 10 to the edge. In addition, the relational expression may be an approximate expression that approximates the relationship between the rotation angle when rotating the round workpiece 10 with no irregularities on the edge 11 and the second distance information corresponding to the rotation angle.

此處所謂關係式的取得,也包含讀取預先儲存於未圖示記憶媒體等的關係式、或決定讀取的關係式的係數值等、或代入係數值等情況的概念。Here, the acquisition of the relational expression also includes the concept of reading the relational expression previously stored in a storage medium or the like not shown, or determining the coefficient value of the relational expression to be read, or substituting the coefficient value.

第二距離資訊取得裝置1034也可例如除了表示修正資訊的移動方向的角度及表示移動量的長度外,再使用工件10的半徑來取得關係式。工件10的半徑只要預先儲存在未圖示的儲存部等,再適當讀取即可。The second distance information obtaining device 1034 may obtain the relational expression using the radius of the workpiece 10 in addition to the angle indicating the direction of movement of the correction information and the length indicating the amount of movement, for example. The radius of the workpiece 10 may be stored in a storage unit (not shown) or the like in advance, and then read appropriately.

以下,就關係式的一個例子進行說明。Hereinafter, an example of the relational expression will be described.

圖5是為用以說明要取得第二距離資訊時所利用的關係式的示意圖。圖中,與圖2(b)相同的符號是表示相同或相當的部分。但,圖5中,與圖2(b)不同的是,工件10設為邊緣無凹凸且半徑為a的工件。同時,為了說明的方便,圖5中是表示工件10的旋轉中心位在工件以外位置的例子。但,旋轉中心也可位在工件上。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram for explaining the relationship used when obtaining the second distance information. In the figure, the same symbols as in FIG. 2(b) indicate the same or corresponding parts. However, in FIG. 5, unlike FIG. 2( b ), the workpiece 10 is a workpiece with a radius of a without unevenness at the edges. Meanwhile, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 5 shows an example in which the rotation center of the workpiece 10 is located at a position other than the workpiece. However, the center of rotation can also be located on the workpiece.

用極座標來表示如圖5所示的旋轉中心O從中心Q偏移的圓形工件10的邊緣時,即形成如下式的形態。When the edge of the circular workpiece 10 whose rotation center O is shifted from the center Q as shown in FIG. 5 is represented by polar coordinates, the form of the following formula is formed.

[式2]

Figure 02_image003
[Form 2]
Figure 02_image003

針對ri 將該式子展開時,即形成下式的形態。When this formula is expanded for r i , the form of the following formula is formed.

[式3]

Figure 02_image005
[Form 3]
Figure 02_image005

該式(3)為表示使邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件10旋轉時的旋轉角度與對應旋轉角度的第二距離資訊的關係的式子。例如,預先將式(3)儲存於未圖示的儲存部,第二距離資訊取得裝置1034將該式讀出,透過使用上述式(1)及式(2)取得的修正資訊,具體而言,即表示移動方向的資訊的角度α值、表示移動量的資訊的長度h值、及工件10的半徑a,代入該式(3),就可取得工件10為邊緣11無凹凸的圓形工件時表示旋轉角度θ與對應旋轉角度的第二距離資訊ri 的關係的關係式。以下,代入了該α及長度h的值的關係式稱為理想曲線式。This formula (3) is a formula representing the relationship between the rotation angle when rotating the round workpiece 10 with no irregularities on the edge 11 and the second distance information corresponding to the rotation angle. For example, the formula (3) is stored in a storage unit (not shown) in advance, and the second distance information obtaining device 1034 reads the formula and corrects the information obtained by using the above formula (1) and formula (2), specifically , That is, the value of the angle α indicating the direction of movement, the value of the length h indicating the amount of movement, and the radius a of the work piece 10, substituting this equation (3), the work piece 10 can be obtained as a round work piece with no bumps 11 The time represents the relationship between the rotation angle θ and the second distance information r i corresponding to the rotation angle. Hereinafter, the relational expression substituted with the value of α and the length h is called an ideal curve expression.

此外,取得此處所示的理想曲線式雖屬最佳,但以關係式而言,也可取得其他的近似式,例如,使用正弦曲線等製作的近似式等。In addition, although the ideal curve formula shown here is the best, in terms of the relational formula, other approximate formulas may also be obtained, for example, an approximate formula prepared using a sine curve or the like.

另外,上述中,修正資訊取得裝置1033使用合成處理裝置1032所取得的複數個第一距離資訊與旋轉角度的一個以上組對從式(1)及式(2)來取得修正資訊。然而,本發明中,修正資訊取得裝置1033也可將合成處理裝置1032針對一個以上合成距離資訊所取得的複數個第一距離資訊、及與各該複數個第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度的複數個組對分別代入上述式(3)而作成聯立方程式,並透過解開該聯立方程式,而取得修正資訊。而且,也可適當地將工件10的半徑酌情代入對該聯立方程式。這種方式在使用其他近似式的情況中亦屬相同。In addition, in the above, the correction information acquisition device 1033 uses the plural first distance information acquired by the synthesis processing device 1032 and one or more pairs of rotation angles to obtain the correction information from equations (1) and (2). However, in the present invention, the correction information obtaining device 1033 may also combine the plural first distance information obtained by the synthesis processing device 1032 for more than one synthesized distance information, and the plural of the rotation angle corresponding to each of the plural first distance information Each pair of pairs is substituted into the above equation (3) to make simultaneous equations, and by solving the simultaneous equations, correction information is obtained. Moreover, the radius of the workpiece 10 may be appropriately substituted into this simultaneous equation as appropriate. This method is also the same when other approximations are used.

第二距離資訊取得裝置1034將與儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度分別代入所取得的關係式,例如理想曲線式,以取得第二距離資訊。還有,與複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度不必一定須是從第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101讀取者,只要是與複數個第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的複數個旋轉角度實質上相同的複數個旋轉角度即可。例如,也可取得實質上相同的複數個旋轉角度來使用。例如,使用每次從工件10取得一個第一距離資訊令工件10旋轉的角度值等,藉由例如將該角度值依序加算等方法,來取得與複數個第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的複數個旋轉角度實質上相同的複數個旋轉角度。The second distance information obtaining device 1034 substitutes the plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 into the obtained relational expression, such as an ideal curve type, to obtain the second Distance information. Also, the plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information need not necessarily be those read from the first rotation distance information storage unit 101, as long as it is the plurality of rotations possessed by the plurality of first rotation distance information A plurality of rotation angles may be used if the angles are substantially the same. For example, a plurality of rotation angles that are substantially the same may be used. For example, an angle value for rotating the workpiece 10 by obtaining the first distance information from the workpiece 10 each time is used to obtain a complex number with the plurality of first rotation distance information by, for example, sequentially adding the angle value The rotation angles are substantially the same in plural rotation angles.

第二距離資訊取得裝置1034使將複數個旋轉角度依序代入關係式而取得的第二距離資訊(例如,第二距離資訊ri )與旋轉角度形成對應,並儲存於未圖示的儲存部等。此處的儲存也可為暫時記憶。第二距離資訊取得裝置1034所取得並儲存的第二距離資訊與旋轉角度的各個組對,在此稱為第二旋轉距離資訊。此外,也可以為第二距離資訊取得裝置1034取得第二旋轉距離資訊。The second distance information obtaining device 1034 makes the second distance information (for example, the second distance information r i ) obtained by sequentially substituting a plurality of rotation angles into the relational expression correspond to the rotation angle and stores it in a storage section (not shown) Wait. The storage here can also be a temporary memory. Each pair of the second distance information and the rotation angle acquired and stored by the second distance information obtaining device 1034 is referred to herein as second rotation distance information. In addition, the second rotation distance information may be obtained for the second distance information obtaining device 1034.

計算裝置1035使用儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊、及第二距離資訊取得裝置1034所取得的複數個第二距離資訊,來取得與相同旋轉角度形成對應的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差。例如,計算裝置1035依序取得與相同旋轉角度形成對應的第一距離資訊及第二距離資訊的差。此處的差可為從第一距離資訊值減去第二距離資訊值所得的值,也可為其相反的值。此外,只要是僅單純檢測邊緣有缺陷的部位,此處的差也可為差的大小,例如為差的絕對值。此外,第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差,在此稱為距離差資訊。The computing device 1035 uses the plurality of first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 and the plurality of second distance information obtained by the second distance information acquisition device 1034 to obtain correspondences corresponding to the same rotation angle The difference between the first distance information and the second distance information. For example, the computing device 1035 sequentially obtains the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information corresponding to the same rotation angle. The difference here may be a value obtained by subtracting the second distance information value from the first distance information value, or may be the opposite value. In addition, as long as it is a simple detection of a defective edge, the difference here may be the magnitude of the difference, for example, the absolute value of the difference. In addition, the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information is referred to herein as distance difference information.

例如,計算裝置1035使所取得的距離差資訊與旋轉角度形成對應,並儲存於未圖示的儲存部等。此處的儲存也可為暫時記憶。For example, the computing device 1035 associates the acquired distance difference information with the rotation angle and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). The storage here can also be a temporary memory.

缺口檢測裝置1036使用計算裝置1035所計算的距離差資訊來取得表示工件10的缺口部的資訊,作為工件10的朝向特定資訊。缺口部是指如上述方式設在工件10的邊緣11且用以特定工件10的朝向的定向扁平部或V形槽部等部分。表示缺口部的資訊是指例如表示工件10設有缺口部之部分的旋轉角度範圍的資訊、或表示針對缺口部所取得的複數個第一距離資訊的資訊。The notch detection device 1036 uses the distance difference information calculated by the calculation device 1035 to obtain information indicating the notch portion of the workpiece 10 as orientation specific information of the workpiece 10. The notch portion refers to a portion such as an oriented flat portion or a V-shaped groove portion that is provided on the edge 11 of the work 10 as described above and specifies the direction of the work 10. The information indicating the notch refers to, for example, information indicating the rotation angle range of the part where the workpiece 10 is provided with the notch, or information indicating the plurality of first distance information acquired for the notch.

缺口檢測裝置1036使用例如計算裝置1035所計算的距離差資訊及關於缺口部大小的一個以上臨界值,來檢測設於工件10的邊緣11的缺口部,並取得表示經檢測的缺口部的資訊。The notch detection device 1036 uses, for example, the distance difference information calculated by the calculation device 1035 and one or more critical values regarding the size of the notch portion to detect the notch portion provided at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 and obtain information indicating the detected notch portion.

所謂關於缺口部大小的一個以上臨界值,是指關於上述的缺口部自邊緣起算距離的臨界值、或關於缺口部寬度的臨界值。The one or more critical values regarding the size of the notch refers to the critical value regarding the distance from the edge of the aforementioned notch or the critical value regarding the width of the notch.

缺口檢測裝置1036使用例如計算裝置1035所計算的距離差資訊,來檢測邊緣11朝工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域,而該區域為具有表示預先指定缺口部自邊緣起算的距離的下限值的臨界值以上的距離差資訊,且其寬度在分別表示預先指定缺口部的寬度下限值與上限值的臨界值範圍的區域。接著,取得表示與經檢測的區域對應的位置的資訊,例如表示針對旋轉角度或經檢測的區域所取得的複數個第一距離資訊的資訊,作為表示設在工件10的邊緣11的缺口部的資訊。The notch detection device 1036 uses, for example, the distance difference information calculated by the calculation device 1035 to detect a continuous area where the edge 11 is concave toward the inner side of the workpiece 10, and the area is a lower limit indicating the distance from the edge of the pre-specified notch portion The distance difference information above the critical value of the value, and the width thereof respectively indicate the range of the critical value range in which the lower limit value and the upper limit value of the width of the notch portion are specified in advance. Next, information indicating the position corresponding to the detected area is acquired, for example, information indicating a plurality of first distance information acquired with respect to the rotation angle or the detected area is used as the indication of the notch provided at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 News.

邊緣11為朝工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域,透過例如將與表示第一距離資訊所示位置較第二距離資訊所示位置更靠工件内側的距離差資訊形成對應的連續區域進行檢測,即可測出。例如,第一距離資訊為自工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣11的距離,距離差資訊為自第二距離資訊減去第一距離資訊所得值時,即可將邊緣11的距離差資訊為正值的連續區域當作凹狀連續區域檢測出來。還有,也可對距離差資訊的大小相較於經考量測定誤差的值而預先設定的臨界值為大的連續區域進行檢測作為凹狀連續區域。此時的臨界值設定在例如0的前後值。這種方式在檢測邊緣11的缺陷部分時亦是同樣。此外,這種方式在檢測連續的凸狀區域時也是同樣。The edge 11 is a continuous area that is concave toward the inside of the workpiece 10, and is detected by, for example, forming a continuous area corresponding to the distance difference information that is closer to the inner side of the workpiece than the position shown by the first distance information than the second distance information. , Can be measured. For example, the first distance information is the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11, and the distance difference information is the value obtained by subtracting the first distance information from the second distance information, the distance difference information of the edge 11 can be positive The continuous area is detected as a concave continuous area. In addition, a continuous region having a larger threshold value than the value of the measurement error and a predetermined threshold value compared to the value of the measurement error may be detected as a concave continuous region. The critical value at this time is set to a value around 0, for example. This method is also the same when detecting the defective part of the edge 11. In addition, this method is also the same when detecting continuous convex regions.

另外,也可使用分別表示自邊緣起算的距離的下限值與上限值的臨界值,來取代表示上述自缺口部邊緣起算的距離下限值的臨界值,以判斷連續區域的距離差資訊的最大值或其前後值等是否為該臨界值所示範圍的值,並使用範圍的值的情況,來取代表示具有自缺口部邊緣起算距離下限值的臨界值以上的距離差資訊的區域的判斷結果。同樣地,也可使用表示寬度下限值的臨界值,來取代分別表示寬度下限值與上限值的臨界值,且使用連續區域的寬度在寬度下限值以上的情況,來取代分別表示缺口部寬度在下限值與上限值的臨界值範圍時的判斷結果。又,在判斷連續區域是否為缺口部時,也可只判斷自邊緣起算的距離或寬度,來取代判斷自邊緣起算的距離與寬度。另外,這些組合可予以適當變更。這種方式在檢測邊緣11的缺陷部分時亦屬相同。In addition, the critical value indicating the lower limit and the upper limit of the distance from the edge may be used instead of the critical value indicating the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the notch to determine the distance difference information of the continuous area. Is the maximum value or its pre- and post-values within the range indicated by the critical value, and the range value is used instead of the area indicating distance difference information above the critical value of the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the notch Judgment result. Similarly, the critical value indicating the lower limit of the width may be used instead of the critical value indicating the lower limit and the upper limit of the width, respectively, and the case where the width of the continuous region is greater than the lower limit of the width may be used instead of indicating the respective Judgment result when the width of the notch is within the critical value range of the lower limit and the upper limit. In addition, when determining whether the continuous area is a notch, it is possible to determine only the distance or width from the edge instead of determining the distance and width from the edge. In addition, these combinations can be appropriately changed. This method is also the same when detecting the defective part of the edge 11.

此外,缺口檢測裝置1036也可在計算裝置1035所計算的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差(亦即,距離差資訊)中,檢測其值的大小較預先指定第一臨界值為大的部分,並取得表示與經檢測的部分對應的旋轉角度資訊,作為表示工件10的缺口部的資訊。在工件10為無凹凸的圓形時的自缺口部邊緣起算的距離,一般是比存在於工件10的邊緣的崩缺等的距離更深。而且,缺口部的深度(自邊緣起算的距離)為已知的值。因此,透過將第一臨界值設定為較崩缺等的深度(自邊緣起算的距離)為大,且較已知的缺口部深度(自邊緣起算的距離)為小的值,就可檢測與缺口部對應的一個以上距離差資訊,並可取得表示缺口部的資訊。In addition, the gap detection device 1036 may also detect that the value of the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the computing device 1035 is larger than the first critical value specified in advance And obtain the rotation angle information corresponding to the detected portion as the information indicating the notch of the workpiece 10. When the workpiece 10 has a round shape without irregularities, the distance from the edge of the notch is generally deeper than the distance such as chipping that exists at the edge of the workpiece 10. In addition, the depth of the notch (distance from the edge) is a known value. Therefore, by setting the first critical value to a depth greater than the depth of the chipping (distance from the edge) and a smaller depth than the known depth of the notch (distance from the edge) to detect More than one distance difference information corresponding to the notch, and information indicating the notch can be obtained.

第一臨界值也可為例如值的大小的臨界值。所謂值的大小較第一臨界值為大的距離差資訊的檢測,也可為例如絕對值的值較第一臨界值為大的距離差資訊的檢測。這種情形對後述的第二臨界值亦屬相同樣。The first critical value may also be a critical value such as the magnitude of the value. The detection of distance difference information whose value is larger than the first critical value may be, for example, detection of distance difference information whose absolute value is larger than the first critical value. This situation is the same for the second critical value described later.

還有,與缺口部對應的距離差資訊的值是否成為正值或負值,依從第一距離資訊減去第二距離資訊以取得距離差資訊、或從第二距離資訊減去第一距離資訊以取得距離差資訊而有不同。In addition, whether the value of the distance difference information corresponding to the notch becomes a positive value or a negative value, the second distance information is subtracted from the first distance information to obtain the distance difference information, or the first distance information is subtracted from the second distance information It is different to obtain distance difference information.

缺口檢測裝置1036對數值的大小較第一臨界值為大的複數個距離差資訊、且對應的旋轉角度相連續的複數個距離差資訊進行檢測時,也可將該複數個旋轉角度群組化。而且,缺口檢測裝置1036也可取得再具有表示該群組的資訊的表示缺口部的資訊。表示群組的資訊為例如表示對應旋轉角度的範圍的資訊、或對應旋轉角度的集合、或賦予對應旋轉角度的群組識別符等。這種情形對後述的表示缺陷部分群組的資訊亦屬相同。此外,此時的旋轉角度的一個群組也可以為例如與一個缺口部上的複數個位置對應的複數個旋轉角度、或表示缺口部範圍的資訊。The notch detection device 1036 can also detect the plurality of distance difference information whose value is larger than the first critical value and detect the plurality of distance difference information whose corresponding rotation angles are continuous, and can also group the plurality of rotation angles . In addition, the notch detection device 1036 can also obtain information indicating a notch portion which further includes information indicating the group. The information indicating the group is, for example, information indicating the range of the corresponding rotation angle, or a set of the corresponding rotation angle, or a group identifier assigned to the corresponding rotation angle. This situation is also the same for the information indicating the defective part group described later. In addition, one group of rotation angles at this time may be, for example, a plurality of rotation angles corresponding to a plurality of positions on one notch, or information indicating the range of the notch.

還有,缺口檢測裝置1036也可將檢測值的大小較第一臨界值為大、且對應的旋轉角度具有預先指定超過二個以上數值的相連續複數個距離差資訊的區域,作為缺口部。一般,由於缺口部在工件10的邊緣上設定於寬廣範圍,故依此方式進行檢測,可更確實地檢測缺口部。In addition, the notch detection device 1036 may also use, as the notch portion, an area where the detected value is larger than the first critical value and the corresponding rotation angle has a plurality of consecutive distance difference information specified in advance over two or more values. Generally, since the notch is set in a wide range on the edge of the work 10, the detection in this way can more reliably detect the notch.

缺口檢測裝置1036也可對一個工件10檢測複數個缺口部。The notch detection device 1036 may detect a plurality of notch portions for one workpiece 10.

缺陷檢測裝置1037使用計算裝置1035所計算的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差(即,距離差資訊)來取得關於工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分的資訊。The defect detection device 1037 uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device 1035 (ie, distance difference information) to obtain information about the defective portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10.

例如,缺陷檢測裝置1037會使用計算裝置1035計算所得的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差、及關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值,以檢測工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分,並取得關於經檢測的缺陷部分的資訊。For example, the defect detection device 1037 uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device 1035, and more than one critical value regarding the size of the defect portion to detect the defect portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 and obtain Information about the detected defective parts.

例如,缺陷檢測裝置1037會例如在計算裝置1035計算所得的距離差資訊中,檢測出值的大小在表示缺陷部分自邊緣起算距離下限值的臨界值以上的距離差資訊,檢測後,即取得關於缺陷部分的資訊。還有,也可使用表示缺陷部分深度下限值的臨界值、及表示缺陷部分高度下限值的臨界值,來取代使用有關缺陷部分自邊緣起算距離的下限值作為臨界值,以檢測其值非為表示缺陷部分深度下限值的臨界值與表示缺陷部分高度下限值的臨界值間的值的距離差資訊。For example, the defect detection device 1037 may, for example, in the distance difference information calculated by the computing device 1035, detect the distance difference information whose size is greater than the critical value indicating the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the defective part. Information about defective parts. In addition, instead of using the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the defective part as the critical value, a critical value indicating the lower limit of the depth of the defective part and a critical value indicating the lower limit of the height of the defective part can be used to detect the The value is not information on the distance difference between the critical value representing the lower limit of the depth of the defective part and the critical value representing the lower limit of the height of the defective part.

再者,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可例如使用計算裝置1035計算所得的距離差資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處朝工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域、或朝工件10的外側呈凸狀的連續區域進行檢測,並判斷該凹狀區域或凸狀區域内有無距離差資訊值的大小在表示缺陷部分自邊緣起算距離下限值的臨界值以上的部分,若有臨界值以上的部分,即將該凹狀區域或凸狀區域判斷為缺陷部分,並取得關於該缺陷部分的資訊,例如旋轉角度範圍的資訊。Furthermore, the defect detection device 1037 may use, for example, the distance difference information calculated by the calculation device 1035 to form a continuous area that is concave toward the inner side of the workpiece 10 at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 or convex toward the outer side of the workpiece 10 Detect the continuous area and determine whether the distance difference information value in the concave or convex area is above the critical value of the lower limit of the distance from the edge of the defective part. If there is a portion above the critical value, it will be The concave region or the convex region is determined as a defective part, and information about the defective part, such as information on the rotation angle range, is obtained.

此外,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可例如使用計算裝置1035計算所得的距離差資訊,對工件10的邊緣11處朝工件10的内側呈凹狀的連續區域、或朝工件10的外側呈凸狀的連續區域進行檢測,就該凹狀區域或凸狀區域的寬度是否在缺陷部分寬度下限值的臨界值以上加以判斷,若在下限值以上,則將該凹狀區域或凸狀區域判斷為缺陷部,並取得關於該缺陷部分的資訊。In addition, the defect detection device 1037 may also use the distance difference information calculated by the calculation device 1035, for example, to form a continuous region that is concave toward the inside of the workpiece 10 at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10, or a continuous region that is convex toward the outside of the workpiece 10 Detection of the area, to determine whether the width of the concave or convex area is above the critical value of the lower limit of the width of the defective part, and if it is above the lower limit, the concave or convex area is determined as the defective part And obtain information about the defective part.

還有,在連續區域為凹狀時及為凸狀時,可使用不同的臨界值,也可使用相同的臨界值,作為用以檢測上述的連續區域是否為缺陷部分所使用的一個以上臨界值。In addition, when the continuous region is concave and convex, different critical values may be used, or the same critical value may be used as one or more critical values used to detect whether the continuous region is a defective part. .

或者,也可將上述依深度進行的判斷與依寬度進行的判斷加以組合,在自邊緣起算的距離為臨界值以上,且寬度為臨界值以上時,將連續區域判斷為缺陷部分。Alternatively, the above-mentioned determination by depth and the determination by width may be combined, and when the distance from the edge is equal to or greater than the critical value and the width is equal to or greater than the critical value, the continuous area may be determined as a defective portion.

再者,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可在例如計算裝置1035計算所得的第一距離資訊和第二距離資訊的差(亦即,距離差資訊)中,將值的大小較預先指定第二臨界值為大的部分進行檢測,然後,可取得關於經檢測的部分的資訊,作為關於工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分資訊。Furthermore, the defect detection device 1037 may also, for example, calculate the value of the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device 1035 (that is, the distance difference information) as compared to the pre-specified second critical value The large part is inspected, and then information about the inspected part can be obtained as information about the defective part of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10.

第二臨界值為用以判別工件10的邊緣11的缺陷不存在部分、及工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分的臨界值。例如,工件10的邊緣11不存在缺陷的部分中,第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的值的差,即為取得第一距離資訊時的測定誤差程度的差。另一方面,在缺陷存在的部分,該差會即為充分大於測定誤差的差。因此,透過將第二臨界值設定在例如較測定誤差為大的值,就可檢測工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分。The second critical value is a critical value for discriminating the defect-free portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 and the defective portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. For example, in a portion where there is no defect on the edge 11 of the workpiece 10, the difference between the values of the first distance information and the second distance information is the difference in the degree of measurement error when acquiring the first distance information. On the other hand, in the part where the defect exists, the difference will be a difference sufficiently larger than the measurement error. Therefore, by setting the second critical value to a value larger than the measurement error, for example, the defective portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 can be detected.

關於經檢測部分的資訊(亦即,關於經檢測的距離差資訊),是指例如表示與經檢測的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度的資訊、或經檢測的距離差資訊與表示對應的旋轉角度的資訊的組對。例如,經檢測的距離差資訊可以為表示缺陷部分的深度或高度的資訊。Information about the detected part (that is, information about the detected distance difference) refers to, for example, information indicating the rotation angle corresponding to the detected distance difference information, or detected distance difference information and the corresponding rotation angle Pairs of information. For example, the detected distance difference information may be information indicating the depth or height of the defective part.

還有,缺陷部分是否像毛邊那樣凸出工件10的外側、或像崩缺那樣朝工件10的内側凹入的部分,由於可藉例如第一距離資訊的基準點等及距離差資訊碼來判斷,故缺陷檢測裝置1037也可藉距離差資訊碼來判斷缺陷部分是否為向外側凸出的形狀。而且,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可取得關於再具有該檢測結果的缺陷部分的資訊。Also, whether the defective portion protrudes outside the workpiece 10 like a burr or is concave toward the inside of the workpiece 10 like a chipping can be judged by, for example, the reference point of the first distance information and the distance difference information code Therefore, the defect detection device 1037 can also use the distance difference information code to determine whether the defective portion is convex outward. Moreover, the defect detection device 1037 can also obtain information about the defect part that has the detection result again.

此外,缺陷檢測裝置1037對數值的大小較第二臨界值為大、且對應的旋轉角度為相連續的複數個距離差資訊進行檢測後,也可將該複數個距離差資訊或複數個旋轉角度群組化。而且,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可取得關於再具有表示該群組的資訊的缺陷部分資訊。此種情況的距離差資訊的一個群組也可以為例如針對一個缺陷部分上的複數個位置的距離差資訊。此外,此時的旋轉角度的一個群組也可以為例如表示一個缺陷部分上的複數個位置的複數個旋轉角度、或表示缺陷部分範圍的資訊。In addition, after detecting the plurality of distance difference information whose value is larger than the second critical value and the corresponding rotation angle is continuous, the defect detection device 1037 may also detect the plurality of distance difference information or the plurality of rotation angles Grouping. Moreover, the defect detection device 1037 can also obtain information about the defective part that has information indicating the group again. A group of distance difference information in this case may also be distance difference information for a plurality of positions on a defective portion, for example. In addition, a group of rotation angles at this time may be, for example, a plurality of rotation angles indicating a plurality of positions on one defective portion, or information indicating a range of the defective portion.

另外,在上述的處理的情形中,工件10的定向扁平部等缺口部也會被當作缺陷部分而受到檢測。在缺口部被當作缺陷部分來檢測也沒有問題的情形中,用上述的處理即可,但缺口部部當作缺陷部分檢測時,就不要將缺口部當缺陷部分檢測,或者,必須把缺口部從缺陷部分排除。In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned processing, notch portions such as the oriented flat portion of the workpiece 10 are also detected as defective portions. In the case where the notched part is detected as a defective part and there is no problem, the above processing may be used, but when the notched part is detected as a defective part, the notched part should not be detected as a defective part, or the notch must be detected Department is excluded from the defective part.

因此,例如缺陷檢測裝置1037在使用第二臨界值檢測所得的距離差資訊中就對應的旋轉角度為超過二個以上預定數相連續的複數個距離差資訊加以檢測。該預定數設定為與例如設在工件10的缺口部的長度(亦即,旋轉角度)相應的數目。而且,透過將依此方式檢測所得的複數個距離差資訊從缺陷部分排除,就可將缺口部除開,而以優異精確度檢測缺陷部分。Therefore, for example, the defect detection device 1037 detects the distance difference information obtained by using the second threshold value to detect a plurality of consecutive distance difference information whose rotation angle is more than two or more than a predetermined number. This predetermined number is set to a number corresponding to, for example, the length (that is, the rotation angle) of the notch provided in the workpiece 10. Moreover, by excluding the plurality of distance difference information obtained in this way from the defective part, the notch can be removed, and the defective part can be detected with excellent accuracy.

或者,缺口檢測裝置1036也可將所取得的表示缺口部的旋轉角度除外,僅針對對應的旋轉角度的距離差資訊,使用與上述同樣的第二臨界值進行缺陷部分的檢測處理。Alternatively, the notch detection device 1036 may exclude the obtained rotation angle indicating the notch portion, and use only the same second threshold value as described above for the detection process of the defective portion for the distance difference information corresponding to the rotation angle.

或者,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可在計算裝置1035計算所得的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差(亦即,距離差資訊)中,就值的大小較預先指定的第一臨界值為小、且較第二臨界值(其值的大小亦較該第一臨界值為小)為大的部分進行檢測。然後,取得關於檢測部分的資訊,作為有關工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分資訊。又,缺陷檢測裝置1037也可對值的大小和第一臨界值相同的距離差資訊也加以檢測。第一臨界值為例如上述那種用以檢測工件10的缺口部的臨界值。第二臨界值與上述同樣。透過此種方式,即可不檢測較第一臨界值為大的距離差資訊,而依不包含缺口部的方式以優異精確度檢測缺陷部分。Alternatively, the defect detection device 1037 may also calculate the value of the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device 1035 (that is, the distance difference information) as compared to the pre-specified first critical value And the part which is larger than the second critical value (the value of which is smaller than the first critical value) is detected. Then, the information about the detection part is obtained as the information about the defective part of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10. In addition, the defect detection device 1037 may also detect the distance difference information whose value is the same as the first critical value. The first critical value is, for example, the critical value for detecting the notch of the workpiece 10 as described above. The second threshold is the same as above. In this way, the distance difference information larger than the first threshold is not detected, and the defective portion is detected with excellent accuracy without including the notch.

輸出部104將取得部103所取得用以使工件對準位置的資訊進行輸出。再者,輸出部104將取得部103所取得用以特定工件的的朝向的資訊進行輸出。此外,輸出部104將取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊進行輸出。例如,輸出部104將取得部103所取得用以使工件對準位置之資訊的修正資訊予以輸出。再者,輸出部104將取得部103所取得特定工件朝向用資訊的缺口部表示資訊予以輸出。這些輸出也可具有工件10的識別符。The output unit 104 outputs the information acquired by the acquisition unit 103 for aligning the workpiece. Furthermore, the output unit 104 outputs the information acquired by the acquisition unit 103 to specify the orientation of the workpiece. In addition, the output unit 104 outputs the information about the defective part acquired by the acquisition unit 103. For example, the output unit 104 outputs the correction information obtained by the acquisition unit 103 to align the workpiece with the position. In addition, the output unit 104 outputs information indicating the notch of the specific work orientation information acquired by the acquisition unit 103. These outputs may also have the identifier of the workpiece 10.

此處所謂的輸出,是包含對顯示器的顯示、使用投影機的投影、聲音輸出、警示燈的亮燈、以印表機印刷、對外部裝置傳送、對記錄媒體儲存、處理結果朝其他處理裝置或其他程式等遞交等概念。輸出部104可藉由例如輸出裝置、或輸出裝置的驅動器等來實現。這種情形在後述的距離差相關輸出裝置1039等亦屬相同。The output here refers to the display on the display, the projection using the projector, the sound output, the lighting of the warning light, the printing with the printer, the transmission to the external device, the storage of the recording medium, and the processing result to other processing devices Or other concepts such as submission. The output unit 104 can be realized by, for example, an output device or a driver of the output device. This situation is also the same in the distance difference correlation output device 1039 described later.

例如,輸出部104也可將用以使工件10對準位置的資訊、及用以特定工件10的朝向的資訊輸出到後述的工件輸送裝置2。而且,工件輸送裝置2也可在使用這些資訊從邊緣位置檢測器102取出工件10、或輸送工件10、或將工件10載置於預定場所時,透過修正工件10的朝向或位置將工件10朝向適當方向載置於適當位置。For example, the output unit 104 may output information for aligning the position of the workpiece 10 and information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10 to the workpiece conveying device 2 described later. Moreover, the workpiece conveying device 2 can also use the information to take out the workpiece 10 from the edge position detector 102, convey the workpiece 10, or place the workpiece 10 in a predetermined place, and correct the orientation or position of the workpiece 10 to direct the workpiece 10 Place it in the right direction in the right direction.

此外,例如,輸出部104也可將工件10的對準位置用資訊、及工件10的朝向特定用資訊傳送到邊緣位置檢測器102等。透過使用這些資訊,例如使邊緣位置檢測器102將工件10位置或方向變更到適當位置或方向,並將工件10送到工件輸送裝置2,工件輸送裝置2即可將工件10朝向適當方向載置於適當位置。In addition, for example, the output unit 104 may transmit the information for the alignment position of the workpiece 10 and the information for the orientation specification of the workpiece 10 to the edge position detector 102 and the like. By using this information, for example, the edge position detector 102 changes the position or direction of the workpiece 10 to an appropriate position or direction, and sends the workpiece 10 to the workpiece conveying device 2, and the workpiece conveying device 2 can place the workpiece 10 in an appropriate direction In place.

例如,輸出部104透過輸出修正資訊,受理該修正資訊的工件輸送裝置2等就可在利用工件10時適當修正工件10的位置,使工件10的旋轉中心成為工件10的中心。例如,也可透過將修正資訊輸出到輸送工件10的工件輸送裝置2等,讓工件輸送裝置2等使工件10的旋轉中心修正為工件10的中心,並輸送工件10。再者,也可透過將修正資訊輸出到具有用以修正工件10位置的移動裝置(未圖示)等的邊緣位置檢測器102等,藉由邊緣位置檢測器102等使轉盤52移動或旋轉,而在將工件10遞交給工件輸送裝置2時,使工件10的位置移動,俾使旋轉中心成為工件10的中心。For example, the output unit 104 can correct the position of the workpiece 10 when using the workpiece 10 by outputting the correction information, and the workpiece conveying device 2 or the like that receives the correction information can make the center of rotation of the workpiece 10 the center of the workpiece 10. For example, by outputting the correction information to the workpiece conveying device 2 or the like that conveys the workpiece 10, the workpiece conveying device 2 or the like may correct the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the center of the workpiece 10 and convey the workpiece 10. Furthermore, it is also possible to move or rotate the turntable 52 by the edge position detector 102 etc. by outputting the correction information to the edge position detector 102 etc. having a moving device (not shown) etc. for correcting the position of the work 10 On the other hand, when the workpiece 10 is delivered to the workpiece conveying device 2, the position of the workpiece 10 is moved so that the center of rotation becomes the center of the workpiece 10.

此外,透過由輸出部104將表示工件缺口部的資訊輸出,受理該修正資訊的工件輸送裝置2或邊緣位置檢測器102等就可將工件10的朝向適當修正,使工件10的朝向成為預先指定的朝向。In addition, by outputting the information indicating the notch of the workpiece by the output unit 104, the workpiece conveying device 2 or the edge position detector 102 that receives the correction information can appropriately correct the orientation of the workpiece 10 so that the orientation of the workpiece 10 becomes predetermined The orientation.

輸出部104也可按照取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊再進行異常輸出。所謂的異常輸出,是指工件10的邊緣11有異常時的輸出。異常輸出可為表示工件10的邊緣11有異常情形的輸出,也可為對外部裝置等指示執行對應異常動作的輸出。The output unit 104 may perform abnormal output according to the information about the defective part acquired by the acquisition unit 103. The so-called abnormal output refers to the output when the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 is abnormal. The abnormal output may be an output indicating that there is an abnormality at the edge 11 of the workpiece 10, or may be an output instructing an external device or the like to perform a corresponding abnormal action.

所謂異常輸出,是指例如表示發生異常情形的警告等的輸出。所謂警告的輸出,是指例如警告聲音的輸出、監視器等的警告表示、警示燈的點亮等。警告的輸出也可具有經檢測缺陷部分的工件10的識別符等。The abnormal output refers to output such as a warning indicating that an abnormal situation has occurred. The output of the warning means, for example, output of a warning sound, warning indication of a monitor, etc., and lighting of a warning lamp. The output of the warning may also have an identifier of the workpiece 10 that has been inspected for defective parts, or the like.

再者,異常輸出也可為指示停止對工件10進行操作的輸出。所謂對工件10進行操作,是指以工件輸送裝置2輸送工件10、邊緣位置檢測器102等對工件10進行定位等、工件輸送裝置2的輸送對象對工件10執行預先指定處理等。輸出部104將例如停止操作的指示對工件輸送裝置2、邊緣位置檢測器102、或對工件10執行處理的處理裝置(未圖示)等輸出。藉此方式,就可對邊緣有異常的工件10停止操作。In addition, the abnormal output may be an output instructing to stop the operation of the work 10. The operation of the workpiece 10 refers to the workpiece 10 being conveyed by the workpiece conveying device 2, the edge position detector 102 and the like to position the workpiece 10, and the conveying object of the workpiece conveying device 2 to perform a predetermined process on the workpiece 10. The output unit 104 outputs, for example, an instruction to stop the operation to the workpiece conveying device 2, the edge position detector 102, or a processing device (not shown) that performs processing on the workpiece 10. In this way, the operation of the workpiece 10 with an abnormal edge can be stopped.

此外,異常輸出也可為例如檢測到有異常的工件10的回收指示的輸出。此處的回收,例如,使之移動到預先指定的回收用場所、將工件10從一般的處理途徑除外、使之避開、從輸送路徑除開等。例如,輸出部104會將檢測到有異常的工件10的回收指示輸出到工件輸送裝置2等。透過工件輸送裝置2依照該指示將工件10輸送到預先指定的回收用場所等,即可不對檢測到有異常的工件進行後續的操作或處理等。此外,也可對所回收的工件進行缺陷檢査等。In addition, the abnormal output may be, for example, the output of the recovery instruction of the workpiece 10 in which abnormality is detected. The collection here includes, for example, moving it to a predetermined collection location, removing the workpiece 10 from a general processing route, avoiding it, and removing it from the conveyance path. For example, the output unit 104 outputs a collection instruction of the workpiece 10 in which the abnormality is detected to the workpiece conveying device 2 or the like. In accordance with the instruction, the workpiece conveying device 2 conveys the workpiece 10 to a pre-specified collection place, etc., so that subsequent operations or processing of the workpiece in which the abnormality is detected need not be performed. In addition, defect inspection can be performed on the recovered work.

輸出部104也可在例如取得部103取得關於一個缺陷部分的資訊時進行異常輸出。再者,輸出部104也可在取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊符合預先指定條件時,進行異常輸出。例如,也可從取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊,來判斷取得部103是否檢測到預先指定的k個(k為2以上的整數)以上缺陷部分,在判斷為檢測到有k個以上缺陷部分時,就進行異常輸出。此外,取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊中,包含了表示自邊緣起算距離的最大值為預先指定值以上的缺陷部分資訊時,就進行異常輸出。The output unit 104 may perform abnormal output when, for example, the acquisition unit 103 acquires information on one defective portion. In addition, the output unit 104 may perform abnormal output when the information about the defective part acquired by the acquisition unit 103 meets a predetermined condition. For example, it is possible to determine whether the acquiring unit 103 has detected more than k predetermined defects (k is an integer of 2 or more) from the information about the defective parts acquired by the acquiring unit 103, and it is determined that more than k defective parts are detected. In the case of a defective part, abnormal output is performed. In addition, when the information on the defective part acquired by the acquiring unit 103 includes information on the defective part indicating that the maximum distance from the edge is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, an abnormal output is performed.

評估相關資訊受理部105受理評估相關資訊,該評估相關資訊為針對一個或兩個以上工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分進行評估的相關資訊。評估相關資訊受理部105較佳為受理有關複數個工件10的評估相關資訊。The evaluation-related information acceptance section 105 accepts evaluation-related information, which is related information for evaluating the defective portion of the edge 11 of one or more workpieces 10. The evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 preferably accepts evaluation-related information regarding a plurality of workpieces 10.

所謂評估相關資訊,是指例如評估用於缺陷部分檢測處理的一個以上臨界值所使用的資訊。用於缺陷部分檢測處理的一個以上臨界值,是為例如關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值。The evaluation-related information refers to, for example, information used to evaluate more than one critical value for the detection processing of the defective part. The one or more critical values used for the defective part detection process are, for example, one or more critical values regarding the size of the defective part.

評估相關資訊是指一種資訊,其中具有表示例如在工件處理裝置1判斷為無缺陷部分的工件10(例如,取得部103未能取得關於缺陷部分資訊的工件10)中實際上有無缺陷的資訊。再者,評估相關資訊是指一種資訊,其中具有表示例如在工件處理裝置1判斷為有缺陷部分的工件10(例如,取得部103已取得關於缺陷部分資訊的工件10)中實際有無缺陷、或有否評估為有缺陷的資訊。例如,表示實際有無缺陷的資訊,也可為表示工件10在經工件處理裝置1處理後的處理工程中可否正常利用的資訊(例如,表示是否未破損的資訊)、或表示對檢測到有缺陷部分的工件10執行缺陷部分檢測的再檢査(亦包含目視等)結果的資訊。檢測到有缺陷部分的工件10,也可為經由異常輸出而回收的工件10。The evaluation-related information refers to information including, for example, information indicating whether there is actually a defect in the workpiece 10 determined by the workpiece processing apparatus 1 to be a defect-free part (for example, the acquisition part 103 fails to acquire the workpiece 10 with information about the defective part). Furthermore, the evaluation-related information refers to information that indicates whether there is actually a defect in the workpiece 10 determined by the workpiece processing apparatus 1 as a defective portion (for example, the workpiece 10 that the acquisition section 103 has acquired information about the defective portion), or Whether there is information that is evaluated as defective. For example, information indicating whether there is actually a defect, or information indicating whether the workpiece 10 can be normally used in the processing process after being processed by the workpiece processing device 1 (for example, information indicating whether it is undamaged), or indicating that a defect is detected Part of the work piece 10 performs the re-inspection (including visual inspection, etc.) of the defective part detection result information. The workpiece 10 in which the defective portion is detected may be the workpiece 10 recovered through abnormal output.

又,評估相關資訊也可為一種資訊,其中包含例如表示缺陷部分檢測正確或錯誤的正誤資訊。正誤資訊是為表示工件處理裝置1的缺陷部分檢測結果是否正確的資訊。例如,對取得部103未取得關於缺陷部分的資訊的工件10評估實際有無缺陷,若無缺陷,則在評估相關資訊中儲存表示取得部103的缺陷部分檢測正確的正誤資訊,若有缺陷,則儲存表示缺陷部分的檢測不正確的正誤資訊。此外,例如,對取得部103取得關於缺陷部分資訊的工件10評估實際有無缺陷,若無缺陷,則在評估相關資訊儲存表示取得部103的缺陷部分檢測不正確的正誤資訊,若有缺陷,就儲存表示缺陷部分檢測正確的正誤資訊。缺陷部分檢測的正誤可從例如上述的工件10的再檢査結果、或表示工件10在後續的處理中可否正常利用的資訊來判斷。In addition, the evaluation-related information may also be information including, for example, correct or incorrect information indicating that the defective part is detected correctly or incorrectly. The correct information is information indicating whether the detection result of the defective part of the workpiece processing device 1 is correct. For example, the work piece 10 for which the acquiring part 103 has not acquired information about the defective part is evaluated for actual defects. If there is no defect, correct or incorrect information indicating that the defective part of the acquiring part 103 is detected correctly is stored in the evaluation-related information. Store correct and incorrect information indicating that the detection of the defective part is incorrect. In addition, for example, the work piece 10 that obtains information about the defective part by the acquiring part 103 is evaluated for actual defects. If there is no defect, correct or incorrect information indicating that the defective part of the acquiring part 103 is detected incorrectly is stored in the evaluation-related information. Store correct and wrong information indicating that the defective part is detected correctly. The correctness of the detection of the defective part can be judged from, for example, the above-mentioned re-inspection result of the workpiece 10 or information indicating whether the workpiece 10 can be normally used in subsequent processing.

此外,評估相關資訊也可再具有關於工件處理裝置1的後續程序處理的資訊。例如,也可為表示一個或兩個以上後續程序處理的種類(例如,熱處理、CVD、CMP、蝕刻等)的資訊、用於處理的裝置的識別符、該處理的處理時間或壓力、温度等參數、用於處理的氣體種類或濃度、用於處理的液體種類或濃度等。In addition, the evaluation-related information may also have information about the subsequent processing of the workpiece processing device 1. For example, it may also be information indicating the type of processing of one or more subsequent processes (eg, heat treatment, CVD, CMP, etching, etc.), the identifier of the device used for processing, the processing time or pressure of the processing, temperature, etc. Parameters, type or concentration of gas used for processing, type or concentration of liquid used for processing, etc.

又,評估相關資訊也可包含工件10的規格、工件材料種類或組成等關於工件10的資訊。In addition, the evaluation-related information may also include information about the workpiece 10 such as the specifications of the workpiece 10, the type or composition of the workpiece, and the like.

再者,評估相關資訊也可具有取得部103所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊,例如關於缺陷部分大小的資訊、或以工件10的再檢査等所取得關於相同缺陷部分的資訊等。Furthermore, the evaluation-related information may also include information about the defective part acquired by the acquiring unit 103, for example, information about the size of the defective part, or information about the same defective part obtained by re-inspection of the workpiece 10, and the like.

還有,評估相關資訊也可具有用於檢測缺陷部分處理關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值。但,對現在取得部103利用中的一個以上臨界值進行評估的情況,且為在使用藉由該現在的臨界值針對已進行缺陷部分檢測處理的工件10評估相關資訊的情況下,評估相關資訊也可不具有臨界值。Also, the evaluation-related information may also have more than one critical value regarding the size of the defective part used to detect the defective part. However, in the case where one or more critical values currently used by the acquiring section 103 are evaluated, and in order to evaluate relevant information using the current critical value for the workpiece 10 that has undergone the defect part detection processing, the relevant information is evaluated It may not have a critical value.

所謂的受理,是包含從鍵盤或滑鼠、觸控板等輸入裝置輸入資訊的受理、經由有線或無線通訊線路傳送的資訊接收、從光碟或磁碟、半導體記憶體等記錄媒體讀取的資訊受理等概念。The so-called reception includes the reception of information input from input devices such as keyboards, mice, and touch pads, the reception of information transmitted via wired or wireless communication lines, and the information read from recording media such as optical disks or magnetic disks, semiconductor memory, etc. Acceptance and other concepts.

評估相關資訊受理部105所受理的評估相關資訊是儲存於例如未圖示的儲存部等。The evaluation-related information accepted by the evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 is stored in, for example, a storage unit (not shown).

評估相關資訊受理部105得以輸入裝置的驅動器、選單畫面的控制軟體、或接收裝置等來實現。The evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 can be realized by inputting a device driver, a menu screen control software, or a receiving device.

設定部106使用評估相關資訊,來取得取得部103用於缺陷部分檢測關於大小的一個或兩個以上臨界值。然後,使用所取得的臨界值,設定取得部103用於缺陷部分檢測之關於大小的臨界值。此處的設定亦包含例如藉由內定(預設default)等或使用者等所設定的取得部103用於缺陷部分檢測的一個或兩個以上臨界值的更新(例如覆寫(overwrite)等概念。The setting section 106 uses the evaluation-related information to obtain one or more critical values for the size of the defective section detection by the obtaining section 103. Then, using the acquired critical value, the critical value regarding the size used by the acquiring unit 103 for detecting the defective portion is set. The setting here also includes, for example, the update of one or more critical values for the detection of the defective part by the acquisition unit 103 set by default (default) or the user (such as the concept of overwrite) .

例如,在取得部103已使用有關缺陷部分自邊緣11起算距離的一個臨界值,對工件10進行缺陷部分檢測時,判斷為未檢測到缺陷部分的一個或兩個以上的預定數以上的工件10中,具有表示經判斷為實際有缺陷部分的工件10的資訊的評估相關資訊已為評估相關資訊受理部105所受理時,設定部106即取得較由取得部103所使用有關缺陷部分自邊緣11起算的距離的一個臨界值的值更容易檢測缺陷部分的臨界值 (例如,較小值的臨界值),並以該臨界值來更新取得部103所利用有關自邊緣11起算距離的臨界值。藉此方式,自邊緣11起算距離的變化更小的部分也可作為缺陷部分加以檢測,而可減少缺陷部分的檢測遺漏。另外,在此情況中,也可將尚有以再檢査等取得的表示缺陷部分自邊緣11起算距離的資訊的評估相關資訊加以受理,使用雖未檢測到缺陷部分但實際上有缺陷部分的工件10的表示缺陷部分自邊緣11起算距離的資訊,而取得可檢測到該缺陷部分的臨界值。For example, when the acquiring unit 103 has used a critical value for the distance from the edge 11 of the defective portion to detect the defective portion of the workpiece 10, it is determined that one or more predetermined number of workpieces 10 or more are not detected in the defective portion In the case where the evaluation-related information with information indicating that the workpiece 10 is judged to be actually a defective part has been accepted by the evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105, the setting unit 106 acquires the relevant defective part from the edge 11 as compared to the use by the acquisition unit 103 The value of a critical value of the calculated distance makes it easier to detect the critical value of the defective portion (for example, the smaller value of the critical value), and updates the critical value of the distance calculated from the edge 11 used by the acquiring unit 103 with the critical value. In this way, the part with a smaller change in distance from the edge 11 can also be detected as a defective part, and the detection omission of the defective part can be reduced. In addition, in this case, it is also possible to accept the evaluation-related information obtained by re-inspection, etc., which indicates the distance from the edge 11 of the defective part, and use the workpiece that actually has the defective part although the defective part is not detected The information 10 indicates the distance from the edge 11 of the defective part, and the critical value at which the defective part can be detected is obtained.

此外,例如,在檢測到缺陷部分的一個或兩個以上的預定數工件10中,在再檢査等時,包含有表示實際上未檢測到缺陷部分的資訊的評估相關資訊已為評估相關資訊受理部105受理時,設定部106也可取得較取得部103所使用有關缺陷部分自邊緣11起算距離的一個臨界值的值更難檢測缺陷的臨界值(例如,取得較大值的臨界值),並以該臨界值來更新取得部103正在進行利用中自邊緣11起算距離的臨界值,作為有關自邊緣起算距離的臨界值。In addition, for example, in one or more than a predetermined number of workpieces 10 in which a defective portion is detected, upon re-examination, etc., evaluation-related information including information indicating that the defective portion is not actually detected has been accepted for evaluation-related information When the unit 105 accepts, the setting unit 106 may also obtain a critical value that is more difficult to detect defects than a critical value of the distance from the edge 11 used by the acquiring unit 103 in relation to the defect (for example, acquiring a larger critical value), The critical value is used to update the critical value of the distance from the edge 11 in use by the acquiring unit 103 as the critical value of the distance from the edge.

再者,設定部106也可使用具有正誤資訊及臨界值的評估相關資訊進行機器學習,而取得有關缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值。例如,設定部106會使用評估相關資訊受理部105所受理的針對複數個工件評估相關資訊的正誤資訊、關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值、及關於上述的工件處理裝置1的後續程序處理的資訊或關於工件10的資訊(例如,工件的種類等資訊)、或關於缺陷部分的資訊等中的一個以上資訊的組合使用作為學習數據進行學習。並且,例如,工件處理裝置1針對一個以上工件10進行處理等時,在設定缺陷檢測用臨界值時,就工件10與上述學習同樣地,針對關於工件處理裝置1的後續程序處理的資訊、或關於工件10的資訊、或關於缺陷部分的資訊等其中一個以上資訊、及關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值(例如,有關自邊緣起算距離的臨界值或寬度的臨界值)而預先準備的複數個臨界值的各個的組對,透過經由上述評估相關資訊受理部105等進行輸入,並使用學習結果評估各個組對。然後,獲得具有表示可針對缺陷部分正確判斷的正誤資訊的評估結果時,也可取得包含於上述組對的臨界值之中的一個(例如,最大臨界值等),作為有關缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值。而且,也可將該臨界值設定作為缺陷部分檢測用臨界值。In addition, the setting unit 106 may also use machine-learning information with correctness information and critical value evaluation information to obtain more than one critical value regarding the size of the defective portion. For example, the setting unit 106 uses the correctness information of the evaluation-related information received by the evaluation-related information accepting unit 105 for the plurality of workpiece evaluations, more than one critical value regarding the size of the defective portion, and the subsequent processing regarding the above-mentioned workpiece processing apparatus 1 A combination of one or more pieces of information or information about the workpiece 10 (for example, information such as the type of the workpiece), or information about the defective part, etc. is used as learning data for learning. Further, for example, when the workpiece processing apparatus 1 processes one or more workpieces 10, etc., when setting a defect detection threshold, the workpiece 10 is processed in the same way as the above-mentioned learning, with regard to the information about the subsequent processing of the workpiece processing apparatus 1, or More than one piece of information such as information about the workpiece 10, or information about the defective part, and more than one critical value about the size of the defective part (for example, the critical value about the distance from the edge or the critical value of the width) Each pair of each threshold value is input through the above-mentioned evaluation-related information accepting unit 105 and the like, and each pair is evaluated using the learning result. Then, when obtaining the evaluation result with correct and wrong information indicating that the defective part can be correctly judged, one of the critical values (for example, the maximum critical value, etc.) included in the above-mentioned pair can also be obtained as one of the size of the defective part The above threshold. Furthermore, the threshold value may be set as a threshold value for detecting a defective portion.

透過依此種方式,即可按照後續程序的處理、或工件種類等,使用適當的臨界值,以優異精確度檢測工件10的邊緣11的缺陷部分。In this way, the defect portion of the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 can be detected with excellent accuracy using appropriate threshold values according to the processing of the subsequent procedure or the type of the workpiece.

有關使用學習數據的學習,SVR等學習模型為可利用的公知技術。此時,學習數據也可以為教師數據。For learning using learning data, learning models such as SVR are well-known techniques that can be used. At this time, the learning data may also be teacher data.

此外,設定部106也可從評估相關資訊具有的一個關於工件10的缺陷部分資訊、及表示實際上工件10的邊緣11有無缺陷部分的資訊適當取得正誤資訊。In addition, the setting unit 106 may appropriately obtain correctness and error information from information on a defective part of the workpiece 10 included in the evaluation-related information and information indicating whether the edge 11 of the workpiece 10 is actually defective.

再者,上述中,也可學習工件10的處理結果(例如,工件10是否破損等)以取代正誤資訊,學習工件10的缺陷部分自邊緣11起算的距離以取代臨界值。此時,透過將具有關於工件處理裝置1的後續程序處理的資訊、或關於工件10的資訊、或關於缺陷部分的資訊等中的一個以上資訊、及缺陷部分自邊緣起算的各個複數個距離的複數個組對輸入學習結果,可以取得在後續程序未發生破損等的缺陷部分自邊緣起算的距離,例如,可透過將該距離當作臨界值使用,而適當的檢測缺陷部分。另外,也可透過進行這些以外的機器學習來設定關於用在缺陷檢測時的規格的臨界值,應無庸置疑。Furthermore, in the above, the processing result of the workpiece 10 (for example, whether the workpiece 10 is damaged, etc.) may be learned to replace the correct information, and the distance from the edge 11 of the defective portion of the workpiece 10 may be learned to replace the critical value. At this time, by combining more than one piece of information including information about the subsequent processing of the workpiece processing device 1, or information about the workpiece 10, or information about the defective part, and the plural distances from the edge of the defective part By inputting the learning result of a plurality of groups, the distance from the edge of the defective part that has not been damaged in the subsequent procedure can be obtained. For example, the defective part can be appropriately detected by using the distance as a threshold. In addition, it is possible to set the critical value of the specifications used in defect detection by performing machine learning other than these, and there should be no doubt.

又,設定部106也可從包含於評估相關資訊的過去所利用的臨界值、及後續程序的處理、或工件種類等所得參數等的組合,使用多元回歸分析等來製作臨界值的預測式,藉該預測式來計算與後續程序處理、或工件種類等相應的適當臨界值,以設定計算所得的臨界值。In addition, the setting unit 106 may use a multiple regression analysis or the like to generate a prediction formula of the critical value from a combination of the critical values included in the past used in the evaluation-related information, the processing of the subsequent program, the type of work, and other parameters. Use the predictive formula to calculate the appropriate threshold value corresponding to the subsequent program processing, workpiece type, etc. to set the calculated threshold value.

接著,使用圖3,就邊緣位置檢測器102的一例加以說明。Next, an example of the edge position detector 102 will be described using FIG. 3.

邊緣位置檢測器102具備有用以使供載置工件10的轉盤52旋轉的轉盤旋轉機構53,轉盤旋轉機構53藉電動馬達54予以驅動。檢測工件10的邊緣位置的邊緣檢測部55具有投光器55a及感測器55b。感測器55b為例如光感測器。感測器55b是一邊使輸出對應受光量保持特定關係,一邊連續性變化的裝置,可使用所謂CCD(電荷耦合元件)、PSD(位敏感測器,Position Sensitive Detector,商品名)等輸出對入射光量呈直線性變化的裝置。感測器55b相當於例如圖2(a)的感測器15。邊緣檢測部55的感測器55b由投光器55a射出光線,藉正下方的工件10減少光量,來產生與到達光量對應的輸出。該輸出即成為表示工件10的邊緣位置的指標。編碼器56會檢測電動馬達54的旋轉量並輸出數位訊號,而電動馬達54的旋轉量則與轉盤52的旋轉角度相當。儲存部57將感測器55b的輸出及編碼器56的輸出設為1對數據,並依照轉盤52的毎一定旋轉角度來進行儲存。此外,儲存部57也可將感測器55b的輸出換算成工件10自旋轉中心至邊緣11的距離再輸出。在此具體例中,儲存部57將旋轉角度、與感測器55b的輸出換算成工件10自旋轉中心至邊緣11的距離所得的第一距離資訊的組對作為第一旋轉距離資訊,並儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。還有,感測器55b的輸出為類比訊號時,只要在儲存部57與感測器55b之間設置A/D(類比/數位)轉換器等即可。The edge position detector 102 includes a turntable rotation mechanism 53 for rotating the turntable 52 on which the workpiece 10 is placed. The turntable rotation mechanism 53 is driven by an electric motor 54. The edge detection unit 55 that detects the edge position of the work 10 has a light projector 55a and a sensor 55b. The sensor 55b is, for example, a light sensor. The sensor 55b is a device that continuously changes while keeping the output corresponding to the amount of received light, and can use so-called CCD (Charge Coupled Device), PSD (Position Sensitive Sensor, Position Sensitive Detector, trade name) etc. A device whose light quantity changes linearly. The sensor 55b corresponds to, for example, the sensor 15 of FIG. 2(a). The sensor 55b of the edge detection unit 55 emits light from the light projector 55a, and the light amount is reduced by the workpiece 10 directly below to generate an output corresponding to the amount of light reached. This output becomes an index indicating the edge position of the workpiece 10. The encoder 56 detects the rotation amount of the electric motor 54 and outputs a digital signal, and the rotation amount of the electric motor 54 is equivalent to the rotation angle of the turntable 52. The storage unit 57 sets the output of the sensor 55 b and the output of the encoder 56 as a pair of data, and stores the data in accordance with each rotation angle of the turntable 52. In addition, the storage unit 57 may convert the output of the sensor 55b into the distance from the center of rotation of the workpiece 10 to the edge 11 and then output it. In this specific example, the storage unit 57 converts the rotation angle and the output of the sensor 55b into the first distance information obtained by converting the distance of the workpiece 10 from the center of rotation to the edge 11 as the first rotation distance information, and stores In the first rotation distance information storage unit 101. In addition, when the output of the sensor 55b is an analog signal, an A/D (analog/digital) converter or the like may be provided between the storage unit 57 and the sensor 55b.

另外,此處所舉出的邊緣位置檢測器102僅為一例,本發明中,只要是能取得與邊緣位置檢測器102同樣的有關工件10的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的裝置,其他邊緣位置檢測器102也可使用。In addition, the edge position detector 102 mentioned here is just an example. In the present invention, as long as it is a device that can obtain a plurality of first rotation distance information about the workpiece 10 similar to the edge position detector 102, other edge position detection The device 102 can also be used.

而且,此處的邊緣位置檢測器102是就工件處理裝置1之一部分的情形來表示,但也可將邊緣位置檢測器102設為例如與工件處理裝置1不同的裝置。In addition, the edge position detector 102 here is shown as a part of the workpiece processing apparatus 1, but the edge position detector 102 may be a device different from the workpiece processing apparatus 1, for example.

其次,使用圖4,就本實施形態的工件輸送系統的一例加以說明。Next, an example of the work conveyance system of this embodiment will be described using FIG. 4.

工件輸送系統1000具備工件處理裝置1、及工件輸送裝置2。工件輸送系統1000的輸送路徑1001是以例如未圖示的罩蓋(cover)等予以覆蓋。The workpiece conveying system 1000 includes a workpiece processing device 1 and a workpiece conveying device 2. The conveying path 1001 of the workpiece conveying system 1000 is covered with a cover (not shown), for example.

工件輸送裝置2為進行工件10的輸送的裝置。例如,工件輸送裝置2具備可使工件朝水平方向或垂直方向移動的輸送臂等。在載置有工件10的狀態下,藉由使該輸送臂移動,即可將工件10輸送。工件輸送裝置2本身也可具有可朝水平方向、或垂直方向移動的構造。但,工件輸送裝置2的構造等並不拘。The workpiece conveying device 2 is a device that conveys the workpiece 10. For example, the workpiece conveying device 2 includes a conveying arm that can move the workpiece in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction. When the workpiece 10 is placed, the workpiece 10 can be conveyed by moving the conveying arm. The work conveying device 2 itself may have a structure movable in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction. However, the structure and the like of the work conveying device 2 are not limited.

工件輸送裝置2會對工件處理裝置1進行工件10的傳送。所謂對工件處理裝置1進行工件10的傳送,是指例如在工件10的輸送中,將工件10輸送至工件處理裝置1,將工件交遞給工件處理裝置1,之後,從工件處理裝置1接受工件10,輸送到其他地點的動作。The workpiece conveying device 2 conveys the workpiece 10 to the workpiece processing device 1. The conveyance of the workpiece 10 to the workpiece processing apparatus 1 refers to, for example, during the conveyance of the workpiece 10, the workpiece 10 is conveyed to the workpiece processing apparatus 1, the workpiece is delivered to the workpiece processing apparatus 1, and then received from the workpiece processing apparatus 1 The movement of the workpiece 10 to other locations.

工件輸送裝置2為例如進行從第一地點至工件處理裝置1之輸送、及從工件處理裝置1至第二地點之輸送的裝置。第一地點為配置有作為輸送對象的工件10的地點。第二地點為作為輸送對象的工件10的輸送目的地的地點。另外,工件輸送裝置2也可再進行從工件處理裝置1至第三地點的輸送,該第三地點則作為供載置回收用工件10的地點。例如,工件輸送裝置2也可按照自外部等輸入的指示等,將工件10輸送至第二地點或第三地點的任一地點。The workpiece conveying device 2 is, for example, a device that performs conveyance from the first location to the workpiece processing device 1 and conveyance from the workpiece processing device 1 to the second location. The first point is a point where the workpiece 10 to be conveyed is arranged. The second location is the location of the transport destination of the workpiece 10 to be transported. In addition, the workpiece conveying device 2 may further perform conveyance from the workpiece processing device 1 to a third location, which serves as a location for placing the recovery workpiece 10. For example, the workpiece conveying device 2 may convey the workpiece 10 to any one of the second location or the third location according to an instruction input from the outside or the like.

此處,作為一個例子,舉出工件輸送裝置2將作為第一地點的容器4所收容的工件10輸送至工件處理裝置1的轉盤52上,並將載置於工件處理裝置1之轉盤52上的工件10輸送至作為第二地點的預先指定處理執行裝置(未圖示)的載置台6、或作為第三地點的回收用容器5内的情形加以說明。在此情況中,例如,工件輸送裝置2會經由未圖示的接收部等接收工件處理裝置1的輸出部104所輸出的異常輸出,接收到異常輸出時,即將載置於工件處理裝置1的轉盤52上的工件10輸送到作為第三地點的回收用容器5内,將工件10回收;未接收到異常輸出時,就將載置於工件處理裝置1的轉盤52上的工件10輸送至作為第二地點的預先指定處理執行裝置(未圖示)的載置台6。Here, as an example, the workpiece conveying device 2 conveys the workpiece 10 stored in the container 4 as the first location to the turntable 52 of the workpiece processing device 1 and places it on the turntable 52 of the workpiece processing device 1 The case where the workpiece 10 is transported to the mounting table 6 of the pre-designated processing execution device (not shown) as the second location or the recovery container 5 as the third location will be described. In this case, for example, the workpiece conveying apparatus 2 receives the abnormal output from the output section 104 of the workpiece processing apparatus 1 via a receiving section or the like (not shown). When the abnormal output is received, the abnormal output is placed on the workpiece processing apparatus 1. The workpiece 10 on the turntable 52 is transported to the recovery container 5 as the third location to collect the workpiece 10; when no abnormal output is received, the workpiece 10 placed on the turntable 52 of the workpiece processing apparatus 1 is transported to The mounting table 6 of the pre-designated processing execution device (not shown) at the second location.

此外,工件輸送裝置2也可具備:接收工件處理裝置1的輸出部104所輸出的修正資訊等工件對準位置用的資訊,並修正工件10的位置的裝置;或接收工件處理裝置1的輸出部104所輸出的缺口部表示資訊等工件朝向特定資訊,並修正工件10之朝向的裝置。In addition, the workpiece conveying device 2 may also include: a device that receives correction information such as correction information output by the output unit 104 of the workpiece processing device 1 and corrects the position of the workpiece 10; or receives an output of the workpiece processing device 1 The notch output by the section 104 represents information such as information about the orientation of the workpiece, and corrects the orientation of the workpiece 10.

又,工件輸送裝置2也可具備用以接收工件處理裝置1的輸出部104所輸出的異常輸出,並因應接收到的異常輸出而停止工件10的輸送的裝置等。In addition, the workpiece conveying device 2 may include a device that receives the abnormal output from the output unit 104 of the workpiece processing device 1 and stops the conveyance of the workpiece 10 in response to the received abnormal output.

此外,有關工件輸送裝置2的構成,是屬公知技術,故在此處省略其詳細說明。In addition, the configuration of the work conveying device 2 is a well-known technology, and therefore its detailed description is omitted here.

載置台6為在對工件10執行預先指定處理的裝置(未圖示)上用以載置作為處理對象的工件10的平台。載置台6相當於上述的第二地點。執行預先指定處理的裝置也可為CVD裝置、或表面研磨裝置等任何裝置。例如,對載置於該載置台6的工件10進行預先指定的處理的裝置。。The mounting table 6 is a platform on which a workpiece 10 to be processed is placed on a device (not shown) that performs predetermined processing on the workpiece 10. The mounting table 6 corresponds to the second point mentioned above. The device performing the pre-specified processing may be any device such as a CVD device or a surface polishing device. For example, a device that performs predetermined processing on a workpiece 10 placed on the mounting table 6. .

容器4為用以收容並輸送一個或兩個以上工件10的容器。容器4相當於上述的第一地點。容器4供收容作為上述未圖示裝置的處理對象的工件10。藉工件輸送裝置2輸送並載置於載置台6的工件10收容於容器4。容器4為例如收容並輸送一個或兩個以上工件10的匣盒。容器4為例如所謂FOUP(Front Open Unified Pod,前開式晶圓運送盒)。容器4可安裝於輸送路徑1001的未圖示罩蓋(cover)或自其中卸下。輸送路1001的罩蓋設有例如供安裝容器4用的門扉(未圖示)等。The container 4 is a container for containing and conveying one or more work pieces 10. The container 4 corresponds to the first point mentioned above. The container 4 accommodates the workpiece 10 to be processed by the device (not shown). The workpiece 10 conveyed by the workpiece conveying device 2 and placed on the mounting table 6 is accommodated in the container 4. The container 4 is, for example, a cassette that accommodates and transports one or more work pieces 10. The container 4 is, for example, a so-called FOUP (Front   Open   Unified   Pod). The container 4 can be attached to or detached from a cover (not shown) of the conveying path 1001. The cover of the conveyance path 1001 is provided with, for example, a door (not shown) for mounting the container 4.

容器5為用以收容並輸送一個或兩個以上工件10的容器。容器5相當於上述的第三地點。容器5為供收容對應輸出部104所輸出的異常輸出而回收的工件10的容器。容器5供收容對應異常輸出而藉工件輸送裝置2輸送的工件10。有關容器5的其他構成等,與容器4相同。The container 5 is a container for storing and transporting one or more work pieces 10. The container 5 corresponds to the third point mentioned above. The container 5 is a container for storing the workpiece 10 recovered in response to the abnormal output from the output unit 104. The container 5 accommodates the workpiece 10 conveyed by the workpiece conveying device 2 corresponding to the abnormal output. The other configuration of the container 5 is the same as that of the container 4.

另外,此處針對第一地點為容器4、第二地點為載置台6、第三地點為容器5的情況來說明,但各個地點也可為作為任何目的的地點。例如,第一地點也可為對工件進行預定處理的執行用裝置的載置台等。而且,第二地點也可為與容器4同樣的容器。此外,第三地點也可為進行工件檢査用檢査裝置(未圖示)的載置台等。In addition, here, the case where the first point is the container 4, the second point is the mounting table 6, and the third point is the container 5 will be described, but each point may be a point for any purpose. For example, the first location may be a mounting table of an execution device that performs predetermined processing on a workpiece. Moreover, the second location may be the same container as the container 4. In addition, the third point may be a mounting table or the like for performing an inspection device (not shown) for inspecting a workpiece.

接著,使用圖6的流程圖,就工件處理裝置1的一個動作例加以說明。另外,由於有關邊緣位置檢測器102取得第一旋轉距離資訊的處理是屬公知,故其說明在此容予省略。又,將邊緣位置檢測器102針對工件10取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的處理,其說明在此亦容予省略。同時,在此就設定部106不利用機器學習而取得關於缺陷部分規格的臨界值的情形為例加以說明。Next, an operation example of the workpiece processing apparatus 1 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 6. In addition, since the process of obtaining the first rotational distance information by the edge position detector 102 is well known, its description is omitted here. In addition, the process of storing the plurality of first rotation distance information acquired by the edge position detector 102 for the workpiece 10 in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101 is also omitted here. At the same time, the case where the setting unit 106 acquires the critical value regarding the specification of the defective portion without using machine learning will be described as an example.

(步驟S100)工件處理裝置1判斷是否為輸出修正資訊、表示缺口部的資訊及關於缺陷部分的資訊的時機。例如,工件處理裝置1會判斷針對一個工件10所取得的相當於工件10一周的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊是否已儲存第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101,若已儲存時,則判斷為輸出上述資訊的時機;若未儲存時,即判斷為非輸出時機。或者,也可在藉邊緣位置檢測器102所執行的有關一個工件10的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的取得處理已結束時,判斷為輸出時機。輸出時,進到步驟S101;不輸出時,進到步驟S120。(Step S100) The workpiece processing apparatus 1 determines whether it is time to output correction information, information indicating a notch portion, and information about a defective portion. For example, the workpiece processing apparatus 1 determines whether the plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information acquired for one work piece 10 corresponding to one week of the work piece 10 have been stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101, and if it has been stored, it determines to output the above The timing of the information; if it is not saved, it is judged as a non-output timing. Alternatively, it may be determined as the output timing when the acquisition processing of the plurality of first rotation distance information about one workpiece 10 performed by the edge position detector 102 has ended. When outputting, proceed to step S101; when not outputting, proceed to step S120.

(步驟S101)合成裝置1031將與一個工件10對應的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊所包含的複數個第一距離資訊中的對應旋轉角度的差以逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊分別合成,並取得複數個合成距離資訊。例如,合成裝置1031會將旋轉角度值相連續的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊以旋轉角度值的範圍為90度的方式持續分割成複數個組,且將分割所得的各組的排列順序相同的第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的第一距離資訊彼此間進行合成。此處的合成是指例如平均值的計算。合成裝置1031則將取得的合成距離資訊、與分別與已合成的4個第一距離資訊對應的4個旋轉角度形成對應,並儲存於未圖示的儲存部。(Step S101) The synthesis device 1031 divides the difference in corresponding rotation angles among the plurality of first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to one workpiece 10 by successively different first distance information of 90 degrees Synthesize separately, and obtain a plurality of synthetic distance information. For example, the synthesis device 1031 continuously divides the plurality of first rotation distance information having continuous rotation angle values into a plurality of groups with a rotation angle value range of 90 degrees, and arranges the divided groups in the same order The first distance information possessed by the first rotation distance information is synthesized with each other. The synthesis here refers to, for example, calculation of an average value. The synthesizing device 1031 associates the acquired synthesized distance information with the four rotation angles corresponding to the synthesized four first distance information, respectively, and stores them in a storage section (not shown).

(步驟S102)合成處理裝置1032將1代入作為計數器p之值。(Step S102) The synthesis processing device 1032 substitutes 1 as the value of the counter p.

(步驟S103)合成處理裝置1032對步驟S102所合成的合成距離資訊中從值較小者算起第p個合成距離資訊進行檢測。合成處理裝置1032對例如已檢測的合成距離資訊賦予表示已檢測的旗標或表示要刪除的旗標等資訊。也可將表示最小值的合成距離資訊進行檢測、刪除,以取代檢測第p個合成距離資訊。要刪除時,下次則從未刪除的其餘合成距離資訊中再次將表示最小值的合成距離資訊進行檢測、刪除。(Step S103) The synthesis processing device 1032 detects the p-th synthesized distance information from the smaller value in the synthesized distance information synthesized in step S102. The synthesis processing device 1032 gives information such as the detected flag or the flag to be deleted to the detected synthesized distance information, for example. The synthetic distance information indicating the minimum value can also be detected and deleted, instead of detecting the p-th synthetic distance information. When it is to be deleted, the remaining synthetic distance information that has never been deleted will be detected and deleted again from the remaining synthetic distance information that represents the minimum value.

(步驟S104)合成處理裝置1032將計數器p的值遞增1。(Step S104) The synthesis processing device 1032 increments the value of the counter p by one.

(步驟S105)合成處理裝置1032判斷計數器p的值是否在預先指定的預定數以上。若為預定數以上,即進到步驟S106;如非在預定數以上,則返回步驟S103。(Step S105) The synthesis processing device 1032 determines whether the value of the counter p is a predetermined number or more. If it is more than the predetermined number, it proceeds to step S106; if it is not more than the predetermined number, it returns to step S103.

(步驟S106)合成處理裝置1032將1代入作為計數器q的值。(Step S106) The synthesis processing device 1032 substitutes 1 as the value of the counter q.

(步驟S107)合成處理裝置1032在步驟S102所合成的合成距離資訊中,對從值較大者算起的第q個合成距離資訊進行檢測。合成處理裝置1032會例如對已檢測的合成距離資訊賦予表示已檢測的旗標或表示已刪除的旗標等資訊。另外,也可檢測、刪除表示最大值的合成距離資訊,以取代檢測第q個合成距離資訊。若刪除時,下次則從未刪除的其餘合成距離資訊再次將表示最大值的合成距離資訊進行檢測、刪除。(Step S107) The synthesis processing device 1032 detects the qth synthesis distance information from the larger value in the synthesis distance information synthesized in step S102. The synthesis processing device 1032, for example, gives information such as a detected flag or a deleted flag to the detected synthesized distance information. In addition, it is also possible to detect and delete the synthetic distance information indicating the maximum value, instead of detecting the qth synthetic distance information. If it is deleted, the remaining synthetic distance information that has never been deleted next time will be detected and deleted again.

(步驟S108)合成處理裝置1032將計數器q的值遞增1。(Step S108) The synthesis processing device 1032 increments the value of the counter q by one.

(步驟S109)合成處理裝置1032判斷計數器q的值是否在預定數以上。如在預定數以上,即進到步驟S110;若非預定數以上,則返回步驟S107。(Step S109) The synthesis processing device 1032 determines whether the value of the counter q is a predetermined number or more. If it is more than the predetermined number, it proceeds to step S110; if it is not more than the predetermined number, it returns to step S107.

(步驟S110)合成處理裝置1032對在步驟S103及步驟S107未檢測(或未刪除)且預先指定數以上相連續的合成距離資訊進行檢測。(Step S110) The synthesis processing device 1032 detects the synthesis distance information that has not been detected (or not deleted) in steps S103 and S107 and has been consecutively specified in number or more.

(步驟S111)合成處理裝置1032從已在步驟S110檢測的相連續合成距離資訊中對一個合成距離資訊(例如順序在中央的合成距離資訊)進行檢測,並取得已檢測合成距離資訊作為合成源的4個第一距離資訊、及與該第一距離資訊中的一個對應的旋轉角度。例如,在與4個第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度中取得值最小者作為一個旋轉角度。(Step S111) The synthesis processing device 1032 detects one synthesized distance information (for example, synthesized distance information in the center) from the phase-continuous synthesized distance information that has been detected in step S110, and obtains the detected synthesized distance information as the synthesis source Four pieces of first distance information and a rotation angle corresponding to one of the first distance information. For example, the one with the smallest value among the rotation angles corresponding to the four first distance information is used as one rotation angle.

(步驟S112)修正資訊取得裝置1033使用步驟S111取得的4個第一距離資訊、及一個旋轉角度,取得用以使工件10的旋轉中心移動至工件10的中心的修正資訊。例如,使用上述式(1)及式(2)取得修正資訊。並且,將取得的修正資訊暫時記憶在未圖示的儲存部。(Step S112) The correction information obtaining device 1033 uses the four first distance information obtained in step S111 and a rotation angle to obtain correction information for moving the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the center of the workpiece 10. For example, the above formula (1) and formula (2) are used to obtain correction information. In addition, the obtained correction information is temporarily stored in a storage unit (not shown).

(步驟S113)第二距離資訊取得裝置1034使用在步驟S112所取得的修正資訊,取得表示工件10在邊緣11無凹凸的圓形時的旋轉角度及與旋轉角度相應的第二距離資訊的關係的關係式。例如,將修正資訊代入上述式(3)的係數而取得理想曲線式。(Step S113) The second distance information obtaining device 1034 uses the correction information obtained in step S112 to obtain the relationship between the rotation angle of the workpiece 10 when the edge 11 has no unevenness and the second distance information corresponding to the rotation angle Relationship. For example, the correction information is substituted into the coefficient of the above formula (3) to obtain the ideal curve formula.

(步驟S114)第二距離資訊取得裝置1034將與上述的一個工件10對應的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊所對應的複數個旋轉角度分別代入步驟S113取得的關係式,並按毎個旋轉角度取得第二距離資訊。接著,將具有旋轉角度及第二距離資訊的複數個第二旋轉距離資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部。(Step S114) The second distance information obtaining device 1034 substitutes the plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to the above-mentioned one workpiece 10 into the relational expression obtained in step S113, and obtains each rotation angle Second distance information. Next, a plurality of second rotation distance information having a rotation angle and second distance information is stored in a storage section (not shown).

(步驟S115)計算裝置1035取得表示與相同旋轉角度形成對應的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差的複數個距離差資訊。(Step S115) The computing device 1035 obtains a plurality of pieces of distance difference information indicating the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information corresponding to the same rotation angle.

(步驟S116)缺口檢測裝置1036使用複數個距離差資訊及第一臨界值取得表示缺口部的資訊。(Step S116) The notch detection device 1036 uses a plurality of pieces of distance difference information and a first threshold to obtain information indicating the notch.

(步驟S117)缺陷檢測裝置1037使用複數個距離差資訊及第二臨界值並進行關於缺陷部分資訊的取得處理。(Step S117) The defect detection device 1037 uses a plurality of pieces of distance difference information and the second critical value and performs acquisition processing on the defect part information.

(步驟S118)輸出部104按照關於缺陷部分的資訊進行異常輸出。另外,所謂按照關於缺陷部分的資訊進行異常輸出,亦包含不藉關於缺陷部分的資訊進行異常輸出,或在未取得關於缺陷部分的資訊時,不進行異常輸出的概念。(Step S118) The output unit 104 performs abnormal output based on the information about the defective part. In addition, the so-called abnormal output based on the information about the defective part also includes the concept of not performing abnormal output based on the information about the defective part, or not obtaining the abnormal output when the information about the defective part is not obtained.

(步驟S119)輸出部104將修正資訊、表示缺口部的資訊及關於缺陷部分的資訊輸出。然後,返回步驟S100。還有,已在步驟S118進行異常輸出時,輸出部104也可不輸出表示修正資訊或缺口部的資訊。而且,輸出部10在缺陷檢測裝置1037未取得關於缺陷部分的資訊時,可不輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊。(Step S119) The output unit 104 outputs the correction information, the information indicating the notch, and the information about the defective part. Then, it returns to step S100. In addition, when the abnormal output has been performed in step S118, the output unit 104 may not output the information indicating the correction information or the notch. Furthermore, the output unit 10 may not output the information about the defective part when the defect detection device 1037 has not acquired the information about the defective part.

(步驟S120)評估相關資訊受理部105判斷是否已受理評估相關資訊。已受理時,進到步驟S121;未受理時,進到步驟S122。(Step S120) The evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 determines whether evaluation-related information has been accepted. When it has been accepted, it proceeds to step S121; when it has not been accepted, it proceeds to step S122.

(步驟S121)評估相關資訊受理部105將步驟S120所受理的評估相關資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部。然後,返回步驟S100。(Step S121) The evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 stores the evaluation-related information accepted in step S120 in a storage unit (not shown). Then, it returns to step S100.

(步驟S122)設定部106判斷是否為設定關於缺陷部分之規格的一個以上臨界值的時機。例如,經由未圖示的受理部等從使用者受理了臨界值設定指示時,即判斷為設定時機;未受理時,則判斷為非時機。再者,已在步驟S120受理了評估相關資訊時,或在步驟S121中受理了預先指定數的評估相關資訊時,也可判斷為設定時機。是設定時機時,進到步驟S123;非設定時機時,返回步驟S100。(Step S122) The setting unit 106 determines whether it is time to set one or more critical values for the specification of the defective part. For example, when a threshold setting instruction is received from a user via an unillustrated reception unit or the like, it is determined that the timing is set; when it is not accepted, it is determined that it is not the timing. In addition, when the evaluation-related information has been accepted in step S120, or when a predetermined number of evaluation-related information has been accepted in step S121, it may be determined that the timing is set. When the timing is set, the process proceeds to step S123; when the timing is not set, the process returns to step S100.

(步驟S123)設定部106使用在步驟S121儲存的評估相關資訊,取得關於缺陷部分的規格的一個以上臨界值。(Step S123) The setting unit 106 uses the evaluation-related information stored in step S121 to obtain one or more critical values regarding the specifications of the defective part.

(步驟S124)設定部106將步驟S123取得的臨界值設定為取得部103檢測缺陷部分時要利用的臨界值。例如,將臨界值儲存於未圖示的儲存部。另外,與已在步驟S123取得的臨界值對應的臨界值 (例如,用於相同處理的臨界值)為既已設定時(例如,已設定有內定(default)的臨界值時),設定部106則將該臨界值更新。該更新可以為設定。接著,返回步驟S100。(Step S124) The setting unit 106 sets the threshold value obtained in step S123 as the threshold value to be used when the obtaining unit 103 detects the defective portion. For example, the threshold value is stored in a storage section (not shown). In addition, when the threshold value corresponding to the threshold value acquired in step S123 (for example, the threshold value for the same process) is already set (for example, when a default threshold value has been set), the setting unit 106 Then update the threshold. The update can be set. Then, it returns to step S100.

還有,圖6中,是說明設定部106不利用機器學習就取得臨界值的情況,但設定部106利用機器學習來取得臨界值時,例如,在設定部106使用步驟S121所儲存的評估相關資訊進行學習,並在步驟S123取得臨界值之前,只要將與其所學習的評估相關資訊同樣的關於工件處理裝置1的後續程序處理的資訊、或關於工件10的資訊、或關於缺陷部分的資訊等其中一個以上資訊、與針對關於缺陷部分的大小的一個以上臨界值(例如,有關自邊緣起算距離的臨界值、或有關寬度的臨界值)而預先準備的各複數個臨界值的組對,經由上述評估相關資訊受理部105進行受理,且在步驟S123中,設定部106會從所受理的這些資訊及學習結果取得臨界值。此外,預先準備的複數個臨界值也可利用內定等預先儲存於未圖示的儲存部等。6 illustrates the case where the setting unit 106 obtains the threshold value without using machine learning. However, when the setting unit 106 uses machine learning to obtain the threshold value, for example, the setting unit 106 uses the evaluation correlation stored in step S121 Learning the information, and before obtaining the critical value in step S123, as long as the information related to the evaluation of the learning is processed, the information about the subsequent processing of the workpiece processing device 1, the information about the workpiece 10, or the information about the defective part, etc. More than one piece of information, and a pair of plural critical values prepared in advance for more than one critical value about the size of the defective part (for example, a critical value about the distance from the edge, or a critical value about the width), via The above-mentioned evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105 accepts, and in step S123, the setting unit 106 obtains a critical value from the received information and learning results. In addition, the plurality of threshold values prepared in advance may be stored in a storage unit (not shown) or the like in advance by default.

另,圖6的流程圖中,藉由電源關斷或處理結束的插入,處理即告結束。In addition, in the flowchart of FIG. 6, the process is terminated by the power-off or the insertion of the end of the process.

接著,使用圖7的流程圖,就工件輸送系統1000的一個動作例加以說明。而且,此處,就工件10載置於工件處理裝置1的邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤52上時,邊緣位置檢測器102針對工件10取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,並將所取得的旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部的情況101作為一例子加以說明。Next, an operation example of the workpiece conveying system 1000 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 7. Moreover, here, when the workpiece 10 is placed on the turntable 52 of the edge position detector 102 of the workpiece processing apparatus 1, the edge position detector 102 acquires a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece 10, and converts the acquired rotation The case 101 in which the distance information is stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit will be described as an example.

(步驟S201)工件輸送裝置2取出第一地點的工件10,例如收容於容器4的一個工件10,並輸送至工件處理裝置1。具體而言,是將工件載置於邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤52上。(Step S201) The workpiece conveying device 2 takes out the workpiece 10 at the first point, for example, one workpiece 10 accommodated in the container 4 and conveys it to the workpiece processing device 1. Specifically, the workpiece is placed on the turntable 52 of the edge position detector 102.

(步驟S202)邊緣位置檢測器102針對已載置於轉盤52的工件取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,並將所取得的第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。(Step S202) The edge position detector 102 acquires a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece placed on the turntable 52, and stores the obtained first rotation distance information in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

(步驟S203)工件處理裝置1進行有關工件10取得修正資訊、表示缺口部的資訊、關於缺陷部分的資訊並輸出的處理、或異常輸出的處理。另外,該處理相當於例如圖6的流程圖中從步驟S100到步驟S119所示的工件處理裝置1的處理。(Step S203) The workpiece processing apparatus 1 performs processing to obtain correction information about the workpiece 10, information indicating the notch portion, and information about the defective portion and output, or processing to output abnormally. In addition, this processing corresponds to the processing of the workpiece processing apparatus 1 shown from step S100 to step S119 in the flowchart of FIG. 6, for example.

(步驟S204)工件輸送裝置2判斷是否已從工件處理裝置1的輸出部104接收異常輸出。已接收時,進到步驟S207;尚未接收時,進到步驟S205。(Step S204) The workpiece conveying device 2 determines whether an abnormal output has been received from the output unit 104 of the workpiece processing device 1. When it has been received, it proceeds to step S207; when it has not been received, it proceeds to step S205.

(步驟S205)工件輸送裝置2使用輸出部104輸出的修正資訊及表示缺口部之資訊,將載置於邊緣位置檢測器102之轉盤52上的工件進行修正並拾起,使位置及方向符合預定的位置及方向。該項修正也可在工件輸送裝置2拾起工件10時,變更工件支持位置或方向。也可藉由變更邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤位置或方向來進行。(Step S205) The workpiece conveying device 2 corrects and picks up the workpiece placed on the turntable 52 of the edge position detector 102 using the correction information output by the output unit 104 and the information indicating the notch, so that the position and direction conform to the predetermined Location and direction. This correction can also change the workpiece support position or direction when the workpiece conveying device 2 picks up the workpiece 10. It can also be performed by changing the position or direction of the turntable of the edge position detector 102.

(步驟S206)工件輸送裝置2將工件10輸送並載置於第二地點(例如,載置台6)。然後,將輸送處理結束。(Step S206) The workpiece conveying device 2 conveys and places the workpiece 10 at a second location (for example, the placing table 6). Then, the transportation process is ended.

(步驟S207)工件輸送裝置2將工件10從邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤拾取,並輸送至回收用第三地點,此處為回收用容器5,且將工件收容於容器5内。然後,將輸送處理結束。(Step S207) The workpiece conveying device 2 picks up the workpiece 10 from the turntable of the edge position detector 102, and conveys it to the third point for collection, in this case the collection container 5, and stores the workpiece in the container 5. Then, the transportation process is ended.

以下,就本實施形態的工件輸送系統1000的一個具體動作例加以說明。此處,是針對邊緣位置檢測器102具有按照輸出部104輸出的修正資訊或表示缺口部之資訊使轉盤52的位置或方向變更的裝置等的情況來說明。此外,此處就工件10為晶圓10的情況為例來說明。Hereinafter, a specific operation example of the work conveyance system 1000 of this embodiment will be described. Here, the case where the edge position detector 102 has a device that changes the position or direction of the turntable 52 according to the correction information output by the output unit 104 or information indicating the notch portion, etc. will be described. In addition, here, the case where the workpiece 10 is the wafer 10 will be described as an example.

工件輸送裝置2會將儲存於容器4的一片晶圓10取出,輸送至工件處理裝置1,並載置於如圖3所示的邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤52上。The workpiece conveying device 2 will take out one wafer 10 stored in the container 4, convey it to the workpiece processing device 1, and place it on the turntable 52 of the edge position detector 102 shown in FIG. 3.

晶圓10載置於轉盤52上時,邊緣位置檢測器102即一邊使晶圓10旋轉,一邊取得旋轉角度與第一距離資訊,儲存部57則將具有旋轉角度與第一距離資訊的組對的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。When the wafer 10 is placed on the turntable 52, the edge position detector 102 obtains the rotation angle and the first distance information while rotating the wafer 10, and the storage unit 57 pairs the rotation angle and the first distance information. A plurality of first rotation distance information are stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

圖8為對儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101的第一旋轉距離資訊執行管理的第一旋轉距離資訊管理表的圖示。該第一旋轉距離資訊以如上述方式使用如圖3所示的邊緣位置檢測器102所取得者。此處,為方便說明,就儲存有使晶圓10作旋轉時依序按毎0.036度取得的第一旋轉距離資訊(亦即,針對一片晶圓儲存有10000個紀錄的第一旋轉距離資訊)的情況為例來說明。FIG. 8 is a diagram of a first rotation distance information management table that manages the first rotation distance information stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101. The first rotation distance information is obtained by using the edge position detector 102 shown in FIG. 3 in the manner described above. Here, for convenience of description, the first rotation distance information obtained by sequentially rotating each wafer 10 at 0.036 degrees is stored (that is, 10,000 records of first rotation distance information are stored for one wafer) The case is explained as an example.

第一旋轉距離資訊管理表具有所謂「晶圓ID」、「旋轉角度」、及「第一距離資訊」等屬性。「晶圓ID」為晶圓的識別資訊。「旋轉角度」為晶圓的旋轉角度。「第一距離資訊」為從晶圓之旋轉中心至晶圓邊緣的距離。另外,「第一距離資訊」的rm (m為從1至10000的整數)係對應的旋轉角度為0.036×m(度)的第一距離資訊。rm 的值設為任意值。在第一旋轉距離資訊管理表中,各列(紀錄)分別表示第一旋轉距離資訊。The first rotation distance information management table has attributes such as so-called "wafer ID", "rotation angle", and "first distance information". "Wafer ID" is the identification information of the wafer. "Rotation angle" is the rotation angle of the wafer. "First distance information" is the distance from the center of rotation of the wafer to the edge of the wafer. In addition, r m (m is an integer from 1 to 10000) of the “first distance information” is the first distance information corresponding to a rotation angle of 0.036×m (degrees). The value of r m is set to an arbitrary value. In the first rotation distance information management table, each column (record) represents the first rotation distance information.

圖9為用以說明第一旋轉距離資訊的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊的關係的曲線圖。該曲線圖是有關「晶圓ID」為「W001」的晶圓(以下,稱為晶圓W001)的第一旋轉距離資訊的曲線圖,其中表示了旋轉角度與第一距離資訊的關係。在晶圓的旋轉中心自晶圓的中心偏移時,如圖9所示,曲線圖整體描繪了例如以360度為一周期的曲線狀波形。圖中,凹部20為與晶圓10的定向扁平部對應的部分。此外,凹部21及22為與晶圓10的崩缺對應的部分。同時,凸部23是與晶圓10的毛邊對應的部分。9 is a graph illustrating the relationship between the rotation angle of the first rotation distance information and the first distance information. The graph is a graph related to the first rotation distance information of the wafer whose "wafer ID" is "W001" (hereinafter, referred to as wafer W001), which shows the relationship between the rotation angle and the first distance information. When the rotation center of the wafer is shifted from the center of the wafer, as shown in FIG. 9, the graph as a whole depicts, for example, a curved waveform with a period of 360 degrees. In the figure, the concave portion 20 is a portion corresponding to the oriented flat portion of the wafer 10. In addition, the concave portions 21 and 22 are portions corresponding to the chipping of the wafer 10. At the same time, the convex portion 23 is a portion corresponding to the burr of the wafer 10.

首先,使用者等已進行例如指定以晶圓W001為修正資訊等的取得對象的操作。First, the user or the like has performed, for example, an operation to specify the acquisition target of the wafer W001 as correction information.

圖10為用以說明合成裝置1031針對第一旋轉距離資訊進行的處理中表示第一旋轉距離資訊的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊的關係的曲線圖,圖10(a)為旋轉角度在0度以上未達90度範圍的曲線圖、圖10(b)為旋轉角度在90度以上未達180度範圍的曲線圖、圖10(c)為旋轉角度在180度以上未達270度範圍的曲線圖,圖10(d)為旋轉角度在270度以上未達360度範圍的曲線圖、圖10(e)是將自圖10(a)至圖10(d)的曲線圖按照旋轉角度的排列順序進行合成的曲線圖。圖10(f)是表示從圖10(e)的曲線圖刪除值的變化較大部分的狀態的曲線圖。FIG. 10 is a graph illustrating the relationship between the rotation angle of the first rotation distance information and the first distance information in the processing performed by the synthesis device 1031 on the first rotation distance information, and FIG. 10(a) shows the rotation angle at 0 degrees The graph above the range of less than 90 degrees, Figure 10(b) is the graph of the rotation angle of more than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees, and the graph of Figure 10(c) is the curve of the rotation angle of more than 180 degrees and less than 270 degrees Figure 10(d) is a graph with a rotation angle of more than 270 degrees and less than 360 degrees. Figure 10(e) is an arrangement of the graphs from Figure 10(a) to Figure 10(d) according to the rotation angle. Graphs synthesized sequentially. FIG. 10(f) is a graph showing a state in which a portion with a large change in value is deleted from the graph of FIG. 10(e).

合成裝置1031從圖8所示的第一旋轉距離資訊管理表取得「晶圓ID」為「W001」的紀錄,並將所取得的紀錄按毎90度「旋轉角度」分割為4個。具體而言,分割為:「旋轉角度」在0度以上未達90度的紀錄的組、「旋轉角度」在90度以上未達180度的紀錄的組、「旋轉角度」在180度以上未達270度的紀錄的組、「旋轉角度」在270度以上未達360度的紀錄的組。表示各組的紀錄的曲線圖即為圖10(a)至圖10(d)所示的曲線圖。The synthesizing device 1031 obtains the record with the "wafer ID" as "W001" from the first rotation distance information management table shown in FIG. 8, and divides the obtained record into four by 90 degrees "rotation angle". Specifically, it is divided into: a group of records where the "rotation angle" is less than 90 degrees and less than 90 degrees, a group of records where the "rotation angle" is less than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees, and the "rotation angle" is not more than 180 degrees The group with a record of 270 degrees and the group with a record of "rotation angle" of more than 270 degrees and less than 360 degrees. The graphs showing the records of each group are the graphs shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(d).

然後,合成裝置1031將分割所得的各組的排列順序相同的第一旋轉距離資訊所具有的第一距離資訊彼此間進行合成。此處的合成是指平均值的計算。例如,合成裝置1031取得各個組的紀錄從旋轉角度值較小者依序排列時的第一個紀錄(亦即「旋轉角度」為「0」、「90」、「180」、及「270」的紀錄的「第一距離資訊」值「r1 」、「r2501 」、「r5001 」、及「r7501 」的平均值R1 )作為第一個合成距離資訊,並與這些旋轉角度形成對應,儲存於未圖示的儲存部。此外,R1 等於(r1 +r2501 +r5001 +r7501 )/4。Then, the synthesizing device 1031 synthesizes the first distance information possessed by the first rotation distance information having the same arrangement order of the divided groups. The synthesis here refers to the calculation of the average value. For example, the synthesis device 1031 obtains the first record when the records of each group are arranged in order from the one with the smaller rotation angle value (that is, the "rotation angle" is "0", "90", "180", and "270" The "first distance information" values "r 1 ", "r 2501 ", "r 5001 ", and "r 7501 "average R 1 ) of the record are used as the first combined distance information and formed with these rotation angles Correspondingly, it is stored in a storage unit (not shown). In addition, R 1 is equal to (r 1 + r 2501 + r 5001 + r 7501 )/4.

其次,同樣地,取得各個組的第二個紀錄,亦即「旋轉角度」為「0.036」、「90.036」、「180.036」、及「270.036」的紀錄的「第一距離資訊」值「r2 」、「r2502 」、「r5002 」、及「r7502 」的平均值R2 ,作為第二個合成距離資訊,並與這些旋轉角度形成對應,儲存於未圖示的儲存部。針對第三個的後紀錄,也進行同樣的處理。Secondly, in the same way, obtain the second record of each group, that is, the "first distance information" value "r 2 of the records whose "rotation angle" is "0.036", "90.036", "180.036", and "270.036" ”, “r 2502 ”, “r 5002 ”, and the average value R 2 of “r 7502 ”are used as the second synthesized distance information, and correspond to these rotation angles, and are stored in a storage section (not shown). The same is done for the third post-record.

圖11為管理合成裝置1031所取得的合成距離資訊的合成距離資訊管理表。合成距離資訊管理表具有所謂「旋轉角度」、「合成距離」的屬性。「旋轉角度」是指分別與所合成的4個第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度。「合成距離」是指合成距離資訊。此外,Rm 設為等於(rm +rm 2500 +rm 5000 +rm 7500 )/4。FIG. 11 is a synthesis distance information management table that manages the synthesis distance information acquired by the synthesis device 1031. The synthetic distance information management table has attributes of so-called "rotation angle" and "synthetic distance". "Rotation angle" refers to the rotation angle corresponding to the synthesized four first distance information respectively. "Synthetic distance" refers to synthetic distance information. In addition, R m is set equal to (r m + r m + 2500 + r m + 5000 + r m + 7500 )/4.

圖10(e)是以曲線圖表示合成裝置1031所取得的合成距離資訊。另外,此處,各「旋轉角度」中值最小的角度係表示在橫軸。如圖10(e)所示,透過將旋轉角度逐次相異90度的第一距離資訊進行合成,因為如圖9所示的旋轉中心從晶圓中心偏移所生的波形即得以消除,使曲線圖整體成為直線狀。但,與存在於合成前連續複數個第一距離資訊的崩缺或毛邊等缺陷部分、定向扁平部等缺口部對應的凹部20、21及22或凸部23,雖因合成而使其值產生變化,但因未被消除,所以還保留下來。FIG. 10(e) is a graph showing the synthesis distance information acquired by the synthesis device 1031. FIG. In addition, here, the angle system with the smallest median value of each "rotation angle" is shown on the horizontal axis. As shown in FIG. 10(e), by synthesizing the first distance information in which the rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees, the waveform generated by the rotation center as shown in FIG. 9 shifted from the wafer center is eliminated, so that The graph as a whole becomes linear. However, the concave portions 20, 21, and 22 or the convex portions 23 corresponding to the defect portions such as chipping or burrs that exist in the first plurality of continuous distance information before synthesis, or notches such as oriented flat portions, although their values are generated due to synthesis Change, but it has not been eliminated, so it is still there.

接著,合成處理裝置1032會在圖11所示的合成裝置1031進行合成所得的複數個合成距離資訊中反覆對最小值的合成距離資訊進行檢測並刪除的處理,直到達預先指定次數為止。該刪除也可為將表示已刪除的旗標資訊賦予到合成距離資訊。藉此方式,例如,圖10(e)中,與值的大小變化相對於其他部分較大的定向扁平部對應的凹部20的複數個合成距離資訊就被依序刪除。而且,繼定向扁平部之後,與值的大小變化相對於其他部分的較大的崩缺對應的凹部21、22的合成距離資訊就被依序刪除。Next, the synthesizing processing device 1032 repeatedly detects and deletes the minimum synthetic distance information among the plurality of synthetic distance information synthesized by the synthesizing device 1031 shown in FIG. 11 until a predetermined number of times is reached. The deletion may also be to add the flag information indicating that it has been deleted to the synthesized distance information. In this way, for example, in FIG. 10(e), the plurality of synthesized distance information of the concave portion 20 corresponding to the directional flat portion where the change in the magnitude of the value is larger than the other portions is sequentially deleted. Furthermore, after orienting the flat portion, the combined distance information of the concave portions 21 and 22 corresponding to the larger chipping of the value with respect to the other portion is sequentially deleted.

其次,合成處理裝置1032會在僅刪除預先指定次數的最小值所剩餘的複數個合成距離資訊中,與上述同樣的反覆進行檢測並刪除最大值的合成距離資訊的處理,直到達預先指定次數為止。藉此方式,例如,圖10(e)中,與值的大小變化比其他部分大的毛邊對應的凸部23的合成距離資訊就被依序刪除。此外,上述的各個刪除的次數較佳為透過反覆進行實驗等來決定。此外,例如定向扁平部等缺口部存在側的檢測及刪除次數(此處為最小值的檢測及刪除次數)較佳為設成多於定向扁平部等缺口部不存在側的檢測及刪除次數(此處為最大值的檢測及刪除次數)。Next, the synthesis processing device 1032 will repeatedly detect and delete the synthesized distance information of the maximum value in the plural pieces of synthesized distance information remaining only by deleting the minimum value of the pre-specified number of times until it reaches the pre-specified number of times . In this way, for example, in FIG. 10(e), the synthetic distance information of the convex portions 23 corresponding to the burrs whose value changes more than other parts is sequentially deleted. In addition, the number of times of each deletion described above is preferably determined through repeated experiments and the like. In addition, for example, the number of detections and deletions on the side where the notch is present such as an oriented flat part (the minimum number of detections and deletions here) is preferably set to be greater than the number of detections and deletions on the side where the notch is not present such as the oriented flat part ( (This is the maximum number of detections and deletions).

藉此方式,即可從圖11所示的合成距離資訊檢測並刪除值的大小變化較大的部分。未經檢測的其餘合成距離資訊(亦即,未被刪除的剩餘合成距離資訊)就形成圖10(f)的樣態。該未經檢測的其餘合成距離資訊中的二個以上相連續的合成距離資訊為變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊。In this way, it is possible to detect and delete the part whose value changes greatly from the synthesized distance information shown in FIG. 11. The remaining synthetic distance information that has not been detected (that is, the remaining synthetic distance information that has not been deleted) forms the state of FIG. 10(f). The two or more consecutive synthetic distance information in the remaining undetected synthetic distance information are plural synthetic distance information with little change.

其次,合成處理裝置1032會從未經檢測的(此處為未經刪除)的其餘相連續的合成距離資訊對一個合成距離資訊進行檢測。此處,是按相連續的毎複數個合成距離資訊檢測相連續的合成距離資訊數,並檢測相連續的數最多的部分中其排列順序位在中央的一個合成距離資訊。此處,例如,旋轉角度θ從θ600 到θ1200 範圍的合成距離資訊,具體而言,圖10(f)的區域25的合成距離資訊係相連續,同時其連續數較其他相連續的部分為多時,合成處理裝置1032會檢測位於該範圍的中央的合成距離資訊,具體而言,是檢測對應的旋轉角度為θ900 的合成距離資訊。另外,θm (m為1至10000的整數)表示例如使晶圓W001逐次以0.036度旋轉移動600次的旋轉角度,亦即,旋轉角度0.036×m(度)。θ600 即為例如使晶圓W001旋轉0.036×600(度)時的旋轉角度。Secondly, the synthesis processing device 1032 detects the synthesized distance information from the undetected (here, undeleted) continuous synthesized distance information of the remaining phases. Here, it is to detect the number of continuous synthetic distance information of each phase according to a plurality of continuous synthetic distance information, and to detect the synthetic distance information whose order is located in the center of the part with the largest number of consecutive phases. Here, for example, the synthesized distance information in the range of rotation angle θ from θ 600 to θ 1200 , specifically, the synthesized distance information of region 25 in FIG. 10(f) is continuous, and its continuous number is more than that of other phases When it is long, the synthesis processing device 1032 detects the synthesis distance information located in the center of the range, specifically, the synthesis distance information corresponding to the rotation angle θ 900 . In addition, θ m (m is an integer of 1 to 10000) represents, for example, a rotation angle that moves the wafer W001 one by one at 0.036 degrees for 600 rotations, that is, a rotation angle of 0.036×m (degrees). θ 600 is the rotation angle when the wafer W001 is rotated by 0.036×600 (degrees), for example.

再者,合成處理裝置1032會從圖11所示的合成距離資訊管理表取得與經檢測的合成距離資訊的合成前的4個第一距離資訊對應的4個旋轉角度。例如,圖11所示的合成距離資訊管理表中,檢測包含與上述經檢測的合成距離資訊對應的旋轉角度θ度的紀錄,作為「旋轉角度」的值,並取得包含於該紀錄的全部「旋轉角度」的值。或者,將90度、180度、270度依序加算到旋轉角度θ900 ,並取得4個合成前旋轉角度。此處,是設為已取得θ900 、θ900 +90度、θ900 +180度、θ900 +270度作為旋轉角度。接著,合成處理裝置1032會從圖8所示的第一旋轉距離資訊管理表取得分別與所取得的4個旋轉角度對應的4個第一距離資訊r900 、r3400 、r5900 、及r8400Furthermore, the synthesis processing device 1032 obtains four rotation angles corresponding to the four first distance information before synthesis of the detected synthesis distance information from the synthesis distance information management table shown in FIG. 11. For example, in the synthetic distance information management table shown in FIG. 11, a record including the rotation angle θ degrees corresponding to the detected synthetic distance information is detected as the value of “rotation angle”, and all the records included in the record are obtained. Rotation angle" value. Alternatively, 90 degrees, 180 degrees, and 270 degrees are sequentially added to the rotation angle θ 900 to obtain four pre-combination rotation angles. Here, it is assumed that θ 900 , θ 900 +90 degrees, θ 900 +180 degrees, and θ 900 +270 degrees have been acquired as the rotation angle. Next, the synthesis processing device 1032 obtains four pieces of first distance information r 900 , r 3400 , r 5900 , and r 8400 corresponding to the obtained four rotation angles from the first rotation distance information management table shown in FIG. 8. .

由於依此方式取得的4個第一距離資訊是針對晶圓的不存在缺口部、毛邊、崩缺等的邊緣所取得的第一距離資訊,所以是從影響較少的缺口部或缺陷部分的晶圓旋轉中心到邊緣的距離。Since the four first distance information obtained in this way is the first distance information obtained for the edge of the wafer where there is no notch, burr, chipping, etc., it is from the less affected notch or defect The distance from the center of wafer rotation to the edge.

修正資訊取得裝置1033會從例如未圖示的儲存部等讀取上述式(1)及式(2),並將合成處理裝置1032所取得的4個第一距離資訊及與該第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度之一(此處為上述取得的最小值的旋轉角度θ900 )代入式(1)及式(2),以計算用於使晶圓W001之旋轉中心移動到晶圓W001的中心的修正資訊(亦即,表示移動方向的資訊的角度、及移動量的長度)。此處,是設為已取得角度α1 及長度h1 作為修正資訊。修正資訊取得裝置1033則將所取得的修正資訊暫時記憶在例如未圖示的儲存部等。The correction information acquisition device 1033 reads the above equations (1) and (2) from, for example, a storage unit (not shown), and combines the four first distance information and the first distance information acquired by the synthesis processing device 1032 One of the corresponding rotation angles (here is the minimum rotation angle θ 900 obtained above) is substituted into equations (1) and (2) to calculate the rotation center used to move the wafer W001 to the center of the wafer W001 Correction information (that is, the angle of the information indicating the moving direction and the length of the moving amount). Here, it is assumed that the angle α 1 and the length h 1 have been obtained as correction information. The correction information obtaining device 1033 temporarily stores the obtained correction information in, for example, a storage unit (not shown).

已接收修正資訊的第二距離資訊取得裝置1034會從未圖示的儲存部讀取上述式(3),將作為修正資訊的角度α1 及長度h1 代入該式(3),而取得理想曲線式。The second distance information acquisition device 1034 that has received the correction information reads the above equation (3) from a storage section not shown, and substitutes the angle α 1 and the length h 1 as the correction information into the equation (3) to obtain the ideal Curved.

第二距離資訊取得裝置1034則將與複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度依序代入所取得的理想曲線式,依序取得第二距離資訊。具體而言,將從0度開始逐次以0.036度依序増加其值直到即將到達360度之前時的各個旋轉角度代入理想曲線式,以依序計算第二距離資訊。然後,將具有所代入的旋轉角度與所取得的第二距離資訊的第二旋轉距離資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部。The second distance information obtaining device 1034 sequentially substitutes the plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information into the obtained ideal curve formula, and sequentially obtains the second distance information. Specifically, the rotation angles of 0.036 degrees are sequentially added from 0 degrees to each rotation angle until it reaches 360 degrees, and then substituted into the ideal curve formula to calculate the second distance information in sequence. Then, the second rotation distance information having the substituted rotation angle and the obtained second distance information is stored in a storage unit (not shown).

圖12是為用以管理第二距離資訊取得裝置1034所取得並儲存的第二旋轉距離資訊的第二旋轉距離資訊管理表的圖示。第二旋轉距離資訊管理表具有「旋轉角度」及「第二距離資訊」。「第二距離資訊」是指例如晶圓W001為邊緣無凹凸的理想型圓形晶圓時,與旋轉角度相應從晶圓W001的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離。此外,「第二距離資訊」 rim (m為從1至10000的整)設為對應的旋轉角度0.036×m(度)的第二距離資訊。FIG. 12 is a diagram of a second rotation distance information management table for managing the second rotation distance information acquired and stored by the second distance information acquisition device 1034. The second rotation distance information management table has "rotation angle" and "second distance information". "Second distance information" refers to the distance from the center of rotation of the wafer W001 to the edge according to the rotation angle, for example, when the wafer W001 is an ideal round wafer with no irregularities on the edges. In addition, "second distance information" r im (m is an integer from 1 to 10000) is set as the second distance information of the corresponding rotation angle of 0.036×m (degrees).

圖13是為表示第二距離資訊取得裝置1034所取得的複數個第二旋轉距離資訊的旋轉角度與第二距離資訊的關係的曲線圖。橫軸表示旋轉角度θ,縱軸表示第二距離資訊ri13 is a graph showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the plurality of second rotation distance information acquired by the second distance information acquisition device 1034 and the second distance information. The horizontal axis represents the rotation angle θ, and the vertical axis represents the second distance information r i .

計算裝置1035會依序取得儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊的複數個第一距離資訊、及第二距離資訊取得裝置1034所取得的複數個第二距離資訊中與相同旋轉角度形成對應的第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差。此處,計算裝置1035是取得自第二距離資訊減去第一距離資訊所得的值作為上述差值的一例。例如,從與旋轉角度「0度」對應的第二距離資訊「ri1 」減去與旋轉角度「0」對應的第一距離資訊「r1 」,而取得與旋轉角度「0度」對應的距離差資訊「ri1 -r1 」。此外,例如,從與旋轉角度「0.036度」對應的第二距離資訊「ri2 」減去與旋轉角度「0.036」對應的第一距離資訊「r2 」,並取得與旋轉角度「0.036度」對應的距離差資訊「ri2 -r2 」。針對其他的旋轉角度也進行同樣的處理。計算裝置1035會將所取得的值作為距離差資訊,並與旋轉角度形成對應儲存於未圖示的儲存部。The computing device 1035 will sequentially obtain the plurality of first distance information stored in the first rotation distance information and the plurality of second distance information obtained by the second distance information obtaining device 1034 form a first distance corresponding to the same rotation angle The difference between the information and the second distance information. Here, the computing device 1035 is a value obtained by subtracting the first distance information from the second distance information as an example of the above-mentioned difference. For example, the first distance information "r 1 "corresponding to the rotation angle "0" is subtracted from the second distance information "r i1 " corresponding to the rotation angle "0 degree", and the corresponding to the rotation angle "0 degree" is obtained Distance difference information "r i1- r 1 ". In addition, for example, the first distance information "r 2 "corresponding to the rotation angle "0.036" is subtracted from the second distance information "r i2 " corresponding to the rotation angle "0.036 degrees", and the rotation angle "0.036 degrees" is obtained Corresponding distance difference information "r i2- r 2 ". The same processing is performed for other rotation angles. The computing device 1035 uses the obtained value as distance difference information, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) corresponding to the rotation angle.

圖14是為用以管理計算裝置1035所取得的距離差資訊的距離差資訊管理表。距離差資訊管理表具有所謂「旋轉角度」與「距離差」的屬性。「距離差」是指距離差資訊。FIG. 14 is a distance difference information management table for managing the distance difference information acquired by the computing device 1035. The distance difference information management table has attributes of so-called "rotation angle" and "distance difference". "Distance difference" refers to distance difference information.

圖15包含:表示計算裝置1035所取得的距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖(圖15(a))、用以說明缺口檢測裝置1036所執行的處理的曲線圖(圖15(b))、及用以說明缺陷檢測裝置1037所執行的處理的曲線圖(圖15(c))。圖中,橫軸表示旋轉角度,縱軸表示距離差資訊的值。另外,此處用以說明例如圖15的曲線圖的縱軸標度,是係使用較圖9或圖13等的縱軸標度經放大的標度。15 includes: a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information obtained by the computing device 1035 and the rotation angle (FIG. 15(a)), and a graph illustrating the processing performed by the notch detection device 1036 (FIG. 15(b)) ), and a graph for explaining the processing performed by the defect detection device 1037 (FIG. 15(c)). In the figure, the horizontal axis represents the rotation angle, and the vertical axis represents the value of the distance difference information. In addition, the vertical axis scale used here to explain, for example, the graph of FIG. 15 is an enlarged scale from the vertical axis scale of FIG. 9 or FIG. 13 and the like.

將計算裝置1035所取得的距離差資訊以曲線圖表示時,即成為如圖15(a)的曲線圖。該曲線圖為從具有例如圖9所示的定向扁平部或毛邊或崩缺等的實測值等的第一距離資訊的曲線圖縱軸方向值減去使圖13所示的邊緣無凹凸的晶圓旋轉時的理想型曲線圖的縱軸方向值的曲線圖。因此,針對在晶圓W001的邊緣無凹凸的部分所取得的距離差資訊,其值會成為大致近於0的一定值,只有在凹凸的部分會呈與其他部分不同大小的正或負值顯現於曲線圖。例如,圖15所示的曲線圖中,與定向扁平部對應的凸部20a、與崩缺對應的凸部21a、22a、與毛邊對應的凹部23a會以值的大小有變化的部分顯現出來,其他部分,則呈大致平行於x軸的近乎直線形狀。When the distance difference information acquired by the computing device 1035 is represented by a graph, it becomes a graph as shown in FIG. 15(a). This graph is obtained by subtracting the direction value of the vertical axis of the graph having the first distance information such as the measured value of the oriented flat portion, burrs, or chipping shown in FIG. The graph of the vertical axis direction value of the ideal graph when the circle rotates. Therefore, the value of the distance difference information obtained for the portion with no unevenness on the edge of the wafer W001 will become a certain value that is approximately close to 0, and only the unevenness portion will appear as a positive or negative value different from other parts.于Graphs. For example, in the graph shown in FIG. 15, the convex portion 20a corresponding to the oriented flat portion, the convex portions 21a and 22a corresponding to the chipping, and the concave portion 23a corresponding to the burr appear as a part whose value changes. The other parts are almost linear in shape, roughly parallel to the x-axis.

缺口檢測裝置1036會在計算裝置1035所取得的距離差資訊中對值的大小較預先指定的第一臨界值TH1 為大的距離差資訊進行檢測。第一臨界值TH1 是為較一般發生於晶圓邊緣的崩缺深度為大的長度,且預先設定成正值,該正值是表示其長度充分短於定向扁平部的深度。該第一臨界值TH1 為例如有關大小的臨界值。此處,為了檢測值的大小較第一臨界值TH1 為大的正或負的距離差資訊,而檢測較TH1 為大的距離差資訊,或者,檢測其值較-TH1 為小的距離差資訊。The gap detection device 1036 detects the distance difference information whose value is larger than the pre-specified first threshold value T H1 in the distance difference information obtained by the computing device 1035. The first threshold value T H1 is a length greater than the chipping depth generally occurring at the edge of the wafer, and is preset to a positive value, which indicates that its length is sufficiently shorter than the depth of the oriented flat portion. The first threshold value T H1 is, for example, a threshold value related to size. Here, in order to detect positive or negative distance difference information larger than the first critical value T H1 , and detect distance difference information larger than T H1 , or detect that the value is smaller than -T H1 Distance difference information.

將第一臨界值TH1 表示於表示距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖時,即形成如圖15(b)的樣態。When the first critical value T H1 is expressed in a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information and the rotation angle, the state as shown in FIG. 15(b) is formed.

另外,在已知距離差資訊為從第二距離資訊減去第一距離資訊之值的情況中,由於與定向扁平部對應的距離差資訊值為正值,故檢測其值較-TH1 為小的距離差資訊的處理可以省略。Further, in the known case where the distance information from the difference information by subtracting a first value from the second distance information, the distance information is the difference between the value corresponding to the orientation flat portion, so that the detection value is compared -T H1 The processing of small distance difference information can be omitted.

缺口檢測裝置1036檢測其大小較第一臨界值TH1 為大的距離差資訊,並取得與所檢測的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度。例如,缺口檢測裝置1036會檢測與圖15(b)的定向扁平部對應的凸部20a較TH1 為大的值的距離差資訊。然後,缺口檢測裝置1036會取得與已檢測的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度的最小值及最大值,作為晶圓W001的缺口部的定向扁平部的位置表示資訊。例如,設缺口檢測手裝置036所取得的最小值為θ3800 ,最大值為θ4400 。缺口檢測裝置1036會將所取得的最小值θ3800 與最大值θ4400 儲存於未圖示的儲存部。The notch detection device 1036 detects distance difference information whose size is greater than the first threshold value T H1 , and obtains a rotation angle corresponding to the detected distance difference information. For example, 15 (b) the orientation flat portion of the notch detecting means 1036 detects the corresponding convex portion 20a of FIG than T H1 is a large difference in distance information value. Then, the notch detection device 1036 obtains the minimum value and the maximum value of the rotation angle corresponding to the detected distance difference information, as position indication information of the orientation flat portion of the notch portion of the wafer W001. For example, suppose that the minimum value obtained by the notch detecting hand device 036 is θ 3800 and the maximum value is θ 4400 . The notch detection device 1036 stores the obtained minimum value θ 3800 and maximum value θ 4400 in a storage unit (not shown).

缺陷檢測裝置1037在計算裝置1035所取得的距離差資訊中,對其大小較預先指定的第二臨界值TH2 為大的距離差資訊進行檢測。但在此處,大小較上述的第一臨界值TH1 為大的距離差資訊是為不予檢測。第二臨界值TH2 是大小較第一臨界值TH1 為小的值,並設定為大於0的值。此外,距離差資訊由於會因第一距離資訊的測定誤差等而取得0以外的值,故將第二臨界值TH2 設定為經考量測定該誤差分後的值。該第二臨界值TH2 是為例如用以檢測邊緣缺陷部分有關大小的臨界值。此處,為了檢測其大小較第二臨界值TH2 為大的正或負的距離差資訊,而將較TH2 為大的距離差資訊、或者其值較-TH2 為小的距離差資訊加以檢測。The defect detection device 1037 detects the distance difference information whose size is larger than the second threshold T H2 specified in advance from the distance difference information acquired by the computing device 1035. However, here, the distance difference information whose size is larger than the above-mentioned first threshold value T H1 is not detected. The second threshold T H2 is a value smaller than the first threshold T H1 and is set to a value greater than zero. In addition, since the distance difference information acquires a value other than 0 due to the measurement error of the first distance information, etc., the second threshold value T H2 is set to a value obtained by measuring the error score. The second threshold T H2 is, for example, a threshold for detecting the size of the edge defect portion. Here, in order to detect the size than the second threshold value T H2 to a large positive or negative distance difference information than T H2 and the large difference in distance information, or a value smaller than -T H2 distance difference information To be tested.

若將第二臨界值TH2 表示於表示距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖時,即如圖15(c)所示。If the second critical value T H2 is represented in a graph showing the relationship between distance difference information and rotation angle, it is as shown in FIG. 15(c).

而且,此處,也可與上述同樣地,將較-TH2 小值的距離差資訊的檢測處理予以省略。Further, here, may, detection processing will be omitted compared with the difference information from a small value H2 -T same manner as above.

缺陷檢測裝置1037會檢測值較第二臨界值TH2 大的距離差資訊,並取得與檢測所得的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度。例如,缺陷檢測裝置1037會檢測其值較(與圖15(c)的缺陷部分對應的)凸部21a、22a的TH2 為大的部分、及其值較(與缺陷部分對應的)凹部23a的-TH2 為小的部分。然後,缺陷檢測裝置1037會在所檢測的距離差資訊中,對對應的旋轉角度相連續的距離差資訊進行檢測,並取得與相連續的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度的最小值及最大值,分別作為表示晶圓W001的缺陷部分位置的資訊。例如,有關凸部21a,為取得了旋轉角度的最小值θ550 與最大值θ558 。此外,例如,有關凸部22a,為取得了旋轉角度的最小值θ7446 與最大值θ7450 。又,例如,有關凹部23a,為取得了旋轉角度的最小值θ8738 與最大值θ8743The defect detection device 1037 detects the distance difference information whose value is greater than the second threshold value TH2 , and obtains the rotation angle corresponding to the distance difference information obtained by the detection. For example, detects (parts corresponding to those in FIG. 15 (c) defect) projecting portions 21a, 22a of the T H2 large portion of its value is compared with the fault detection apparatus 1037, and its value is compared (defect portions corresponding to) the concave portion 23a -T H2 is the small part. Then, the defect detection device 1037 will detect the continuous distance difference information corresponding to the rotation angle among the detected distance difference information, and obtain the minimum and maximum values of the rotation angle corresponding to the continuous distance difference information, Respectively as the information indicating the position of the defective part of wafer W001. For example, regarding the convex portion 21a, the minimum value θ 550 and the maximum value θ 558 of the rotation angle are obtained. In addition, for example, regarding the convex portion 22a, the minimum value θ 7446 and the maximum value θ 7450 of the rotation angle are obtained. In addition, for example, regarding the concave portion 23a, the minimum value θ 8738 and the maximum value θ 8743 of the rotation angle are obtained.

再者,關於作為較TH2 為大的部分所檢測到的距離差資訊,亦即,分別與凸部21a、22a對應的旋轉角度的最小值與最大值,還取得表示崩缺的資訊作為表示缺陷部分種類的資訊。而且,與作為較-TH2 為小的部分所檢測的距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度,亦即,關於與凹部23a對應的最小值與最大值,還取得表示毛邊的資訊作為表示缺陷部分種類的資訊。Furthermore, regarding the distance difference information detected as a portion larger than T H2 , that is, the minimum and maximum values of the rotation angles corresponding to the convex portions 21a and 22a, respectively, the information indicating the collapse is also obtained as an indication Information about the types of defects. Further, as compared with the rotation angle -T H2 distance difference corresponding to a small portion of the information detected, i.e., on the recessed portion 23a corresponding to the minimum and maximum values, but also to obtain information represented by a burr represents a defective portion of the type News.

此外,缺陷檢測裝置1037會取得旋轉角度相連續的距離差資訊的絕對值的最大值,作為表示缺陷部分大小,例如表示毛邊高度、或崩缺深度的資訊。例如,旋轉角度從θ8738 到θ8743 範圍的距離差資訊的絕對值的最大值為ri8741 -r8741 時,缺陷檢測裝置1037即取得該最大值作為表示缺陷部分大小的資訊。In addition, the defect detection device 1037 obtains the maximum value of the absolute value of the distance difference information in which the rotation angle is continuous, as information indicating the size of the defect portion, for example, indicating the height of the burr or the depth of chipping. For example, when the maximum value of the absolute value of the distance difference information in the range of rotation angle from θ 8738 to θ 8743 is r i8741- r 8741 , the defect detection device 1037 obtains the maximum value as the information indicating the size of the defective portion.

接著,缺陷檢測裝置1037會將所取得的關於缺陷部分的資訊,亦即,表示缺陷部分範圍的旋轉角度、表示缺陷部分種類的資訊、及表示缺陷部分大小的資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部。Next, the defect detection device 1037 stores the acquired information about the defective part, that is, the rotation angle indicating the range of the defective part, the information indicating the type of the defective part, and the information indicating the size of the defective part in a storage section (not shown) .

輸出部104會按照缺陷檢測裝置1037所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊進行異常輸出。在此處,由於缺陷檢測裝置1037檢測了一個以上缺陷部分,故輸出部104會進行異常輸出。此外,在輸出表示缺陷檢測裝置1037已檢測缺陷部分關於缺陷部分的資訊的情況中,輸出部104也可進行異常輸出。具體而言,輸出部104將表示檢測到有異常的資訊傳送到工件輸送裝置2作為異常輸出。The output unit 104 performs abnormal output according to the information about the defective part acquired by the defect detection device 1037. Here, since the defect detection device 1037 detects more than one defective part, the output unit 104 performs abnormal output. In addition, in the case of outputting information indicating that the defect detection device 1037 has detected the defective part regarding the defective part, the output unit 104 may also perform abnormal output. Specifically, the output unit 104 transmits information indicating that an abnormality is detected to the workpiece conveying device 2 as an abnormal output.

再者,輸出部104將缺陷檢測裝置1037檢測到的缺陷部分的相關資訊輸出。例如,輸出部104會在缺陷檢測裝置1037所檢測的缺陷部分的相關資訊中,將表示旋轉角度範圍的資訊當作表示有缺陷的部位資訊進行輸出。而且,輸出部104會將表示缺陷部分種類的資訊輸出作為表示該缺陷部分種類的資訊。又,輸出部104會輸出表示缺陷部分大小的資訊。例如,將表示旋轉角度從θ8738 到θ8743 的範圍中存在有高度為ri8741 -r8741 的毛邊的資訊予以輸出。例如,輸出部104會將關於缺陷部分的資訊與晶圓10的識別符形成對應並儲存於預先指定的儲存部等。該所儲存的關於缺陷部分的資訊也可為例如表示工件處理裝置1的處理的紀錄(log)資訊。Furthermore, the output unit 104 outputs information about the defective part detected by the defect detection device 1037. For example, the output unit 104 may output the information indicating the range of the rotation angle as the information indicating the defective part in the relevant information of the defective part detected by the defect detection device 1037. Furthermore, the output unit 104 outputs information indicating the type of the defective part as information indicating the type of the defective part. In addition, the output unit 104 outputs information indicating the size of the defective part. For example, information indicating that there is a burr with a height of r i8741- r 8741 in the range of the rotation angle from θ 8738 to θ 8743 is output. For example, the output unit 104 associates the information about the defective portion with the identifier of the wafer 10 and stores it in a pre-designated storage unit. The stored information about the defective part may be, for example, log information indicating the processing of the workpiece processing device 1.

另外,圖9所示的第一距離資訊與旋轉角度的曲線圖中,與關於缺陷部分的資訊所表示的旋轉角度範圍對應的範圍的背景也可設成與其他部分不同背景色的曲線圖,並顯示於監視器等,但此處省略了說明。而且,此時,有關於崩缺與毛邊,亦以設成不同的背景色為佳。此外,各旋轉角度的範圍也可顯示成表示缺陷部分大小之值等。In addition, in the graph of the first distance information and the rotation angle shown in FIG. 9, the background of the range corresponding to the rotation angle range indicated by the information about the defective part can also be set as a graph with a different background color from other parts. It is displayed on a monitor, etc., but the description is omitted here. Moreover, at this time, it is better to set different background colors for chipping and burrs. In addition, the range of each rotation angle may also be displayed as a value indicating the size of the defective portion.

工件輸送裝置2從工件處理裝置1的輸出部104接收了表示有異常的資訊時,就將載置於邊緣位置檢測器102的轉盤52的晶圓10拾起,使其移動到回收用容器5的地點,將晶圓10收容於容器5内。藉此操作,即可將判斷為有異常的晶圓10以容器5進行回收,而不輸送到其後的處理步驟。When the workpiece conveying device 2 receives the information indicating the abnormality from the output unit 104 of the workpiece processing device 1, it picks up the wafer 10 placed on the turntable 52 of the edge position detector 102 and moves it to the collection container 5 , The wafer 10 is stored in the container 5. By this operation, the wafer 10 determined to be abnormal can be recovered in the container 5 without being transported to the subsequent processing steps.

此處,是例如缺陷檢測裝置1037未檢測一個以上缺陷部分,未取得關於缺陷部分的資訊。Here, for example, the defect detection device 1037 has not detected more than one defective part, and has not obtained information about the defective part.

輸出部104判斷為缺陷檢測裝置1037尚未檢測一個以上缺陷部分時,則不進行異常輸出。When the output unit 104 determines that the defect detection device 1037 has not detected more than one defective part, it does not perform abnormal output.

然後,輸出部104會將修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊輸出到邊緣位置檢測器102。Then, the output unit 104 outputs the correction information acquired by the correction information acquisition device 1033 to the edge position detector 102.

此外,輸出部104將表示缺口檢測裝置1036所檢測的缺口部資訊輸出到邊緣位置檢測器102。例如,輸出部104會將缺口檢測裝置1036所檢測的旋轉角度範圍從θ3800 至θ4400 予以輸出,作為表示設有定向扁平部的位置資訊。In addition, the output unit 104 outputs information indicating the notch detected by the notch detection device 1036 to the edge position detector 102. For example, the output unit 104 outputs the rotation angle range detected by the notch detection device 1036 from θ 3800 to θ 4400 as position information indicating that the directional flat portion is provided.

邊緣位置檢測器102從輸出部104受理修正資訊時,即按照修正資訊使轉盤52朝水平方向移動,令晶圓10移動,使晶圓10之中心位於移動前轉盤52(移動前的晶圓10)之旋轉中心。When the edge position detector 102 receives the correction information from the output unit 104, it moves the turntable 52 horizontally according to the correction information to move the wafer 10 so that the center of the wafer 10 is located on the turntable 52 before movement (wafer 10 before movement) ) Of the center of rotation.

再者,邊緣位置檢測器102受理表示缺口部的資訊時,就使轉盤52朝水平方向移動或旋轉移動,使該缺口部朝向預先指定的方向。In addition, when the edge position detector 102 receives the information indicating the notch, the turntable 52 is moved horizontally or rotationally, and the notch is oriented in a predetermined direction.

工件輸送裝置2會將藉轉盤52的移動而將使配置或朝向改變的晶圓10從轉盤52拾起,輸送並載置於下一個載置目的地的載置台6上。The workpiece conveying device 2 picks up the wafer 10 whose configuration or orientation has been changed by the movement of the turntable 52 from the turntable 52, conveys it, and places it on the stage 6 at the next placement destination.

透過將依此方式藉表示修正資訊及缺口部的資訊而修正其位置及朝向的晶圓10交給工件輸送裝置2,工件輸送裝置2就可使晶圓10在適當位置朝向適當方向載置於作為下一個輸送目的地的載置台6。於是,即可以針對無缺陷部分的晶圓進行晶圓10的定位。By handing the wafer 10 whose position and orientation is corrected by the information representing the correction information and the notch in this way to the workpiece conveying device 2, the workpiece conveying device 2 can place the wafer 10 in the appropriate position in the appropriate direction Mount table 6 as the next transport destination. Thus, the wafer 10 can be positioned with respect to the wafer having no defect.

另外,此處,由邊緣位置檢測器102將晶圓10的位置或朝向改變,但輸出部104也可將表示修正資訊及缺口部的資訊傳送到工件輸送裝置2,而由工件輸送裝置2改變晶圓10的位置或朝向。In addition, here, the position or orientation of the wafer 10 is changed by the edge position detector 102, but the output unit 104 may also transmit the information indicating the correction information and the notch to the workpiece conveying device 2, and the workpiece conveying device 2 may change The position or orientation of the wafer 10.

又,輸出部104將表示缺口部的資訊及缺陷檢測裝置1037檢測到關於缺陷部分的資訊輸出到未圖示的監視器等。In addition, the output unit 104 outputs information indicating the notch and information about the defect detected by the defect detection device 1037 to a monitor or the like not shown.

圖16是為表示藉輸出部104將表示缺口部的資訊及關於缺陷部分的資訊輸出的例子。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example in which the output unit 104 outputs the information indicating the notch and the information about the defective part.

藉由這種輸出部104的輸出,使用者可容易知道例如是否為晶圓W001的邊緣的何處有定向扁平部、或者在何處有那種缺陷。而且,此種表示定向扁平部的位置、或表示缺陷部的位置或種類的資訊輸出到其他裝置(未圖示)時,在其他裝置中,可進行例如將定向扁平部缺陷部的位置考量在內的處理。With the output of such an output section 104, the user can easily know, for example, whether there is an oriented flat portion at the edge of the wafer W001, or where there is such a defect. Moreover, when such information indicating the position of the oriented flat portion or the position or type of the defective portion is output to other devices (not shown), in other devices, for example, the position of the defective portion of the oriented flat portion can be considered in Processing within.

此處,是例如對藉工件輸送系統1000輸送到載置台6的一片晶圓10進行處理的結果,而在晶圓10發生源自邊緣11的崩缺的破裂。這種情況可以為在工件處理裝置1的缺陷檢測處理中有無法檢測到的缺陷部分。因此,例如,使用者會將具有相關資訊的評估相關資訊輸入到評估相關資訊受理部105,而該相關資訊則表示以現在的缺陷檢測處理有無法檢測的缺陷部分。Here, it is the result of processing one wafer 10 conveyed to the mounting table 6 by the workpiece conveyance system 1000, for example, and the wafer 10 is broken due to chipping of the edge 11. In this case, there may be a defective part that cannot be detected in the defect detection process of the workpiece processing device 1. Therefore, for example, the user inputs assessment-related information with relevant information to the assessment-related information acceptance unit 105, and the relevant information indicates that there is a defect portion that cannot be detected in the current defect detection process.

評估相關資訊受理部105受理具有表示無法檢測到的缺陷部分的資訊的評估相關資訊時,設定部106會取得可比用於缺陷檢測的臨界值更能檢測到更小缺陷部分的臨界值。具體而言,是取得一臨界值,該臨界值係由上述用於缺陷部分檢測的第二臨界值TH2 的值變更為比現在值(變更前的該第二臨界值TH2 )恰少以預先指定值來演算如減算等所得的值。例如,取得從現在的第二臨界值TH2 的值減去預先指定值所得的值,作為新的第二臨界值。此處的減算值以微小值為佳。而且,減算後的第二臨界值的大小較佳為不在0以下。When the evaluation-related information accepting unit 105 accepts evaluation-related information having information indicating a defect portion that cannot be detected, the setting unit 106 obtains a threshold value that can detect a smaller defect portion than the threshold value for defect detection. Specifically, a critical value is obtained, which is changed from the value of the second critical value T H2 for detecting the defective part to less than the current value (the second critical value T H2 before the change) Specify values in advance to calculate values such as subtraction. For example, a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the value of the current second critical value T H2 as a new second critical value. The subtraction value here is preferably a small value. Moreover, the magnitude of the second critical value after subtraction is preferably not less than 0.

接著,設定部106會以所取得的新第二臨界值來更新缺陷檢測裝置1037利用的第二臨界值。Next, the setting unit 106 updates the second threshold used by the defect detection device 1037 with the acquired new second threshold.

藉此方式,將缺陷部分的檢測結果回授,即可較使用更新前的臨界值時檢測到更細小的缺陷部分,而能減少缺陷檢測的遺漏。In this way, feedback of the detection result of the defective part can detect a smaller defect part than when the threshold value before the update is used, and can reduce the omission of defect detection.

(變形例1) 以下,就上述的具體例中,設定部106使用機器學習取得檢測缺陷部分時的臨界值的一個狀況例加以說明。(Modification 1) In the following, an example of a situation in which the setting unit 106 obtains the critical value when the defective portion is detected using machine learning in the above-mentioned specific example will be described.

此處,例如工件輸送系統1000的輸送目的地為CVD裝置(未圖示),載置台6為CVD裝置的載置台。Here, for example, the transport destination of the workpiece transport system 1000 is a CVD device (not shown), and the mounting table 6 is a mounting table of the CVD device.

評估相關資訊受理部105會接收有複數個評估相關資訊並儲存於未圖示的儲存部,該複數個評估相關資訊為將以下所述三者與表示藉工件處理裝置1執行的缺陷部分檢測結果是否正確的正誤資訊對應的資訊:對晶圓10進行缺陷部分檢測時使用的第二臨界值、在該晶圓10的輸送目的地(CVD裝置)施行處理的處理温度以及處理時間。The evaluation-related information receiving section 105 will receive a plurality of evaluation-related information and store it in a storage section (not shown). The plurality of evaluation-related information are the results of the inspection of the defective part performed by the workpiece processing device 1 as described below. Whether the correct information is correct: information corresponding to the second critical value used for the detection of the defective portion of the wafer 10, the processing temperature and the processing time to be processed at the transport destination (CVD device) of the wafer 10

設定部106將包含於所接收的複數個評估相關資訊的第二臨界值、處理温度、處理時間、及正誤資訊,作為教師數據依序學習。The setting unit 106 sequentially learns the second critical value, processing temperature, processing time, and error information included in the received plurality of evaluation-related information as teacher data.

其次,在使用者使用相同的CVD裝置對一片晶圓10以一個處理條件進行處理的情況中,為了取得能夠檢測處理中發生破裂等問題的缺陷部分的臨界值,而使該一個處理條件的處理温度與處理時間、作為第二臨界值的候補的複數個值分別形成對應而組成複數個組,並將該複數個組分別輸入學習結果,而取得以包含於各個組的第二臨界值檢測缺陷部分時的檢測結果正確與否的判斷結果。藉此方式,即可對所輸入的處理温度、處理時間、第二臨界值的組合,判斷使用該第二臨界值進行缺陷檢測是否適當。作為第二臨界值候補的複數個值為例如相隔預先指定值的複數個值。作為第二臨界值候補的複數個值為例如使用於內定的第二臨界值的周邊的複數個值。Secondly, in the case where the user uses the same CVD apparatus to process one wafer 10 under one processing condition, in order to obtain the critical value of the defective portion that can detect the problem such as cracking during processing, the processing under the one processing condition The temperature, the processing time, and the plurality of values that are candidates for the second critical value correspond to each other to form a plurality of groups, and the plurality of groups are input into the learning result respectively, and the second threshold value included in each group is used to detect defects The judgment result of the correctness of the partial test result. In this way, the combination of the input processing temperature, processing time, and second critical value can be used to determine whether it is appropriate to use the second critical value for defect detection. The plural values that are candidates for the second threshold value are, for example, plural values separated by a predetermined value. The plural values that are candidates for the second threshold value are, for example, plural values that are used around the default second threshold value.

其次,取得與經判斷為正確的判斷結果對應的第二臨界值中的一個,例如最大值者。然後,將該第二臨界值設定為缺陷檢測裝置1037要利用在缺陷檢測的第二臨界值。Next, one of the second critical values corresponding to the judgment result judged to be correct, for example, the largest one is obtained. Then, the second critical value is set as the second critical value to be used by the defect detection device 1037 in defect detection.

藉此方式,對於具有後續程序的CVD處理中會造成問題的缺陷部分的晶圓10,就可利用學習結果適當地進行檢測,同時在邊緣具有後續程序中不會造成問題的凹凸的晶圓10,也可取得不用檢測的第二臨界值。結果,就得以例如以優異精確度進行晶圓10的選別。In this way, the wafer 10 having the defective part that will cause problems in the CVD process of the subsequent process can be appropriately detected using the learning results, and at the same time, the wafer 10 having the unevenness that does not cause the problem in the subsequent process can be appropriately detected. , You can also get the second threshold without detection. As a result, the selection of the wafer 10 can be performed with excellent accuracy, for example.

以上,若依本實施形態,在工件輸送時,於對準工件的位置與朝向時,可進行工件邊緣缺陷部分的檢測,使工件缺陷的檢測適當的進行。As described above, according to the present embodiment, when aligning the position and orientation of the workpiece during the conveyance of the workpiece, the defect portion on the edge of the workpiece can be detected, so that the defect of the workpiece can be appropriately detected.

再者,若依本實施形態,將由旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊加以合成所得的合成距離資訊中,對變化較小的連續複數個合成距離資訊進行檢測,藉由使用與所檢測的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個合成距離資訊對應的合成源的複數個第一距離資訊,取得用以使工件旋轉中心移動到工件中心的修正資訊,就可使用從工件邊緣的凹凸較少的部分取得的第一距離資訊,適當地取得高精確度的修正資訊。Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the synthetic distance information obtained by synthesizing a plurality of first distance information whose rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees, the continuous plural synthetic distance information with a small change is detected by using The plurality of first distance information of the synthesis source corresponding to one of the detected plurality of synthesized distance information, to obtain the correction information for moving the center of rotation of the workpiece to the center of the workpiece, you can use the unevenness from the edge of the workpiece The first part of the distance information obtained by the lesser part properly obtains the correction information with high accuracy.

又,若依本實施形態,透過使用上述的修正資訊取得工件為無凹凸的圓形時表示旋轉角度與至邊緣的距離的關係的關係式,並使用從所取得的關係式取得的第二距離資訊與第一距離資訊的差,來取得表示工件缺口部的資訊、或關於工件缺陷部分的資訊,即可適當表示工件邊緣的凹凸。例如,可適當表示工件缺口部的位置。而且,可適當表示工件邊緣的缺陷部分位置或其種類。In addition, according to the present embodiment, by using the correction information described above, the relational expression indicating the relationship between the rotation angle and the distance to the edge is obtained when the workpiece is in a round shape without unevenness, and the second distance obtained from the acquired relational expression is used The difference between the information and the first distance information to obtain information indicating the notch of the workpiece or information about the defective part of the workpiece can appropriately indicate the unevenness of the edge of the workpiece. For example, the position of the notch of the workpiece can be appropriately indicated. Moreover, the position or type of the defective part at the edge of the workpiece can be appropriately indicated.

另外,在本案中,如圖25所示的工件處理裝置5在上述實施形態所說明的工件處理裝置中,可依狀況將第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101、合成裝置1031、合成處理裝置1032、修正資訊取得裝置1033、第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、及缺陷檢測裝置1037以外的構成作適當省略,又設置:修正資訊輸出裝置1038,將修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊進行輸出;及距離差相關輸出裝置1039,將計算裝置1035所取得關於第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差的相關資訊、及缺陷檢測裝置1037所檢測關於缺陷部分的資訊予以輸出,而第二距離資訊取得裝置1034也可使用修正資訊輸出裝置1038所輸出的修正資訊,以取得第二距離資訊。In addition, in this case, the workpiece processing apparatus 5 shown in FIG. 25 in the workpiece processing apparatus described in the above embodiment can store the first rotation distance information storage unit 101, the synthesis apparatus 1031, and the synthesis processing apparatus 1032 according to the situation. The components other than the correction information acquisition device 1033, the second distance information acquisition device 1034, the computing device 1035, the notch detection device 1036, and the defect detection device 1037 are omitted as appropriate, and a correction information output device 1038 is provided to convert the correction information acquisition device 1033 The obtained correction information is output; and the distance difference related output device 1039, the related information about the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information obtained by the computing device 1035, and the information about the defective part detected by the defect detection device 1037 Output, and the second distance information obtaining device 1034 can also use the correction information output by the correction information output device 1038 to obtain the second distance information.

修正資訊輸出裝置1038將修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊輸出。此處的輸出是包含例如工件的對準器(未圖示)等對外部裝置的訊息傳送、對内部處理裝置等的交遞、對記錄媒體的儲存、在監視器(未圖示)的顯示、處理結果等向其他處理裝置或其他程式等的交遞等概念。The correction information output device 1038 outputs the correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device 1033. The output here includes messages sent to external devices such as an aligner (not shown) of the workpiece, delivery to internal processing devices, storage of recording media, and display on a monitor (not shown) , The delivery of processing results, etc. to other processing devices or other programs, etc.

例如,修正資訊輸出裝置1038是為用以將修正資訊取得裝置1033所取得的修正資訊輸出到第二距離資訊取得裝置1034等的介面、用以將修正資訊暫時記憶到可存取第二距離資訊取得裝置1034的記憶體(未圖示)等記憶媒體的裝置。例如,第二距離資訊取得裝置1034受理修正資訊輸出裝置1038輸出的修正資訊,並使用所受理的修正資訊來取得第二距離資訊。此外,第二距離資訊取得裝置1034為例如由第二距離資訊取得裝置1034將儲存在記憶媒體的修正資訊讀取,並使用所讀取的修正資訊來取得第二距離資訊。For example, the correction information output device 1038 is an interface for outputting the correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device 1033 to the second distance information obtaining device 1034, etc., for temporarily storing the correction information to the accessible second distance information A device for acquiring a storage medium such as a memory (not shown) of the device 1034. For example, the second distance information obtaining device 1034 accepts the correction information output by the correction information output device 1038, and uses the received correction information to obtain the second distance information. In addition, the second distance information obtaining device 1034 is, for example, the second distance information obtaining device 1034 reads the correction information stored in the memory medium, and uses the read correction information to obtain the second distance information.

距離差相關輸出裝置1039將與計算裝置1035所計算的相同旋轉角度形成對應關於距離差資訊的資訊輸出。關於差的資訊可為例如具有距離差資訊本身的資訊、也可為與一個或兩個以上距離差資訊對應的旋轉角度、也可為距離差資訊與旋轉角度的組合。例如,輸出部104可將由距離差資訊與旋轉角度形成對應而具有的資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部。也可將表示距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖輸出,例如將其顯示出來。The distance difference correlation output device 1039 outputs the same rotation angle calculated by the calculation device 1035 to form information corresponding to the distance difference information. The information about the difference may be, for example, information having distance difference information itself, a rotation angle corresponding to one or more than two distance difference information, or a combination of distance difference information and rotation angle. For example, the output unit 104 may store information corresponding to the distance difference information and the rotation angle in a storage unit (not shown). It is also possible to output a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information and the rotation angle, for example, to display it.

所謂關於距離差資訊的資訊,亦包含使用距離差資訊取得的資訊的概念。例如,距離差相關輸出裝置1039也可將缺口檢測裝置1036使用距離差資訊取得的表示工件10之缺口部的資訊輸出作為計算裝置1035所計算之關於差的資訊。透過輸出表示缺口部的資訊,讓使用者或其他裝置等可以辨識缺口部存在於工件10的那個部分。距離差相關輸出裝置1039也可在例如在表示距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖上,將與表示缺口部的旋轉角度對應的部分,用與其他不同的顏色或圖樣來表示其他不同的態樣(例如,曲線圖上與表示缺口部的旋轉角度對應範圍的背景),作為表示缺口部之資訊的輸出。The so-called information about distance difference information also includes the concept of information obtained using distance difference information. For example, the distance difference correlation output device 1039 may also output the information indicating the notch portion of the workpiece 10 obtained by the gap detection device 1036 using the distance difference information as the information about the difference calculated by the calculation device 1035. By outputting information indicating the notch, the user or other device can recognize the part where the notch exists in the workpiece 10. The distance difference correlation output device 1039 may, for example, on a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information and the rotation angle, use a different color or pattern to represent the different parts corresponding to the rotation angle of the notch. The aspect (for example, the background on the graph corresponding to the range corresponding to the rotation angle of the notch) is output as the information indicating the notch.

此外,距離差相關輸出裝置1039也可使用計算裝置1035計算所得關於距離差資訊的資訊,將缺陷檢測裝置1037所取得關於缺陷部分的資訊輸出,作為計算裝置1035計算所得關於距離差資訊的資訊。由於表示缺陷部分的資訊為具有缺陷部分位置(例如、旋轉角度)及其位置的距離差資訊的資訊,故使用者或其他裝置等可辨識在工件10的那個部分具有何種大小的缺陷部分。表示缺陷部分的資訊又具有表示缺陷部分是否為朝晶圓10的外側呈凸狀的資訊時,也可辨識缺陷部分是毛邊或崩缺。距離差相關輸出裝置1039也可在例如表示距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖上,與缺口部的情形同樣,將與表示缺陷部分的旋轉角度對應的部分,用與其他不同的態樣顯示,作為表示缺陷部分的資訊的輸出。In addition, the distance difference related output device 1039 can also use the information about the distance difference information calculated by the computing device 1035 to output the information about the defective part obtained by the defect detection device 1037 as the information about the distance difference information calculated by the computing device 1035. Since the information indicating the defective part is information having information on the position (eg, rotation angle) of the defective part and the distance difference between the positions, the user or other devices can recognize the size of the defective part in the part of the workpiece 10. When the information indicating the defective portion has information indicating whether the defective portion is convex toward the outer side of the wafer 10, it can also be identified whether the defective portion is a burr or chipping. The distance difference correlation output device 1039 may, for example, on a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information and the rotation angle, as in the case of the notch, use a different aspect from the part corresponding to the rotation angle of the defective part. Display as an output of information indicating the defective part.

工件處理裝置5中,例如可以針對工件取得並輸出具有理想的邊緣時從旋轉中心至邊緣的距離、及實際上至邊緣的距離的差,以優異精確度表示工件(例如、晶圓)邊緣的凹凸。藉此方式,藉由例如距離差相關輸出裝置1039的輸出,即可適當表示工件缺口部的位置。再者,透過取得並輸出缺陷資訊,可表示關於工件邊緣缺陷部分的適當資訊。例如,可適當表示缺陷部分的位置或其種類。In the workpiece processing device 5, for example, the difference between the distance from the rotation center to the edge and the actual distance to the edge when the workpiece has an ideal edge can be obtained and output, and the edge of the workpiece (eg, wafer) can be expressed with excellent accuracy Bump. In this way, the output of the distance difference correlation output device 1039 can appropriately indicate the position of the notch of the workpiece. Furthermore, by obtaining and outputting defect information, it is possible to express appropriate information about the defective part of the edge of the workpiece. For example, the position or type of the defective portion can be appropriately indicated.

此外,上述的工件處理裝置5是為例如下述形態的工件處理裝置。亦即,該工件處理裝置5具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部,供儲存工件旋轉時的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊為具有使旋轉角度與第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊,而該第一距離資訊則為關於該旋轉角度對應的工件的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的資訊;合成裝置,在包含於前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊加以合成;合成處理裝置,在前述合成裝置將第一距離資訊合成並取得的資訊的複數個合成距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度相連續的複數個合成距離資訊、且值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊加以檢測,並取得與檢測所得的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、及與合成前的一個以上第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度;修正資訊取得裝置,使用前述合成處理裝置所取得的複數個第一距離資訊及旋轉角度,來取得用以使前述工件的旋轉中心對準前述工件的中心的修正資訊;修正資訊輸出裝置,將前述修正資訊取得裝置所取得的修正資訊輸出;第二距離資訊取得裝置,使用前述修正資訊輸出裝置輸出的修正資訊,來取得前述工件為邊緣無凹凸的圓形時表示旋轉角度與第二距離資訊的關係的關係式,該第二距離資訊為關於與旋轉角度相應的工件至邊緣的距離的資訊,將與前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度分別代入該取得的關係式,並取得第二距離資訊;計算裝置,使用前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊、及前述第二距離資訊取得裝置所取得的複數個第二距離資訊,來取得與相同旋轉角度形成對應的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差;以及距離差相關輸出裝置,將前述計算裝置所計算關於差的資訊輸出。In addition, the above-mentioned workpiece processing apparatus 5 is, for example, a workpiece processing apparatus of the following form. That is, the workpiece processing device 5 includes: a first rotation distance information storage section for storing a plurality of first rotation distance information when the workpiece rotates, the first rotation distance information is formed such that the rotation angle and the first distance information are formed Corresponding information, and the first distance information is information about the distance from the center of rotation of the workpiece corresponding to the rotation angle to the edge; the synthesis device is included in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information, Synthesize a plurality of first distance information corresponding to different rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees; a synthesis processing device, in the plurality of synthesized distance information of the information obtained by synthesizing the first distance information and obtained by the aforementioned synthesis device, rotate the corresponding rotation A plurality of synthesized distance information having continuous angles and a plurality of synthesized distance information with a small change in value are detected, and a plurality of first distances before synthesis corresponding to more than one of the detected plurality of synthesized distance information are obtained Information, and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information before synthesis; a correction information acquisition device that uses a plurality of first distance information and rotation angles obtained by the synthesis processing device to obtain the rotation for rotating the workpiece The correction information centered on the center of the workpiece; the correction information output device outputs the correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device; the second distance information obtaining device uses the correction information output by the correction information output device to obtain the foregoing When the workpiece is a circle with no unevenness, it represents the relationship between the rotation angle and the second distance information. The second distance information is information about the distance from the workpiece to the edge corresponding to the rotation angle. The plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the rotation distance information are respectively substituted into the obtained relational expression, and the second distance information is obtained; the computing device uses the plurality of first rotation distance information and the plurality of second distance information acquisition devices The second distance information is used to obtain the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information corresponding to the same rotation angle; and a distance difference related output device to output the information about the difference calculated by the calculation device.

其次,上述的工件處理裝置中,前述缺陷檢測裝置使用前述計算裝置所計算的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差、及關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值,來檢測前述工件邊緣的缺陷部分,並取得關於該經檢測的缺陷部分的資訊。Secondly, in the above-mentioned workpiece processing device, the defect detection device uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device and one or more critical values regarding the size of the defect portion to detect the edge of the workpiece Defective parts, and obtain information about the detected defective parts.

而且,上述的工件處理裝置5中,可再省略第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、缺陷檢測裝置1037、及距離差相關輸出裝置1039。藉此方式所獲得的工件處理裝置為例如用以取得工件修正資訊等的裝置。In addition, in the workpiece processing device 5 described above, the second distance information acquisition device 1034, the calculation device 1035, the notch detection device 1036, the defect detection device 1037, and the distance difference correlation output device 1039 can be omitted. The workpiece processing device obtained in this way is, for example, a device for obtaining workpiece correction information.

藉由此種構成,透過將關於旋轉角度逐次相異90度的邊緣距離的資訊加以合成,並從因旋轉中心與晶圓中心相異所發生關於邊緣距離的資訊變動除去後的資訊,以取得關於邊緣無凹凸部分的距離的資訊,可以取得用以使工件旋轉中心對準工件中心的修正資訊,故具有可取得高精確度的修正資訊的效果。With this configuration, by synthesizing the information about the edge distances where the rotation angles are successively different by 90 degrees, and removing the information about the edge distances due to the difference between the rotation center and the wafer center, the information is obtained The information on the distance of the part without the unevenness on the edge can obtain the correction information for aligning the rotation center of the workpiece with the center of the workpiece, so it has the effect of obtaining the correction information with high accuracy.

藉此方式,例如,使用修正資訊,執行工件位置對準的裝置(未圖示)就可將工件的位置適當修正,使工件的旋轉中心成為工件的中心。In this way, for example, using correction information, a device (not shown) that performs alignment of the workpiece can properly correct the position of the workpiece so that the rotation center of the workpiece becomes the center of the workpiece.

此外,該工件處理裝置為例如下述的工件處理裝置。亦即,該工件處理裝置具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部,供儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊為具有使工件旋轉時的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊,而該第一距離資訊則為關於與該旋轉角度對應的工件從旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的資訊;合成裝置,在包含於前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊加以合成;合成處理裝置,在前述合成裝置將第一距離資訊合成而取得的資訊的複數個合成距離資訊中,對對應的旋轉角度為相連續的複數個合成距離資訊、且值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊加以檢測,並取得與檢測所得的複數個合成距離資訊中一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、及與合成前的一個以上第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度;修正資訊取得裝置,使用前述合成處理裝置所取得的複數個第一距離資訊及旋轉角度,來取得用以使前述工件的旋轉中心對準前述工件的中心的修正資訊;以及修正資訊輸出裝置,將前述修正資訊取得裝置所取得的修正資訊輸出。In addition, the workpiece processing apparatus is, for example, the following workpiece processing apparatus. That is, the workpiece processing device includes: a first rotation distance information storage section for storing a plurality of first rotation distance information, the first rotation distance information having a rotation angle when rotating the workpiece corresponding to the first distance information Information, and the first distance information is information about the distance of the workpiece corresponding to the rotation angle from the center of rotation to the edge; the synthesis device is included in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information, Synthesize a plurality of first distance information corresponding to different rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees; a synthesis processing device, in the plurality of synthesized distance information of the information obtained by synthesizing the first distance information by the aforementioned synthesis device, rotate the corresponding rotation The angle is a plurality of continuous distance information with a plurality of combined distance information, and the change of the value of the value is small, and a plurality of first distances before synthesis corresponding to more than one of the detected plurality of combined distance information are detected Information, and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information before synthesis; a correction information acquisition device that uses a plurality of first distance information and rotation angles obtained by the synthesis processing device to obtain the rotation for rotating the workpiece The correction information centered on the center of the workpiece; and a correction information output device, which outputs the correction information obtained by the correction information obtaining device.

(實施形態2) 本發明的實施形態2是為在上述實施形態1中,將拍攝工件邊緣的缺陷部分所得的影像輸出。(Embodiment 2) The second embodiment of the present invention is to output a video obtained by photographing a defective part on the edge of the workpiece in the above-mentioned first embodiment.

圖17為本實施形態的工件處理裝置3的方塊圖。FIG. 17 is a block diagram of the workpiece processing device 3 of this embodiment.

工件處理裝置3具備:第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101、取得部103、輸出部104、評估相關資訊受理部105、設定部106、邊緣位置檢測器301、拍攝部303、修正缺陷位置取得部304、影像輸出部305、檢測部306、評估部307、評估結果輸出部308、情況受理部309、影像情況資訊儲存部310、以及影像情況資訊累積儲存部311。邊緣位置檢測器301具備移動部302。The workpiece processing device 3 includes a first rotational distance information storage unit 101, an acquisition unit 103, an output unit 104, an evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105, a setting unit 106, an edge position detector 301, an imaging unit 303, and a correction defect position acquisition unit 304 , An image output unit 305, a detection unit 306, an evaluation unit 307, an evaluation result output unit 308, a situation acceptance unit 309, an image situation information storage unit 310, and an image situation information accumulation storage unit 311. The edge position detector 301 includes a moving unit 302.

取得部103具備例如:合成裝置1031、合成處理裝置1032、修正資訊取得裝置1033、第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、以及缺陷檢測裝置1037。The acquisition unit 103 includes, for example, a synthesis device 1031, a synthesis processing device 1032, a correction information acquisition device 1033, a second distance information acquisition device 1034, a calculation device 1035, a notch detection device 1036, and a defect detection device 1037.

關於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101、取得部103、輸出部104、評估相關資訊受理部105、及設定部106、以及構成取得部103的合成裝置1031、合成處理裝置1032、修正資訊取得裝置1033、第二距離資訊取得裝置1034、計算裝置1035、缺口檢測裝置1036、以及缺陷檢測裝置1037等的構成及動作等,是相同於上述實施形態1,詳細說明在此容予省略。About the first rotation distance information storage unit 101, acquisition unit 103, output unit 104, evaluation-related information acceptance unit 105, and setting unit 106, and synthesis device 1031, synthesis processing device 1032, and correction information acquisition device 1033 constituting the acquisition unit 103 The configuration and operation of the second distance information acquisition device 1034, the computing device 1035, the notch detection device 1036, and the defect detection device 1037 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and detailed descriptions are omitted here.

圖18包含:表示工件處理裝置3一實施形態例的立體圖(圖18(a))、及表示本實施形態的邊緣位置檢測器301的一例的示意圖(圖18(b))。工件處理裝置3具備:工件10的載置用台座的載置台3021、以及用以拍攝載置台3021上所載置的工件10的邊緣缺陷部分的拍攝部303。罩蓋3025的内部設有邊緣檢測部55。FIG. 18 includes a perspective view (FIG. 18(a)) showing an example of an embodiment of the workpiece processing device 3, and a schematic diagram showing an example of the edge position detector 301 of the present embodiment (FIG. 18(b)). The workpiece processing device 3 includes a mounting table 3021 for mounting the workpiece 10 and an imaging unit 303 for imaging the edge defect of the workpiece 10 mounted on the mounting table 3021. An edge detection unit 55 is provided inside the cover 3025.

邊緣位置檢測器301針對工件10取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊。具體而言,邊緣位置檢測器301會檢測工件10的邊緣位置,並針對工件10取得複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,且儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。The edge position detector 301 acquires a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece 10. Specifically, the edge position detector 301 detects the edge position of the workpiece 10, obtains a plurality of pieces of first rotation distance information for the workpiece 10, and stores it in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

邊緣位置檢測器301具備有例如檢測工件10的邊緣位置的邊緣檢測部55、移動部302、編碼器56、及儲存部57。邊緣檢測部55具有投光器55a及感測器55b。有關邊緣檢測部55、編碼器56、及儲存部57的構成或處理等,由於與圖3所示的邊緣位置檢測器102相同,故其說明省略。The edge position detector 301 includes, for example, an edge detection unit 55 that detects the edge position of the work 10, a moving unit 302, an encoder 56, and a storage unit 57. The edge detection unit 55 has a light projector 55a and a sensor 55b. The configuration or processing of the edge detection unit 55, the encoder 56, and the storage unit 57 are the same as those of the edge position detector 102 shown in FIG. 3, and therefore their description is omitted.

移動部302使工件10移動。移動部302使例如載置於載置台3021的工件10移動。工件10藉由移動部302的移動是指例如使工件10旋轉的移動、或使工件10平行移動的移動。所謂使工件10平行移動,是指例如使工件10在包含工件10的表面的平面内移動的情形。The moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10. The moving unit 302 moves, for example, the workpiece 10 placed on the mounting table 3021. The movement of the work 10 by the moving portion 302 refers to, for example, movement to rotate the work 10 or movement to move the work 10 in parallel. Moving the work piece 10 in parallel refers to, for example, moving the work piece 10 in a plane including the surface of the work piece 10.

移動部302使工件10旋轉。移動部302具有例如載置台3021、及使載置台3021以中心軸為旋轉軸旋轉的旋轉機構3022。而且,透過例如藉由旋轉機構3022使載置台3021以其載置面位在同一平面内的方式旋轉,而使載置於載置台3021上的工件10旋轉。旋轉機構3022具有將旋轉(動力)傳遞到載置台3021的電動馬達(未圖示)等。供載置工件10的載置台3021的上面,設置有例如具有吸附面的所謂吸附座(未圖示)等,該吸附面用以吸附所載置的工件10。編碼器56會例如檢測旋轉機構3022所具有的電動馬達(未圖示)的旋轉量,並輸出數位訊號,而該電動馬達的旋轉量相當於工件10的旋轉角度。The moving part 302 rotates the workpiece 10. The moving unit 302 includes, for example, a mounting table 3021 and a rotating mechanism 3022 that rotates the mounting table 3021 about the central axis. Then, for example, by rotating the mounting mechanism 3022 to rotate the mounting table 3021 so that its mounting surface is in the same plane, the workpiece 10 placed on the mounting table 3021 is rotated. The rotating mechanism 3022 has an electric motor (not shown) or the like that transmits rotation (power) to the mounting table 3021. The upper surface of the mounting table 3021 on which the workpiece 10 is placed is provided with, for example, a so-called suction seat (not shown) having a suction surface for sucking the mounted workpiece 10. The encoder 56 detects, for example, the rotation amount of an electric motor (not shown) included in the rotation mechanism 3022 and outputs a digital signal, and the rotation amount of the electric motor corresponds to the rotation angle of the workpiece 10.

邊緣位置檢測器301會例如取得移動部302使工件10每旋轉預先指定的旋轉角度時的表示邊緣位置的測定值。然後,使用該旋轉角度及測定值依序取得第一距離資訊及旋轉角度。表示邊緣位置的測定值係為例如從工件10的旋轉中心至邊緣的距離的測定值等。邊緣位置檢測器301在例如針對不同工件取得第一旋轉距離資訊時,會使針對各工件所取得的複數個第一旋轉距離資訊與各工件的工件識別符形成對應,並儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。The edge position detector 301 acquires, for example, a measurement value indicating the edge position every time the moving unit 302 rotates the workpiece 10 by a predetermined rotation angle. Then, the first distance information and the rotation angle are sequentially acquired using the rotation angle and the measured value. The measured value indicating the edge position is, for example, a measured value of the distance from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the edge. For example, when acquiring the first rotation distance information for different workpieces, the edge position detector 301 makes the plurality of first rotation distance information acquired for each workpiece correspond to the workpiece identifier of each workpiece and stores it in the first rotation distance Information storage 101.

移動部302還具有使載置於載置台3021的工件10朝著對工件10的表面平行的方向移動的構造。此處的平行亦包含大致平行的概念。與工件10的表面平行的方向,也可以為對供載置工件10的載置台3021的載置面呈平行的方向。移動部302例如使工件10朝水平方向移動。例如,移動部302具有使工件10朝對工件10的表面成平行的正交的二軸方向分別移動的構成。移動部302會例如藉由該二軸的各個方向移動的組合,使工件10平行地移動。此處,為方便說明將該二軸稱為x軸方向、y軸方向。具體而言,移動部302設有:使旋轉機構3022朝x軸方向移動的x軸移動機構3023、及使x軸移動機構3023朝y軸方向移動的y軸移動機構3024。例如,x軸移動機構3023及y軸移動機構3024由分別朝x軸方向與y軸方向延伸的方式設置的滾珠螺桿與電動馬達等的組合所構成。但,移動部302使載置於載置台3021的工件10朝對工件10的表面成平行的方向移動所用的構成等,並不拘。The moving part 302 also has a structure for moving the workpiece 10 placed on the mounting table 3021 in a direction parallel to the surface of the workpiece 10. The parallel here also includes the concept of substantially parallel. The direction parallel to the surface of the workpiece 10 may be a direction parallel to the mounting surface of the mounting table 3021 on which the workpiece 10 is mounted. The moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10 in the horizontal direction, for example. For example, the moving part 302 has a structure that moves the workpiece 10 in two orthogonal biaxial directions parallel to the surface of the workpiece 10. The moving part 302 moves the workpiece 10 in parallel by, for example, a combination of movements in the two directions of the two axes. Here, for convenience of explanation, the two axes are referred to as x-axis direction and y-axis direction. Specifically, the moving unit 302 includes an x-axis movement mechanism 3023 that moves the rotation mechanism 3022 in the x-axis direction, and a y-axis movement mechanism 3024 that moves the x-axis movement mechanism 3023 in the y-axis direction. For example, the x-axis movement mechanism 3023 and the y-axis movement mechanism 3024 are composed of a combination of a ball screw and an electric motor that are provided to extend in the x-axis direction and the y-axis direction, respectively. However, the configuration of the moving section 302 for moving the workpiece 10 placed on the mounting table 3021 in a direction parallel to the surface of the workpiece 10 is not limited.

移動部302使用例如在上述實施形態1中說明的輸出部104輸出的工件10的對準位置用修正資訊等資訊,使工件10移動,俾使工件10之中心位於預先指定的位置。移動部302透過例如使載置有工件10的載置台3021朝與載置台3021的載置面成平行的方向移動的移動方式及使載置台3021旋轉的移動方式適當組合,以上述方式使工件10移動。The moving unit 302 uses information such as correction information for the alignment position of the work 10 output by the output unit 104 described in the first embodiment, for example, to move the work 10 so that the center of the work 10 is at a predetermined position. The moving unit 302 appropriately combines the movement method for moving the placement table 3021 on which the workpiece 10 is placed in a direction parallel to the placement surface of the placement table 3021 and the movement method for rotating the placement table 3021 to make the workpiece 10 as described above mobile.

移動部302使用輸出部104輸出的關於工件10的邊緣缺陷部分的資訊,使工件10移動,俾使工件10的邊緣缺陷部分配置於拍攝區域内。拍攝區域是為預先指定區域,具體而言,是拍攝部303可拍攝的區域。拍攝區域也可以為拍攝部303可拍攝的範圍。移動部302較佳為使工件10移動到工件10的邊緣缺陷部分位於拍攝區域内的預先指定位置,例如中央等。The moving unit 302 uses the information about the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 output by the output unit 104 to move the workpiece 10 so that the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 is arranged in the imaging area. The imaging area is an area designated in advance, specifically, an area that can be captured by the imaging unit 303. The imaging area may be a range that the imaging unit 303 can image. The moving part 302 preferably moves the workpiece 10 to a predetermined position, such as the center, where the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 is located in the imaging area.

例如,移動部302會使用有關邊緣缺陷部分的資訊的表示缺陷部分位置的資訊,例如表示缺陷部分相對於工件10的旋轉中心的角度的資訊等,以該缺陷部分的位置位於拍攝區域内的方式使工件10移動。此處的移動,使工件10旋轉的移動方式(以下稱為旋轉移動)與使工件10對工件10的表面成平行地移動的移動方式(以下稱為平行移動)的至少1種以上組合。For example, the moving part 302 may use information about the edge defect part to indicate the position of the defect part, such as information indicating the angle of the defect part relative to the rotation center of the workpiece 10, etc., in such a manner that the position of the defect part is within the shooting area The workpiece 10 is moved. The movement here is at least one or more combinations of a movement method for rotating the workpiece 10 (hereinafter referred to as rotational movement) and a movement method for moving the workpiece 10 parallel to the surface of the workpiece 10 (hereinafter referred to as parallel movement).

以下,舉例說明有關移動部302使缺陷部分的位置移動到拍攝區域内的處理。In the following, an example of a process in which the moving unit 302 moves the position of the defective portion into the imaging area will be described.

(1) 移動工件藉以使工件的中心配置於預先指定位置的情況 移動部302會例如使工件10移動,使工件10的中心配置於預先指定位置,且使工件10的邊緣缺陷部分配置於拍攝區域内。所謂預先指定位置,是指例如工件10的中心應該配置的位置、或使工件10對準位置時作為基準的位置,以具體例而言,為將工件10送交到上述實施形態1中說明的工件輸送裝置2等時供配置工件10的中心的位置。工件10在例如移動部302的載置台3021的旋轉中心配置於該預先指定位置的狀態下,利用工件輸送裝置2等載置於該載置台3021上。移動部302透過例如將旋轉移動與平行移動適當組合使工件10移動到上述的位置。(1) When moving the workpiece so that the center of the workpiece is arranged at a predetermined position For example, the moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10, arranges the center of the workpiece 10 at a predetermined position, and arranges the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 in the imaging area. The pre-specified position refers to, for example, a position where the center of the workpiece 10 should be arranged, or a position that is used as a reference when the workpiece 10 is aligned. In a specific example, the workpiece 10 is delivered to the above-described first embodiment. The workpiece conveying device 2 is provided for isochronous positioning of the center of the workpiece 10. The workpiece 10 is placed on the mounting table 3021 by the workpiece conveying device 2 or the like, for example, in a state where the rotation center of the mounting table 3021 of the moving section 302 is arranged at the predetermined position. The moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10 to the above-mentioned position by appropriately combining rotational movement and parallel movement, for example.

移動部302使用例如用以使輸出部104輸出的工件10對準位置的資訊、及關於缺陷部分的資訊,進行上述的移動。例如,移動部302會使用用以使輸出部104輸出的工件10的旋轉中心對準工件10的中心的修正資訊、及表示工件10的邊緣缺陷部分的旋轉角度的資訊(例如,表示缺陷部分的範圍的角度資訊),以使工件10的中心配置於預先指定位置且工件10的邊緣缺陷部分配置於拍攝區域内的方式,令工件10移動。The moving unit 302 performs the above-mentioned movement using, for example, information for aligning the position of the workpiece 10 output by the output unit 104 and information about the defective portion. For example, the moving section 302 uses correction information for aligning the rotation center of the workpiece 10 output by the output section 104 with the center of the workpiece 10, and information indicating the rotation angle of the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 (for example, indicating Angular information of the range), so that the workpiece 10 is moved in such a manner that the center of the workpiece 10 is arranged at a predetermined position and the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 is arranged in the shooting area.

圖19是為用以說明使工件10的缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域内的一個處理例的圖示,其中包含了:表示工件10旋轉前的狀態的圖示(圖19(a))、及旋轉後的狀態的圖示(圖19(b))。圖中,與圖2相同的符號是表示相同或相當的部分。FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of processing for moving the defective portion of the workpiece 10 into the imaging area, including: a diagram showing the state of the workpiece 10 before rotation (FIG. 19(a)), and the rotation Illustration of the state after (FIG. 19(b)). In the figure, the same symbols as in FIG. 2 denote the same or corresponding parts.

圖中,xy座標為預先設定於工件處理裝置3的邊緣位置檢測器301的座標系,原點O是設為工件10中心應配置的位置。供載置工件10的載置台3021的旋轉中心在例如載置工件10時是設為位於與該原點O一致的位置。在經載置工件10後的時間點,工件10的中心Q並非位於原點O,工件10以該原點O的位置作為旋轉中心進行旋轉。工件10的中心設為從原點O朝角度α的方向位於離開距離h的位置。In the figure, the xy coordinate is a coordinate system set in advance on the edge position detector 301 of the workpiece processing device 3, and the origin O is the position where the center of the workpiece 10 should be arranged. The center of rotation of the mounting table 3021 on which the workpiece 10 is placed is set to be at a position coincident with the origin O when the workpiece 10 is placed, for example. At a time point after the workpiece 10 is placed, the center Q of the workpiece 10 is not located at the origin O, and the workpiece 10 rotates using the position of the origin O as the rotation center. The center of the work 10 is set at a distance away from the origin O toward the angle α in the direction of the angle α.

點P1 是為拍攝區域AP1 内的1點,例如為拍攝區域的中心點,相對於原點O,是設定在預先指定的旋轉角度,且離開相同於工件10的半徑的位置。藉此方式,工件10的中心載置於原點O上時,點P1 就位在工件10的邊緣上。The point P 1 is a point within the imaging area AP 1 , and is, for example, the center point of the imaging area. The point P 1 is set at a predetermined rotation angle with respect to the origin O and is away from the same radius as the workpiece 10. In this way, when the center of the workpiece 10 is placed on the origin O, the point P 1 is located on the edge of the workpiece 10.

此外,圖19中,在x軸的正範圍中,工件10的邊緣與x軸相交的位置與作為原點的工件10的旋轉中心O連結線段的位置即為旋轉角度0°的位置,旋轉角度則設為朝反時計方向増加其值。In addition, in FIG. 19, in the positive range of the x-axis, the position where the edge of the workpiece 10 intersects the x-axis and the rotation center O of the workpiece 10 as the origin connects the line segment is the position of the rotation angle 0°, the rotation angle It is set to increase its value in the direction of the anti-timer.

以下,使用圖19說明具體例。在圖19(a)所示狀態中,移動部302取得上述實施形態1中所說明的修正資訊所示的角度θt ,該角度θt 由:與使工件10之旋轉中心對準工件10的中心的角度α用的基準線(此處為x軸)成正交的線(此處為y軸)、與作為向拍攝區域内移動的對象的一個缺陷部分1901的兩端連結線所形成。該角度θt 也可以為偏位角度。例如,由於透過使用預先儲存於未圖示的儲存部等的工件10的半徑等資訊、及缺陷部分1901兩端A、B的旋轉角度,即可計算缺陷部分1901兩端A、B的座標等,故可使用該兩端A、B的座標等來計算角度θt 。該角度θt 相當於缺陷部分1901兩端A、B連結線上的中點M與工件10的中心的連結線QM對上述基準線(例如、x軸)所形成的角度。Hereinafter, a specific example will be described using FIG. 19. In the state shown in FIG. 19( a ), the moving unit 302 acquires the angle θ t indicated by the correction information described in the first embodiment described above, and the angle θ t is determined by aligning the rotation center of the workpiece 10 with the workpiece 10. The reference line (here, x-axis) for the angle α at the center is formed as a line (here, y-axis) orthogonal to each other, and is connected to the two ends of one defective portion 1901 that is an object moving into the imaging area. The angle θ t may be an offset angle. For example, the coordinates of A and B at both ends of the defective portion 1901 can be calculated by using information such as the radius of the workpiece 10 stored in a storage section (not shown) and the rotation angles of the A and B at both ends of the defective portion 1901, etc. Therefore, the coordinates θ t of the two ends A and B can be used to calculate the angle θ t . This angle θ t corresponds to the angle formed by the connecting line QM between the midpoint M on the connecting lines A and B at both ends of the defective portion 1901 and the center of the workpiece 10 with respect to the reference line (for example, x-axis).

其次,缺陷部分1901的兩端連結線上的中點M和工件10中心的連結線QM,只要與線段OP1 成平行,則以後透過使工件10朝水平方向(例如x軸方向或y軸方向)移動,就可使缺陷部分1901兩端連結線上的中點M與工件10中心的連結線QM與線段OP1 重疊。因此,計算用以使工件10以旋轉中心的原點O為中心旋轉的旋轉角度γ,使缺陷部分1901兩端連結線上的中點M與工件10中心的連結線QM與線段OP1 形成平行。例如,拍攝區域中心點P1 和原點O的連結直線OP1 與上述基準線(例如,x軸)所成的角設為β時,該旋轉角度γ即為β-θtSecondly, as long as the midpoint M on the connecting line at both ends of the defective portion 1901 and the connecting line QM at the center of the workpiece 10 are parallel to the line segment OP 1 , the workpiece 10 is then passed horizontally (for example, the x-axis direction or the y-axis direction) moving, so that the defect portion 1901 can be connected to both ends of the line connecting the midpoint 10 of the center line M and the workpiece QM overlapping line segment OP 1. Therefore, the rotation angle γ for rotating the workpiece 10 about the origin O of the rotation center is calculated so that the midpoint M on the connecting line at both ends of the defective portion 1901 and the connecting line QM at the center of the workpiece 10 are parallel to the line segment OP 1 . For example, when the angle formed by the connecting line OP 1 between the center point P 1 of the imaging area and the origin O and the above-mentioned reference line (for example, x-axis) is β, the rotation angle γ is β-θ t .

藉由該旋轉角度γ,透過使工件10以原點O為中心旋轉,即如圖19(b)所示,缺陷部分1901兩端連結線上的中點M和工件10中心的連結線QM就會與線段OP1 形成平行。With this rotation angle γ, by rotating the workpiece 10 about the origin O, that is, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the midpoint M on the connecting line at both ends of the defective portion 1901 and the connecting line QM at the center of the workpiece 10 become Parallel to the line OP 1 .

此時,藉由工件10作γ旋轉,工件10之中心Q就相對於原點O朝角度α+γ的方向處在離開距離h的位置。因此,令工件10移動,使該工件10的中心Q與原點O重疊。亦即,藉由令工件10朝角度α+γ的相反方向移動距離h,線段QM就會以中心Q與原點O重疊的方式平行移動,而與線段OP1 重疊,缺陷部分1901的中點M就被配置在拍攝區域AP1 内。而且,此處,缺陷部分1901的中點M就會位於連結拍攝區域AP1 的中心點P1 與工件10的中心的應配置位置的原點O的直線上。At this time, by rotating the workpiece 10 by γ, the center Q of the workpiece 10 is located at a distance h away from the origin O in the direction of angle α+γ. Therefore, the workpiece 10 is moved so that the center Q of the workpiece 10 overlaps the origin O. That is, by moving the workpiece 10 in the opposite direction of the angle α + γ by the distance h, the line segment QM will move parallel in such a way that the center Q overlaps the origin O, and overlaps with the line segment OP 1 , the midpoint M of the defective portion 1901 becomes It is arranged in the shooting area AP 1 . Further, here, the defect portion 1901 midpoint M will be located on a straight line connecting the origin O of the photographing area of an AP 1 of the center point P should be configured with a center position of the workpiece 10.

從而,如上所述,針對作為拍攝對象的各缺陷部分,使用表示缺陷部分的資訊及表示拍攝區域AP1 的位置的資訊(例如,表示中心點P1 的資訊等),計算缺陷部分兩端連結線段的中點對於與角度基準線成正交的線所形成的角度θt ,並使用該角度θt 來計算工件10以旋轉中心為中心旋轉的旋轉角度γ,再使用以使修正資訊所示的工件10的旋轉中心為中心進行移動為目的的表示移動方向的角度α,來計算用以使經旋轉角度γ的工件10的中心移動到預先指定位置的表示移動方向的角度α+γ。然後,要拍攝各缺陷部分時,將工件10從載置於載置台3021的初期狀態,使各缺陷部分以旋轉角度γ旋轉,並朝著角度α+γ所示方向的反方向往水平方向移動修正資訊所示的移動量h。Therefore, as described above, for each defective portion as a photographing object, using information indicating the defective portion and information indicating the position of the shooting area AP 1 (for example, information indicating the center point P 1 , etc.), the connection between the two ends of the defective portion is calculated The midpoint of the line segment is the angle θ t formed by the line orthogonal to the angle reference line, and the angle θ t is used to calculate the rotation angle γ of the workpiece 10 rotating around the rotation center, and then used to make the correction information show The rotation center of the workpiece 10 is the angle α indicating the moving direction for the purpose of moving, and the angle α+γ indicating the moving direction for moving the center of the workpiece 10 at the rotation angle γ to a predetermined position is calculated. Then, when photographing each defective part, the workpiece 10 is placed from the initial state of the mounting table 3021, and each defective part is rotated at a rotation angle γ, and is moved horizontally in a direction opposite to the direction indicated by the angle α+γ. The movement h shown.

藉此方式,工件10的中心就可配置於預先指定位置,且缺陷部分1901得以配置於拍攝區域AP1 内。In this way, the center of the workpiece 10 can be arranged at a predetermined position, and the defective portion 1901 can be arranged in the shooting area AP 1 .

此外,由於在工件10的中心配置於預先指定位置的狀態下,可以進行缺陷部分的拍攝,因此,例如工件10的形狀為圓形等時,可將拍攝所得影像中的工件10的邊緣位置對齊於大致相同位置,在比較複數個影像時,容易觀看,可提供高便利性的影像。In addition, since the center of the workpiece 10 is arranged at a predetermined position, the defective portion can be photographed. Therefore, for example, when the shape of the workpiece 10 is circular, the edge position of the workpiece 10 in the captured image can be aligned At approximately the same location, when comparing multiple images, it is easy to view and provides highly convenient images.

另外,上述的旋轉移動與水平方向移動的順序等,並不拘。In addition, the order of the above-mentioned rotational movement and horizontal movement does not matter.

再者,上述中所利用的計算式等僅為一例,本發明中,只要是可獲得實質上相同值者,也可使用其他計算式等。又,上述中所利用的角度等,只要是可獲得實質上相同值者,可藉由工件10的旋轉方向、作為0°的位置或基準線的設定等,而適當的變更使用。Furthermore, the calculation formulas and the like used in the above are only examples, and in the present invention, as long as substantially the same value can be obtained, other calculation formulas and the like may be used. In addition, as long as the angle and the like used in the above are substantially the same value, the rotation direction of the workpiece 10, the position as the 0°, the setting of the reference line, etc. can be appropriately changed and used.

而且,預先指定x軸等的直線或線段也可不必為表示使為了工件10的旋轉中心移動到工件10中心的方向的旋轉角度α的基準直線或線段,在此情形中,只要例如依據作為該旋轉角度α的基準直線與預先指定x軸等的直線或線段的傾斜等的差異程度,在使工件10移動時,將取得的移動方向、移動距離、或旋轉角度加以適當修正即可。此外,工件10的中心應配置的預先指定位置也可非為工件10載置於移動部302時的工件旋轉中心所在位置。此時,只要按照載置時的旋轉中心所在位置與載置工件10的預先指定位置的位置關係,將移動工件10時取得的移動方向、移動距離、或旋轉角度適當修正即可。In addition, the straight line or line segment that specifies the x-axis or the like in advance does not need to be a reference straight line or line segment that indicates the rotation angle α in the direction for moving the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the center of the workpiece 10. In this case, as long as The degree of difference between the reference straight line of the rotation angle α and the pre-specified straight line such as the x-axis or the inclination of the line segment may be appropriately corrected when the workpiece 10 is moved, the obtained moving direction, moving distance, or rotating angle. In addition, the predetermined position where the center of the workpiece 10 should be arranged may not be the position of the center of rotation of the workpiece when the workpiece 10 is placed on the moving portion 302. In this case, the movement direction, the movement distance, or the rotation angle obtained when the workpiece 10 is moved may be appropriately corrected according to the positional relationship between the position of the rotation center at the time of mounting and the predetermined position where the workpiece 10 is placed.

還有,上述的處理,主要是利用角度等來表示移動方向,但也可使用從角度或移動量等取得的座標等來取代角度。In addition, the above-mentioned processing mainly uses the angle and the like to indicate the moving direction, but it is also possible to use coordinates obtained from the angle or the moving amount and the like instead of the angle.

再者,上述的處理僅為一例,只要可取得實質上同樣的旋轉角度γ、或旋轉中心的移動方向等,本發明也可使用其他方法。In addition, the above-mentioned processing is only an example, and other methods may be used in the present invention as long as the rotation angle γ or the movement direction of the rotation center can be obtained substantially the same.

(2)不使工件在水平方向上移動的情況 例如,為了取得第一旋轉距離資訊,移動部302也可透過對處在載置於載置台3021狀態的工件10僅進行旋轉移動,使缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域。具體而言,移動部302可透過按照表示輸出部104輸出的缺陷部分位置的旋轉角度使工件10旋轉,而將缺陷部分適當配置在拍攝區域内。例如,可計算表示缺陷部分兩端位置的角度的平均角度,透過令工件10旋轉,使該角度與以旋轉中心及預先指定基準線為基準的拍攝區域中心點的方向角度一致,且令工件10移動,使缺陷部分的中心大致位於拍攝區域中心。(2) The case where the workpiece is not moved in the horizontal direction For example, in order to obtain the first rotation distance information, the moving unit 302 may move the defective part to the imaging area by only rotating the workpiece 10 that is placed on the mounting table 3021. Specifically, the moving unit 302 can rotate the workpiece 10 according to the rotation angle indicating the position of the defective portion output by the output unit 104 to appropriately arrange the defective portion within the imaging area. For example, you can calculate the average angle that represents the angle of the two ends of the defective part. By rotating the workpiece 10, the angle matches the direction angle of the center point of the shooting area based on the rotation center and the pre-specified reference line, and the workpiece 10 Move so that the center of the defective part is approximately at the center of the shooting area.

(3)使工件中心與工件旋轉用載置台的旋轉軸對準的情況 例如,移動部302設有將工件10從載置台3021拾起後,朝水平方向移動,再次將工件10載置於載置台3021上的升降裝置(未圖示)等,並利用輸出部104輸出的修正資訊,藉該升降裝置將工件10從載置台3021拾起,且利用輸出部104輸出的修正資訊,使工件10的中心移動,俾與使工件10旋轉的載置台3021的旋轉中心重疊,將工件10載置於載置台3021上。更且,如上所述,也可利用從缺陷部分取得的表示缺陷部分位置的角度θt ,使缺陷部分旋轉一旋轉角度γ,將缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域内。(3) When the center of the workpiece is aligned with the rotation axis of the workpiece rotation mounting table For example, the moving section 302 is provided with the workpiece 10 picked up from the mounting table 3021 and then moved in the horizontal direction, and the workpiece 10 is placed on the carrier again. The lifting device (not shown) on the table 3021, etc., and using the correction information output by the output unit 104, the workpiece 10 is picked up from the mounting table 3021 by the lifting device, and the correction information output by the output unit 104 is used to make the workpiece 10 The center of is moved so as to overlap the rotation center of the mounting table 3021 that rotates the workpiece 10, and the workpiece 10 is placed on the mounting table 3021. Moreover, as described above, it is also possible to use the angle θ t obtained from the defective portion to indicate the position of the defective portion, to rotate the defective portion by a rotation angle γ, and to move the defective portion into the imaging area.

此外,在載置台3021上,只要可使工件10的位置移動,也可使用上述升降裝置以外的裝置。In addition, as long as the position of the workpiece 10 can be moved on the mounting table 3021, a device other than the above-mentioned lifting device may be used.

再者,以下舉例說明本實施形態中移動部302藉由上述(1)的處理使工件10移動的情況。In the following, the case where the moving part 302 moves the workpiece 10 by the above-mentioned processing (1) is explained as an example.

在一個工件10的邊緣存在有複數個缺陷部分時,移動部302也可使各缺陷部分依序移動到拍攝區域。例如,拍攝部303毎次針對移動到拍攝區域的缺陷部分的拍攝結束時,移動部302就使下一個缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域。When a plurality of defective parts exist on the edge of one workpiece 10, the moving part 302 may also move each defective part to the imaging area in sequence. For example, when the imaging unit 303 completes the imaging of the defective portion moved to the imaging area every time, the moving portion 302 moves the next defective portion to the imaging area.

而且,移動部302也可就存在於一個工件10邊緣的複數個缺陷部分中,使位置接近的複數個缺陷部分統一移動到相同的拍攝區域。所謂位置接近的缺陷部分,是指例如位於預先指定範圍的缺陷部分,舉具體例而言,表示缺陷部分位置的旋轉角度是為位在預先指定範圍的缺陷部分。預先指定範圍是指例如工件10邊緣可一次落在拍攝區域内的範圍以下的範圍。例如,移動部302也可將工件10移動,使接近且位於邊緣的複數個缺陷部分中將兩端缺陷部分位置作二等分的位置位於拍攝區域的中央。在此情況中,只要將接近的複數個缺陷部分視為一個缺陷部分,使用表示其兩端位置的旋轉角度等,令接近的複數個缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域内即可。該處理也可以為使接近的缺陷部分群組化移動的處理。Furthermore, the moving part 302 may exist in the plurality of defective parts on the edge of one work 10, and move the plurality of defective parts close to the same imaging area in a unified manner. The so-called defective part in close proximity refers to, for example, a defective part located in a predetermined range. To be specific, the rotation angle indicating the position of the defective part is a defective part located in the predetermined range. The pre-specified range refers to, for example, a range where the edge of the workpiece 10 can fall within a range of the shooting area at a time. For example, the moving unit 302 may move the workpiece 10 so that a position that bisects the position of the defect portion at both ends among the plurality of defect portions that are close to and located at the edge is located in the center of the imaging area. In this case, as long as the plurality of adjacent defect parts are regarded as one defect part, the rotation angles indicating the positions of both ends thereof, etc. are used to move the plurality of adjacent defect parts into the shooting area. This process may also be a process of grouping and moving close defect parts.

移動部302也可在工件10的邊緣缺陷部分中,僅使檢測部306檢測到的一個以上缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域。所謂檢測部306檢測到的缺陷部分,是指工件10邊緣相對於其他缺陷部分其大小為較大的一個以上缺陷部分。關於檢測部306的處理等,容於後述。The moving part 302 may move only one or more defective parts detected by the detecting part 306 to the imaging area among the edge defect parts of the workpiece 10. The defective portion detected by the detection unit 306 refers to one or more defective portions whose edge size of the workpiece 10 is larger than other defective portions. The processing of the detection unit 306 will be described later.

還有,針對一個工件10的一個以上缺陷部分的拍攝結束時,移動部302也可使用例如為了要將對準位置狀態的工件10遞交給後段的工件輸送裝置2等,而使用輸出部104輸出的工件10的對準位置用資訊、或工件10的朝向特定用資訊等,將工件10移動,俾使工件10的中心配置於上述的預先指定位置,且工件10的朝向形成為預先指定的朝向。In addition, when the imaging of one or more defective parts of one workpiece 10 is completed, the moving unit 302 may use, for example, the output unit 104 to output the workpiece 10 in the aligned state to the subsequent workpiece conveying device 2 and the like. Information for the alignment position of the workpiece 10, or information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10, etc., to move the workpiece 10 so that the center of the workpiece 10 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position, and the orientation of the workpiece 10 is formed into the predetermined direction .

而且,一個工件10沒有缺陷部分時,移動部302也可不進行使上述的缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域的處理。例如,輸出部104輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊表示工件10無缺陷時,也可不進行使上述的缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域的處理。In addition, when there is no defective part in one workpiece 10, the moving part 302 may not perform the process of moving the defective part to the imaging area. For example, when the output unit 104 outputs information about the defective part to indicate that the workpiece 10 is free of defects, the process of moving the defective part to the imaging area may not be performed.

另外,除上述說明外,移動部302也可適當進行與上述實施形態1中說明的轉盤52、轉盤旋轉機構53、電動馬達54等同樣的動作等。In addition to the above description, the moving unit 302 may appropriately perform operations similar to those of the turntable 52, turntable rotating mechanism 53, and electric motor 54 described in the first embodiment.

移動部302也可設有用以計算移動距離或旋轉角度等資訊的MPU或記憶體等構成。用以計算移動距離或旋轉角度等的處理程序等,一般是以軟體來實現,而該軟體則記錄於ROM等記錄媒體。但,也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。The moving unit 302 may be provided with an MPU or a memory for calculating information such as a moving distance or a rotation angle. The processing program for calculating the moving distance, the rotation angle, etc. is generally realized by software, and the software is recorded in a recording medium such as ROM. However, it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuits).

另外,此處是以移動部302構成邊緣位置檢測器301的一部分的情況為例來說明,但移動部302也可以為非屬邊緣位置檢測器301的一部分。In addition, here, the case where the moving unit 302 constitutes a part of the edge position detector 301 will be described as an example, but the moving unit 302 may be a part not belonging to the edge position detector 301.

拍攝部303拍攝配置於拍攝區域内的工件的邊緣缺陷部分。所謂拍攝缺陷部分,是指例如拍攝配置有缺陷部分的拍攝區域内。拍攝部303是指備有CCD(感光耦合元件)或CMOS(互補金氧半導體)等影像感測器的照相機。拍攝部303可配置成例如其拍攝區域包含中心配置於預先指定位置之配置狀態的工件10的一部分邊緣及其周邊的區域。拍攝部303一般設置成其光軸對工件10的表面成垂直。拍攝部303的設置位置較佳為可朝水平方向移動,使拍攝區域可按照工件10的規格而變更。拍攝部303以例如治具等安裝於工件處理裝置3。在此情況中,移動部302即使令工件10移動,拍攝部303的位置也不移動。The imaging unit 303 photographs the edge defect portion of the workpiece arranged in the imaging area. The imaging of a defective portion refers to, for example, imaging an imaging area where the defective portion is arranged. The imaging unit 303 refers to a camera equipped with an image sensor such as a CCD (photosensitive coupling element) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor). The imaging unit 303 may be configured such that, for example, its imaging area includes a part of the edge of the workpiece 10 and its surrounding area in an arrangement state where the center is arranged at a predetermined position. The imaging unit 303 is generally arranged such that its optical axis is perpendicular to the surface of the work 10. The installation position of the imaging unit 303 is preferably movable in the horizontal direction so that the imaging area can be changed according to the specifications of the workpiece 10. The imaging unit 303 is attached to the workpiece processing device 3 with, for example, a jig. In this case, even if the moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10, the position of the imaging unit 303 does not move.

拍攝部303一般具有用以使來自拍攝對象的光成像於影像感測器的受光面的光學系。而且,拍攝部303也可具備用以對拍攝區域或其周邊實施照明的照明器具,例如環狀照明等。以拍攝部303而言,較佳為使用高解析度的可拍攝缺陷部分之影像者。以拍攝部303的一個例子而言,可使用例如視角為3mm四方、像素數35萬像素的CCD照相機等。還有,作為拍攝部303,也可用例如民生用數位照相機。拍攝部303拍攝的影像可為彩色影像、也可為灰階影像。影像的顏色深度等並不拘。拍攝部303拍攝的影像一般為静止影像,但也可為動態影像。拍攝部303可以固定焦點進行拍攝,也可以自動對焦進行拍攝。拍攝部303取得的影像的數據形式等並不拘。另外,也可使用以線感測器掃描進行拍攝的所謂掃描器等,作為拍攝部303。The imaging unit 303 generally has an optical system for imaging light from a subject on the light-receiving surface of the image sensor. In addition, the imaging unit 303 may include a lighting device for illuminating the imaging area or its surroundings, for example, ring lighting. For the imaging unit 303, it is preferable to use a high-resolution image capable of imaging a defective portion. As an example of the imaging unit 303, for example, a CCD camera with a viewing angle of 3 mm square and a pixel number of 350,000 pixels can be used. In addition, as the imaging unit 303, for example, a digital camera for livelihood can be used. The image captured by the imaging unit 303 may be a color image or a grayscale image. The color depth of the image is not limited. The image captured by the imaging unit 303 is generally a still image, but may also be a moving image. The shooting unit 303 may shoot with a fixed focus, or may shoot with autofocus. The data format of the video acquired by the imaging unit 303 is not limited. In addition, a so-called scanner or the like that scans and photographs with a line sensor may be used as the imaging unit 303.

在例如移動部302將一個缺陷部分或者一個接近的缺陷部分的組移動到拍攝區域時,拍攝部303就進行缺陷部分的拍攝。但,也可按照未圖示的受理部等受理的使用者的指示來進行拍攝。When, for example, the moving unit 302 moves a defective portion or a group of close defective portions to the imaging area, the imaging unit 303 performs imaging of the defective portion. However, imaging may be performed in accordance with an instruction of a user accepted by an accepting unit or the like (not shown).

拍攝部303也可在工件10的邊緣缺陷部分中僅拍攝後述的檢測部306所檢測的缺陷部分。藉此方式,工件10的邊緣的複數個缺陷部分中,就可選擇性地僅拍攝其大小相對於其他缺陷部分為較大的一個以上缺陷部分。The imaging unit 303 may image only the defective part detected by the detection unit 306 described later among the edge defect parts of the workpiece 10. In this way, among the plurality of defective parts at the edge of the workpiece 10, only one or more defective parts whose size is larger than other defective parts can be selectively photographed.

還有,工件處理裝置3也可具備複數個拍攝部303。例如,也可具備不同拍攝區域、或者部分重疊的拍攝區域的複數個拍攝部303。複數個拍攝部303為例如分別具有沿著中心為配置於預先指定位置的工件的邊緣的配置區域的複數個拍攝部。該複數個拍攝部303也可例如實質上與一個拍攝部同樣地同時進行拍攝等。透過採用此方式,就可同時拍攝同時存在於廣闊範圍的複數個缺陷部分的組,拍攝或以拍攝為目的的移動所費的時間就可縮短。In addition, the workpiece processing device 3 may include a plurality of imaging units 303. For example, a plurality of imaging units 303 with different imaging regions or partially overlapping imaging regions may be provided. The plurality of imaging units 303 are, for example, a plurality of imaging units each having an arrangement area along the center of the edge of the workpiece arranged at a predetermined position. The plurality of imaging units 303 may, for example, perform imaging at the same time as substantially one imaging unit. By adopting this method, it is possible to simultaneously photograph a plurality of groups of defective parts that exist in a wide range at the same time, and the time taken for photographing or moving for the purpose of photographing can be shortened.

修正缺陷位置取得部304使用輸出部104所輸出的使工件10對準位置用的資訊、工件10的朝向特定用資訊、及工件10的關於邊緣缺陷部分的資訊,以工件10的中心及針對該工件的特定朝向作為基準,而取得修正缺陷位置資訊,該修正缺陷位置資訊為表示前述工件的缺陷部分位置的資訊。修正缺陷位置資訊為例如以工件10的中心及有關該工件的特定朝向作為基準而修正的缺陷的位置資訊。工件10的朝向特定用資訊為例如表示定向扁平部面等工件10缺口部的位置資訊。表示缺口部位置的資訊為例如表示缺口部的兩端連結線段的中點位置的資訊。表示缺口部位置的資訊為例如缺口部的兩端連結線段的中點與工件10中心的連結線段的旋轉角度。修正缺陷位置資訊為例如以藉工件10的中心及針對缺口部的位置所特定的位置為基準來表示工件10的邊緣缺陷位置的資訊。具體而言,修正缺陷位置資訊為表示缺口部位置的點與工件10的中心的連結線段、及表示工件10的邊緣缺陷部分的點與工件10的中心的連結線所形成的角度。表示缺口部位置的點為例如連結缺口部兩端的線段的中點。表示缺陷部分位置的點為例如連結缺陷部分兩端的線段的中點。The correction defect position obtaining unit 304 uses the information for aligning the workpiece 10 output by the output unit 104, the information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10, and the information about the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10, with the center of the workpiece 10 and The specific orientation of the workpiece is used as a reference to obtain corrected defect position information, which is information indicating the position of the defective portion of the aforementioned workpiece. The corrected defect position information is, for example, position information of a defect corrected based on the center of the workpiece 10 and the specific orientation of the workpiece as a reference. The information for specifying the orientation of the work 10 is, for example, information indicating the position of the notch of the work 10 such as an oriented flat surface. The information indicating the position of the notch is, for example, information indicating the position of the midpoint of the connecting line segment at both ends of the notch. The information indicating the position of the notch is, for example, the rotation angle of the connecting line between the midpoint of the two ends of the notch and the line connecting the center of the workpiece 10. The corrected defect position information is, for example, information indicating the edge defect position of the workpiece 10 based on the position specified by the center of the workpiece 10 and the position specified for the position of the notch. Specifically, the corrected defect position information is an angle formed by a connecting line segment indicating the position of the notch portion and the center of the workpiece 10 and a connecting line indicating the point of the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10 and the center of the workpiece 10. The point indicating the position of the notch is, for example, the midpoint of a line segment connecting both ends of the notch. The point indicating the position of the defective portion is, for example, the midpoint of a line segment connecting both ends of the defective portion.

所謂以工件10的中心及針對該工件所特定的朝向為基準,雖將該特定的朝向設定為旋轉角度的基準,例如設定在相當於0°的位置,但也可為設定在0°以外的期望旋轉角度,而且,也可將按照該朝向而特定的朝向設定為旋轉角度的基準等。The so-called reference is based on the center of the workpiece 10 and the orientation specified for the workpiece. Although the specific orientation is set as the reference of the rotation angle, for example, it is set at a position corresponding to 0°, but it may be set at a position other than 0°. The rotation angle is desired, and the direction specified according to the direction may be set as a reference for the rotation angle or the like.

如在上文中使用圖19作說明,缺陷部分兩端的中點與工件10的中心的連結線段與正交於預先指定直線的直線(例如,圖19的y軸等)所形成的角度,是與連結缺陷部分兩端的直線和預先指定直線(例如,圖19的x軸)所形成的角度相同,該角度可從表示缺陷部分兩端位置的資訊取得。因此,透過針對各缺陷部分取得該角度,就可計算缺陷部分兩端的中點以工件10的中心作為旋轉中心時的旋轉角度。透過使用輸出部104等輸出的缺口部兩端位置的資訊,也可針對缺口部計算出同樣的旋轉角度。然後,透過從依此方式計算所得的各缺陷部分的旋轉角度減去缺口部的旋轉角度,就可取得修正缺陷位置資訊,該修正缺陷位置資訊係為以缺口部與工件10之中心的連結線作為基準的各缺陷部分的旋轉角度。As described above using FIG. 19, the angle formed by the connecting line segment between the midpoints of the two ends of the defective portion and the center of the workpiece 10 and a line orthogonal to a predetermined line (for example, the y-axis of FIG. 19, etc.) is equal to The angle formed by the straight line connecting the two ends of the defective portion and the pre-specified straight line (for example, the x-axis in FIG. 19) can be obtained from information indicating the positions of both ends of the defective portion. Therefore, by obtaining this angle for each defective portion, it is possible to calculate the rotation angle when the center point of both ends of the defective portion has the center of the workpiece 10 as the rotation center. The same rotation angle can also be calculated for the notch by using the information on the positions of both ends of the notch that are output by the output unit 104 or the like. Then, by subtracting the rotation angle of the notch from the rotation angle of each defective part calculated in this way, the corrected defect position information can be obtained, and the corrected defect position information is the connecting line between the notch and the center of the workpiece 10 The rotation angle of each defective part as a reference.

此外,修正缺陷位置取得部304也可在取得修正缺陷位置資訊時適當利用移動部302使工件10移動時計算所得的缺陷部分中點與工件10的中心的連結直線的旋轉角度資訊等。依此方式可以為直接使用輸出部104輸出的工件10對準位置用資訊、工件10的朝向特定用資訊、工件10關於邊緣缺陷部分的資訊而取得修正缺陷位置資訊的動作、移動部302等使用這些資訊所得到的資訊以取得修正缺陷位置資訊的動作,同時在此也可以為使用輸出部104輸出的工件10的對準位置用資訊、工件10的朝向特定用資訊、及工件10關於邊緣缺陷部分的資訊來取得修正缺陷位置資訊的動作。In addition, when obtaining the corrected defect position information, the corrected defect position obtaining unit 304 may appropriately use the rotation angle information of the straight line connecting the center point of the defect portion and the center of the workpiece 10 calculated when the moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10. In this way, it is possible to use the information for correcting the position of the workpiece 10 directly output by the output unit 104, the information for specifying the orientation of the workpiece 10, the information about the edge defect of the workpiece 10, the movement unit 302, etc. The information obtained from these information is used to obtain the action of correcting the defect position information. At the same time, it can also be used for the alignment position information of the workpiece 10 output by the output unit 104, the orientation specific information of the workpiece 10, and the workpiece 10 about the edge defect Partial information to obtain the action to correct the defect location information.

影像輸出部305將拍攝部303拍攝的影像輸出。此處所謂的輸出包含例如顯示於監視器畫面、使用投影機進行投影、用印表機列印、往外部裝置傳送、儲存到記錄媒體、處理結果向其他處理裝置或其他程式等交遞的概念。The video output unit 305 outputs the video captured by the imaging unit 303. The output here includes concepts such as display on a monitor screen, projection using a projector, printing with a printer, transmission to an external device, storage to a recording medium, and delivery of processing results to other processing devices or other programs.

影像輸出部305例如使拍攝部303拍攝的影像、與對應該影像的工件10的識別符或缺陷部分識別符的至少一個形成對應並輸出。工件10的識別符可為各別分配給工件10的代碼等,也可為包含作為拍攝對象的工件的複數個工件所構成的工件群的表示批次的識別符(例如,代碼等)與表示該批次内作為拍攝對象的工件的順序的資訊(例如,第幾片等資訊)的組合。缺陷部分的識別符為分配給缺陷部分的編號等代碼。所謂與影像對應的工件10的識別符,是指作為影像拍攝對象的工件10的識別符。再者,所謂與影像對應的缺陷部分的識別符,是指作為影像拍攝對象的一個以上缺陷部分的識別符。影像輸出部305也可再使修正缺陷位置取得部304針對作為影像拍攝對象的缺陷部分所取得的修正缺陷位置資訊與影像形成對應並輸出。The video output unit 305 associates and outputs at least one of the identifier of the workpiece 10 corresponding to the image and the identifier of the defective portion, for example, the image captured by the imaging unit 303. The identifier of the workpiece 10 may be a code assigned to the workpiece 10 or the like, or may be an identifier (for example, a code, etc.) and a representation of a batch indicating a workpiece group including a plurality of workpieces to be photographed A combination of information (for example, information such as the number of pieces, etc.) of the order of workpieces to be photographed in the batch. The identifier of the defective part is a code such as a number assigned to the defective part. The identifier of the workpiece 10 corresponding to the video refers to the identifier of the workpiece 10 that is the object of image capture. In addition, the identifier of the defective part corresponding to a video refers to the identifier of one or more defective parts which are objects of video shooting. The image output unit 305 may further cause the corrected defect position acquisition unit 304 to obtain the corrected defect position information acquired for the defective portion of the image capturing object in correspondence with the image and output it.

影像輸出部305較佳為在顯示影像時能按照經由未圖示的受理部等受理的使用者等的指示進行顯示影像的放大、縮小、顯示範圍的移動等。依此方式,由於可以放大,只要拍攝部303拍攝的影像是高解析者,就可將邊緣的缺陷部分放大顯示,使難用肉眼確認的邊緣缺陷部分的形狀等容易確認。The video output unit 305 is preferably capable of zooming in and out of the displayed video, moving the display range, etc. in accordance with an instruction from a user or the like received via an unshown receiving unit or the like when displaying the video. In this way, since it can be enlarged, as long as the image captured by the imaging unit 303 is a high-resolution person, the defective portion of the edge can be enlarged and displayed, making it easy to confirm the shape of the defective portion of the edge that is difficult to confirm with the naked eye.

再者,顯示影像時,也可將表示影像比例尺的資訊,例如標度或刻度等,與影像重疊顯示。透過此種方式,缺陷部分的規格就容易掌握。而且,表示影像比例尺的資訊的顯示位置等,也可按照使用者的指示而變更。另外,標度或刻度等只要按照拍攝部303的解析度、或從拍攝部303至工件10的距離等適當計算,或按照解析度或距離從未圖示的儲存部等取得預先指定標度或刻度等即可。從拍攝部303至工件10的距離等也可使用例如測距用感測器(未圖示)等來取得。Furthermore, when displaying an image, information indicating the scale of the image, such as scale or scale, can also be displayed overlapping with the image. In this way, the specifications of the defective part are easy to grasp. Moreover, the display position of the information indicating the scale of the image, etc., can also be changed according to the user's instruction. In addition, the scale or scale may be appropriately calculated according to the resolution of the imaging unit 303 or the distance from the imaging unit 303 to the workpiece 10, or the pre-designated scale or Scale and so on. The distance from the imaging unit 303 to the workpiece 10 and the like can also be obtained using, for example, a sensor (not shown) for distance measurement.

影像輸出部305也可以為包含或不包含顯示器、印表機、通訊裝置或儲存裝置等的輸出裝置。影像輸出部305得由輸出裝置的驅動軟體、或輸出裝置的驅動軟體與輸出裝置等來實現。The image output unit 305 may be an output device including or not including a display, a printer, a communication device, a storage device, or the like. The image output unit 305 may be realized by the driver software of the output device, or the driver software and output device of the output device.

檢測部306使用輸出部104輸出關於工件10的邊緣缺陷部分的資訊,在工件10的邊緣缺陷部分中檢測出其缺陷大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分。所謂大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分,可以為越符合有關大小的預先指定條件就是為越大的缺陷部分。The detection unit 306 uses the output unit 104 to output information on the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10, and detects more than one defect portion having a larger defect size in the edge defect portion of the workpiece 10. The so-called more than one defective part of a larger size may be the larger defective part as the pre-specified condition of the relevant size is met.

檢測部306使用例如輸出部104輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊的表示缺陷部分旋轉角度範圍的資訊來檢測一個以上缺陷部分。檢測部306例如將旋轉角度範圍在預先指定的關於旋轉角度範圍的臨界值以上的缺陷部分進行檢測,當作缺陷部分之的小較大的一個以上缺陷部分。此外,也可在一個工件10的缺陷部分中自旋轉角度範圍較大者依序檢測預先指定數的缺陷部分,當作缺陷部分的大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分。The detection unit 306 detects more than one defective part using, for example, the output unit 104 outputs information about the defective part, which indicates the rotation angle range of the defective part. The detection unit 306 detects, for example, a defective part whose rotation angle range is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value for the rotation angle range, and regards it as one or more defective parts that are smaller and larger. In addition, it is also possible to sequentially detect a predetermined number of defective parts among the defective parts of one work piece 10 having a larger rotation angle range, and regard them as more than one defective part having a larger size of the defective part.

又,檢測部306使用例如輸出部104輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊的表示距離差資訊的資訊來檢測一個以上缺陷部分。檢測部306例如將與預先缺陷部分形成對應的距離差資訊的最大值在臨界值以上的缺陷部分當作缺陷部分的大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分來檢測。此外,也可在一個工件10的缺陷部分中從形成對應的距離差資訊的值較大者依序檢測預先指定數的缺陷部分,當作缺陷部分的大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分。與缺陷部分形成對應的距離差資訊也可以為表示缺陷部分之深度或高度的資訊。In addition, the detection unit 306 detects more than one defective part using, for example, the output unit 104 outputs information on the defective part indicating distance difference information. The detection unit 306 detects, for example, a defective part having a maximum value of distance difference information corresponding to a pre-defective part formation whose threshold value is greater than or equal to a critical value as one or more defective parts having a large size of the defective part. In addition, a predetermined number of defective parts may be detected in order from the one with a larger value of the corresponding distance difference information in the defective part of one work piece 10 as one or more defective parts having a larger size of the defective part. The distance difference information corresponding to the defective part may also be information indicating the depth or height of the defective part.

而且,檢測部306也可按照上述表示旋轉角度範圍的資訊與關於距離差資訊的資訊的組合,當作缺陷部分的大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分來檢測。例如,也可檢測旋轉角度範圍在臨界值以上且距離差資訊的值在臨界值以上的缺陷部分。又,也可檢測旋轉角度範圍的大小順位及距離差資訊的大小順位均在預定順位以内的缺陷部分。In addition, the detection unit 306 may detect as one or more defective parts having a larger size of the defective part according to the combination of the information indicating the rotation angle range and the information about the distance difference. For example, it is also possible to detect a defective portion where the rotation angle range is above the critical value and the value of the distance difference information is above the critical value. In addition, it is also possible to detect a defective part in which the magnitude order of the rotation angle range and the magnitude order of the distance difference information are within the predetermined order.

另外,檢測部306也可將符合上述以外條件的缺陷部分當作缺陷部分的大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分來檢測。In addition, the detection unit 306 may detect a defective portion that meets the conditions other than the above as one or more defective portions having a larger size of the defective portion.

評估部307使用影像輸出部305輸出的影像,來評估該影像所表示的缺陷部分。所謂評估缺陷部分,是指例如缺陷部分對工件10的影響的評估。例如,對檢測到有缺陷部分的工件10使用於後續程序時,該缺陷部分對工件10是否造成影響、造成何種影響等進行評估。所謂評估缺陷部分,也可為例如發生缺陷部分時,具有該缺陷部分的工件10在後續程序等中發生破裂等破損的可能性高低進行評估。缺陷部分的評估也可為工件10是否有異常的評估。The evaluation unit 307 uses the image output from the image output unit 305 to evaluate the defective part represented by the image. The so-called evaluation of a defective part refers to, for example, evaluation of the influence of the defective part on the workpiece 10. For example, when the workpiece 10 in which a defective part is detected is used in a subsequent procedure, whether or not the defective part affects the workpiece 10 and what kind of influence are caused are evaluated. The so-called evaluation of the defective part may be, for example, when the defective part occurs, the work piece 10 having the defective part may be evaluated for the possibility of breakage or the like during subsequent procedures or the like. The evaluation of the defective part may also be an evaluation of whether the workpiece 10 is abnormal.

例如,評估部307藉由圖形比對(pattern matching)進行影像所示缺陷部分的評估。例如,預先將使影像的圖形與對缺陷部分的評估結果形成對應而組成的資訊的一個以上評估圖形管理資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部等。接著,判斷影像輸出部305輸出的影像是否與各評估圖形管理資訊具有的影像圖形匹配,有匹配時,就取得與該影像圖形形成對應的評估結果。所謂影像圖形,是指例如影像特徵點的資訊。所謂影像特徵點則指例如缺陷部分的凸角數、凸角的位置、表示缺陷部分的寬度或深度等的資訊。具有可判斷為與影像圖形所示的特徵點一致的特徵點的影像即判斷為與影像圖形匹配的影像。評估部307也可在進行圖形匹配之前對影像輸出部305輸出的影像施行二值化等影像處理。For example, the evaluation unit 307 evaluates the defective portion shown in the image by pattern matching. For example, more than one evaluation pattern management information of information composed of information corresponding to the graphics of the image and the evaluation result of the defective part is stored in a storage unit (not shown) in advance. Next, it is determined whether the image output by the image output unit 305 matches the image pattern possessed by each evaluation pattern management information. If there is a match, an evaluation result corresponding to the image pattern is obtained. The so-called image graphics refer to information such as image feature points. The so-called image feature points refer to information such as the number of convex corners of the defective portion, the position of the convex corner, and the width or depth of the defective portion. An image having a feature point that can be determined to match the feature point shown in the image graphic is determined to be an image that matches the image graphic. The evaluation unit 307 may perform image processing such as binarization on the image output from the image output unit 305 before performing pattern matching.

另外,有關針對影像進行圖形匹配的處理是屬公知技術,其詳細說明在此容予省略。In addition, the process of performing image matching on images is a well-known technology, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

再者,評估部307也可透過例如進行影像類似搜尋以執行影像所示缺陷部分的評估。例如,預先將由評估用影像與對缺陷部分的評估結果形成對應而組成的資訊的一個以上評估影像管理資訊儲存於未圖示的儲存部等。然後,取得影像輸出部305輸出的影像和各評估用影像的類似度,該類似度在預先指定的臨界值以上時,評估部307就取得與該評估用影像形成對應的評估結果。評估用影像為例如拍攝部303所拍攝的一個以上影像。評估用影像為彩色影像、或灰階影像、二值化影像均可。影像間的類似度可為例如構成影像的像素值平均的比較、像素值的柱形圖(histogram)、從影像計算所得的每個頻率的振幅寬度的比較等,也可為二值化影像彼此間一致像素的比率等。Furthermore, the evaluation unit 307 may also perform evaluation of the defective portion shown in the image by performing image similarity search, for example. For example, one or more pieces of evaluation image management information consisting of information corresponding to the evaluation image and the evaluation result of the defective portion are stored in a storage unit (not shown) in advance. Then, the similarity between the image output by the image output unit 305 and each evaluation image is obtained. When the similarity is greater than a predetermined threshold value, the evaluation unit 307 obtains an evaluation result corresponding to the evaluation image. The evaluation image is, for example, one or more images captured by the imaging unit 303. The image for evaluation can be a color image, a grayscale image, or a binary image. The similarity between images may be, for example, comparison of average pixel values constituting the image, histogram of pixel values, comparison of amplitude width at each frequency calculated from the images, etc., or binarized images. The ratio of consistent pixels, etc.

再者,評估部307也可使用運用均方誤差的類似影像搜尋等其他公知的類似影像搜尋作為影像的類似搜尋。Furthermore, the evaluation unit 307 may also use other known similar image searches such as similar image search using mean square error as similar search of images.

另外,針對影像執行的類似搜尋、取得影像間類似度等的處理等,由於是屬公知技術,其詳細說明在此容予省略。In addition, since similar searches performed on images, processes for obtaining similarity between images, and the like are well-known technologies, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

評估結果只要是表示與缺陷部分相關的評估結果的資訊,任何資訊均可。例如,可為表示是否與工件10的破損關連可能性高的缺陷部分的資訊、或表示破損發生率範圍(例如,50%以上)等的資訊。此外,也可為表示發生何種異常的資訊。又,也可為表示工件10產生破損的資訊。而且,也可為這些資訊的2種以上組合。As long as the evaluation result is information indicating the evaluation result related to the defective part, any information is acceptable. For example, it may be information indicating whether there is a defective portion with a high possibility of being associated with the damage of the workpiece 10, or information indicating a range of damage occurrence rate (for example, 50% or more). In addition, it may be information indicating what kind of abnormality has occurred. In addition, it may be information indicating that the workpiece 10 is damaged. Moreover, it is also possible to combine two or more of these information.

另外,評估部307也可使用儲存於後述影像情況資訊儲存部310的影像情況資訊,來評估影像輸出部305輸出的影像所顯示的缺陷部分。例如,也可使用影像情況資訊內具有的關於拍攝部303所拍攝的缺陷部分影像的資訊、影像情況資訊所具有的影像所顯示的有關工件10的工件情況資訊,來評估缺陷部分。有關工件情況資訊,容後述。所謂影像情況資訊具有的關於缺陷部分影像的資訊,可為缺陷部分的影像本身,也可為自缺陷部分影像取得的特徵點資訊。In addition, the evaluation unit 307 may use the image situation information stored in the image situation information storage unit 310 described later to evaluate the defective portion displayed by the image output by the image output unit 305. For example, it is also possible to use the information about the defective part image captured by the shooting section 303 included in the image condition information and the workpiece condition information about the workpiece 10 displayed in the image included in the image condition information to evaluate the defective portion. Information about the condition of the workpiece will be described later. The so-called image condition information has information about the image of the defective part, which may be the image of the defective part itself, or the feature point information obtained from the image of the defective part.

例如,關於缺陷部分影像的資訊是指缺陷部分的影像時,評估部307即使用影像情況資訊具有的影像,對影像輸出部305輸出的影像進行與上述同樣的類似搜尋,從影像情況資訊取得與經判斷為類似的影像形成對應的工件情況資訊作為評估結果。這種情況的影像情況資訊也可以為上述的評估影像管理資訊。For example, when the information about the image of the defective part refers to the image of the defective part, the evaluation unit 307 uses the image of the image condition information to search for the image output by the image output unit 305 similarly to the above, and obtains from the image condition information and It is judged that similar images form corresponding workpiece condition information as the evaluation result. The image situation information in this case can also be the above-mentioned evaluation image management information.

再者,例如關於缺陷部分影像的資訊為缺陷部分影像之特徵點的資訊時,評估部307會對影像輸出部305輸出的影像,使用影像情況資訊具有的影像特徵點資訊,進行與上述同樣的圖形匹配,從影像情況資訊取得與經判斷為匹配的特徵點資訊形成對應的工件情況資訊,作為評估結果。此時的影像情況,可以為上述的評估圖形管理資訊。Furthermore, for example, when the information about the defective part image is the characteristic point information of the defective part image, the evaluation unit 307 performs the same as described above for the image output by the image output unit 305 using the image feature point information of the image situation information. Graphic matching, obtains the workpiece condition information corresponding to the feature point information determined to match from the image condition information as the evaluation result. The image situation at this time can be the management information for the above-mentioned evaluation graphics.

此外,評估部307也可使用儲存於後述影像情況資訊儲存部310的影像情況資訊,進行機器學習,並使用其機器學習的結果,執行影像輸出部305輸出的影像的評估。例如,可對影像情況資訊具有的影像特徵點與對於該影像所示的缺陷部分的工件情況資訊的一個或兩個以上的組加以學習,使用其學習結果,取得與從影像輸出部305輸出的影像取得的特徵點對應的工件情況資訊,作為評估結果。另外,有關機器學習的構成與處理,因與上述實施形態1相同,其詳細說明在此容予省略。In addition, the evaluation unit 307 may use the image situation information stored in the image situation information storage unit 310 described later to perform machine learning, and use the results of the machine learning to perform evaluation of the image output by the image output unit 305. For example, one or two or more groups of the image feature points of the image condition information and the workpiece condition information for the defective part shown in the image may be learned, and the result of the learning may be used to obtain and output from the image output unit 305 The information of the workpiece corresponding to the feature points obtained by the image is used as the evaluation result. In addition, the structure and processing of machine learning are the same as in the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

評估結果輸出部308會將評估部307所取得的評估結果輸出。評估結果輸出部308也可例如將評估結果與作為該評估結果的評估對象的影像所對應的工件識別符、或缺陷部分的識別符、或修正缺陷位置資訊形成對應並輸出。The evaluation result output unit 308 outputs the evaluation result obtained by the evaluation unit 307. The evaluation result output unit 308 may, for example, associate and output the evaluation result with the workpiece identifier corresponding to the image as the evaluation target of the evaluation result, the identifier of the defective part, or the corrected defect position information.

此處所謂的輸出包含例如顯示到監視器畫面、使用投影機進行投影、在印表機列印、往外部裝置傳送、儲存到記錄媒體、處理結果對其他處理裝置或其他程式等的交遞等概念。The output here includes, for example, display on a monitor screen, projection using a projector, printing on a printer, transmission to an external device, storage to a recording medium, and delivery of processing results to other processing devices or other programs, etc. concept.

評估結果輸出部308也可以為包含或不包含顯示器、印表機、通訊裝置、儲存裝置等輸出裝置。影像輸出部305得由輸出裝置的驅動軟體、或輸出裝置的驅動軟體與輸出裝置等來實現。The evaluation result output unit 308 may or may not include an output device such as a display, a printer, a communication device, or a storage device. The image output unit 305 may be realized by the driver software of the output device, or the driver software and output device of the output device.

情況受理部309受理工件情況資訊,該工件情況資訊是指表示有關經拍攝部303拍攝缺陷部分的工件10的缺陷部分拍攝後情況、且為對該工件10執行預先指定的一個或兩個以上處理後之情況的資訊。例如,情況受理部309會從使用者等受理工件情況資訊。The situation accepting unit 309 accepts workpiece condition information, which indicates that the defective part of the workpiece 10 is photographed by the imaging unit 303 after the defective part is photographed, and performs one or more pre-designated processes on the workpiece 10 Information on the latter situation. For example, the situation acceptance unit 309 accepts workpiece situation information from a user or the like.

所謂預先指定處理,是指例如對工件10執行的處理。若工件10為半導體晶圓,預先指定處理是指例如構成半導體製造程序的一個以上處理。The pre-designated processing refers to processing performed on the workpiece 10, for example. If the workpiece 10 is a semiconductor wafer, the pre-designated processing refers to, for example, one or more processing constituting a semiconductor manufacturing process.

所謂工件10的情況,可視為工件10的狀態,例如,工件10是否發生破損等異常、該異常是何種異常等。所謂何種異常,例如,異常為破損時,是指產生破裂或裂紋等如何破損的情形。工件10的情況也可為因存在於工件10的一個缺陷部分而起的工件情況。所謂因存在於工件10的一個缺陷部分而起的工件情況,是指例如在對應工件10的一個缺陷部分的位置開始從該缺陷部分產生裂紋的情形。The condition of the workpiece 10 can be regarded as the state of the workpiece 10, for example, whether an abnormality such as breakage occurs in the workpiece 10, and what kind of abnormality the abnormality is. What kind of abnormality is, for example, when the abnormality is damaged, refers to a situation in which cracks or cracks are damaged. The condition of the workpiece 10 may also be the condition of the workpiece caused by a defective portion existing in the workpiece 10. The so-called workpiece condition due to the presence of a defective portion of the workpiece 10 refers to, for example, a situation where cracks start to occur at a position corresponding to a defective portion of the workpiece 10 from the defective portion.

工件情況資訊是指表示上述的工件10的情況的資訊。工件情況資訊是指例如表示即使工件10在拍攝後的處理中是否正常的資訊。或者,也可為表示在拍攝後的處理中工件10發生了何種異常的資訊。此外,工件情況資訊也可為拍攝後的處理已結束的工件10的評估值或指標等。The workpiece condition information refers to information indicating the condition of the workpiece 10 described above. The workpiece condition information refers to, for example, information indicating whether or not the workpiece 10 is normal in processing after shooting. Alternatively, it may be information indicating what kind of abnormality occurred in the workpiece 10 during the processing after shooting. In addition, the workpiece condition information may also be an evaluation value or an index of the workpiece 10 whose processing after shooting has been completed.

例如,情況受理部309會受理工件10的識別符、或與缺陷部分識別符形成對應的工件情況資訊。例如,對一個工件10在拍攝後的後續程序中檢測到有異常時,即同時將工件10的識別符與工件情況資訊受理。For example, the situation acceptance unit 309 accepts the identifier of the workpiece 10 or the workpiece situation information corresponding to the identifier of the defective part. For example, when an abnormality is detected in a subsequent program after shooting for a workpiece 10, the identifier of the workpiece 10 and the workpiece condition information are simultaneously accepted.

此處所謂的受理是指例如從輸入裝置的受理、或傳送自其他機器等的輸入訊號的接收、或自記錄媒體等的資訊讀取等。用以受理工件情況資訊的輸入裝置可為經由數字鍵、鍵盤、滑鼠或選單畫面等任何一種。情況受理部309得以數字鍵、鍵盤等輸入裝置的裝置驅動器、選單畫面的控制軟體等來實現。The reception here refers to, for example, reception from an input device, reception of an input signal transmitted from another device, or reading of information from a recording medium. The input device used to receive the workpiece condition information can be any one of numeric keys, keyboard, mouse, or menu screen. The situation accepting unit 309 can be realized by a device driver of an input device such as a numeric key or a keyboard, control software of a menu screen, or the like.

影像情況資訊儲存部310是供儲存影像情況資訊,該影像情況資訊內的資訊具有關於影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分影像的資訊、及工件情況資訊。關於缺陷部分影像的資訊是指例如利用在圖形匹配或影像類似搜尋的影像所取得的資訊。關於缺陷部分影像的資訊可為例如缺陷部分的影像本身、對缺陷部分影像進行二值化等影像處理所得的影像、也可為從缺陷部分影像取得的特徵點的資訊、也可為對缺陷部分影像施行過濾處理等預先指定處理所得的資訊。而且,關於缺陷部分影像的資訊可為具有這些資訊中的2種以上的資訊。儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310的工件情況資訊為例如情況受理部309所受理的情況資訊。The image condition information storage section 310 is for storing image condition information, and the information in the image condition information has information about the defective part image output by the image output section 305 and workpiece condition information. The information about the image of the defective part refers to, for example, information obtained by using an image searched for pattern matching or image similarity. The information about the image of the defective part may be, for example, the image of the defective part itself, the image obtained by performing binarization on the image of the defective part, or the information of the feature points obtained from the image of the defective part, or the information about the defective part Information obtained by pre-specified processing such as image filtering. Furthermore, the information about the image of the defective part may be more than two kinds of information among these information. The workpiece situation information stored in the image situation information storage unit 310 is, for example, situation information accepted by the situation acceptance unit 309.

影像情況資訊累積儲存部311將影像情況資訊儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310,該影像情況資訊具有影像輸出部305輸出關於缺陷部分影像的資訊、及情況受理部309所受理有關該缺陷部分的工件情況資訊。例如,影像情況資訊累積儲存部311會將影像情況資訊累積儲存,而該影像情況資訊則具有影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分影像、及有關該缺陷部分的工件情況資訊。此外,例如影像情況資訊累積儲存部311也可從影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分影像取得上述關於該影像的資訊,並將具有所取得關於該影像的資訊、及有關該缺陷部分的工件情況資訊的影像情況資訊加以累積儲存。The image condition information accumulation storage section 311 stores the image condition information in the image condition information storage section 310, the image condition information having information about the image of the defective portion output by the image output section 305, and the workpiece about the defective portion accepted by the condition acceptance section 309 Situation information. For example, the image condition information accumulation storage unit 311 accumulates the image condition information, and the image condition information has a defective part image output by the image output unit 305 and workpiece condition information about the defective part. In addition, for example, the image condition information accumulation storage unit 311 may also obtain the above-mentioned information about the image from the defective part image output by the image output unit 305, and will have the obtained information about the image and the workpiece condition information about the defective part The image information of the image is accumulated and stored.

所謂有關缺陷部分的工件情況資訊,可為有關一個缺陷部分的工件情況資訊,也可為有關具有一個缺陷部分的工件的工件情況資訊。影像情況資訊累積儲存部311在受理例如指定一個以上缺陷部分影像的資訊、及這些影像表示的有關缺陷部分的一個工件情況資訊時,將關於該缺陷部分影像的資訊與所受理的工件情況資訊形成對應,並儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310。The so-called workpiece condition information about the defective part may be the workpiece condition information about a defective part or the workpiece condition information about the workpiece having a defective part. The image condition information accumulation storage unit 311, when accepting, for example, information specifying more than one defective part image, and a piece of workpiece condition information about the defective part represented by these images, forms the information about the defective part image and the received workpiece condition information Correspondingly, and stored in the image situation information storage unit 310.

例如,情況受理部309受理了由工件的識別符與該該工件的缺陷部分識別符形成對應的工件情況資訊時,影像情況資訊累積儲存部311可將影像情況資訊儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310,而該影像情況資訊以形成對應方式具有:影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分影像中與該工件識別符一致的工件識別符形成對應且與該缺陷部分識別符一致的缺陷部分識別符形成對應的一個以上缺陷部分影像、及所受理的工件情況資訊。For example, when the situation acceptance unit 309 accepts the workpiece condition information corresponding to the workpiece identifier and the defective part identifier of the workpiece, the image situation information accumulation storage unit 311 may store the image situation information in the image situation information storage unit 310 , And the image situation information is formed in a corresponding manner: the defective part image output by the image output unit 305 corresponds to the workpiece identifier corresponding to the workpiece identifier and the defective part identifier corresponding to the defective part identifier corresponds to More than one defective part of the image, and the information of the accepted workpiece condition.

例如,情況受理部309受理了與工件的識別符形成對應的工件情況資訊時,影像情況資訊累積儲存部311可將影像情況資訊儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310,而該影像情況資訊以形成對應方式而具有:影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分影像中與該工件識別符一致的工件識別符形成對應的一個以上缺陷部分影像、及所受理的工件情況資訊。For example, when the situation acceptance unit 309 accepts the workpiece situation information corresponding to the identifier of the workpiece, the image situation information accumulation storage unit 311 may store the image situation information in the image situation information storage unit 310, and the image situation information is formed into a correspondence According to the method, one or more defective part images corresponding to the workpiece identifier corresponding to the workpiece identifier in the defective part image output by the image output unit 305 and the received workpiece condition information are formed.

另外,也可藉由本實施形態的工件處理裝置3、及上述實施形態1中說明的工件輸送裝置2來構成工件輸送系統。例如,該工件輸送系統為在圖4等所示的上述實施形態1的工件輸送系統1000中設置工件處理裝置3,以取代工件處理裝置,而獲得的工件輸送系統。In addition, the workpiece conveying system may be constituted by the workpiece processing apparatus 3 of the present embodiment and the workpiece conveying apparatus 2 described in the first embodiment described above. For example, this workpiece conveyance system is a workpiece conveyance system obtained by installing a workpiece processing device 3 in the workpiece conveyance system 1000 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 4 etc. instead of the workpiece processing device.

接著,使用圖20的流程圖就本實施形態的工件處理裝置3的動作加以說明。本實施形態的工件處理裝置3進行的處理與圖6所示的上述實施形態1的工件處理裝置1相同,同時,圖6所示的處理進行以下圖20所示的處理,作為從步驟S119至返回步驟S100間的處理。具體而言,在圖6的步驟S119之後就開始圖20處理,圖20的處理結束時,返回圖6的步驟S100。另外,有關圖6所示的處理的說明,在此容予省略。Next, the operation of the workpiece processing device 3 of this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 20. The processing performed by the workpiece processing apparatus 3 of this embodiment is the same as the workpiece processing apparatus 1 of the above-described embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 6, and at the same time, the processing shown in FIG. 6 performs the following processing shown in FIG. 20 as from step S119 to The process returns to step S100. Specifically, the process of FIG. 20 is started after step S119 of FIG. 6, and when the process of FIG. 20 ends, the process returns to step S100 of FIG. 6. Note that the description of the processing shown in FIG. 6 will be omitted here.

(步驟S301)移動部302從輸出部104輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊來判斷工件10的邊緣有無一個以上缺陷部分。若有,則進到步驟S302;若無,則進到步驟S314。(Step S301) The moving part 302 outputs information about the defective part from the output part 104 to determine whether there is more than one defective part at the edge of the workpiece 10. If yes, go to step S302; if no, go to step S314.

(步驟S302)檢測部306從缺陷部分中檢測大小較大的一個以上缺陷部分。還有,缺陷部分只有一個時,可省略該處理。此外,無法檢測到大小較大的缺陷部分時,可進到步驟S314。(Step S302) The detection unit 306 detects one or more defective parts having a large size from the defective parts. In addition, when there is only one defective part, this process can be omitted. In addition, when a defective part with a large size cannot be detected, it is possible to proceed to step S314.

(步驟S303)移動部302將1代入計數器k。(Step S303) The moving unit 302 substitutes 1 into the counter k.

(步驟S304)移動部302使用第k個缺陷部分的旋轉角度等表示位置的資訊,使工件10的中心移動到預先指定位置,且取得令第k個缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域時所需要的工件10的旋轉角度。(Step S304) The moving part 302 uses the information indicating the position such as the rotation angle of the k-th defective portion to move the center of the workpiece 10 to a predetermined position, and acquires the workpiece required to move the k-th defective portion to the imaging area The rotation angle of 10.

(步驟S305)移動部302取得使工件10及第k個缺陷部分移動到與上述同樣的位置時所需要的工件10的水平方向移動量。所謂的水平方向移動量,是指用以使工件10朝水平方向移動的距離、角度、移動方向、x軸方向的移動距離、y軸方向的移動距離等資訊。(Step S305) The moving unit 302 obtains the amount of horizontal movement of the workpiece 10 required to move the workpiece 10 and the k-th defective portion to the same position as described above. The horizontal movement amount refers to information such as a distance, an angle, a movement direction, a movement distance in the x-axis direction, and a movement distance in the y-axis direction for moving the workpiece 10 in the horizontal direction.

(步驟S306)移動部302依照步驟S304及步驟S305所取得的旋轉角度資訊及水平方向移動量,令工件10移動,使第k個缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域。(Step S306) The moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10 according to the rotation angle information and the horizontal movement amount obtained in step S304 and step S305, and moves the k-th defective portion to the imaging area.

(步驟S307)拍攝部303對工件10的第k個缺陷部分進行拍攝。(Step S307) The imaging unit 303 images the k-th defective portion of the workpiece 10.

(步驟S308)修正缺陷位置取得部304針對第k個缺陷部分取得修正缺陷位置資訊。例如,針對第k個缺陷部分及缺口部分,分別取得以工件10的中心為旋轉中心時的旋轉角度,並取得其差值作為修正缺陷位置資訊。(Step S308) The corrected defect position obtaining unit 304 obtains corrected defect position information for the k-th defect portion. For example, for the k-th defect portion and the notch portion, the rotation angle when the center of the workpiece 10 is the rotation center is obtained, and the difference is obtained as corrected defect position information.

(步驟S309)影像輸出部305將拍攝部303拍攝的影像輸出。例如,影像輸出部305會使影像與工件10的識別符或第k個缺陷部分的識別符、或步驟308取得有關第k個缺陷部分的修正缺陷位置資訊等形成對應,並輸出。例如,影像輸出部305會將影像儲存於未圖示的儲存部。而且,影像輸出部305也可將影像顯示於監視器等。(Step S309) The video output unit 305 outputs the video captured by the imaging unit 303. For example, the image output unit 305 associates the image with the identifier of the workpiece 10 or the identifier of the k-th defect portion, or obtains corrected defect position information about the k-th defect portion in step 308, and outputs the result. For example, the image output unit 305 stores the image in a storage unit (not shown). Furthermore, the video output unit 305 may display the video on a monitor or the like.

(步驟S310)評估部307使用步驟S309儲存的影像,進行顯示於該影像的第k個的缺陷部分的評估。例如,從儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310的影像情況資訊所具有的影像圖形中,藉由圖形匹配而檢測出與第k個缺陷部分的影像匹配的影像圖形,並取得與檢測所得的圖形形成對應的工件情況資訊,作為評估結果。(Step S310) The evaluation unit 307 uses the image stored in step S309 to evaluate the k-th defective portion displayed on the image. For example, from the image patterns included in the image condition information stored in the image condition information storage unit 310, the image patterns that match the image of the k-th defective portion are detected by pattern matching, and the pattern formed by the detection is obtained The corresponding workpiece condition information is used as the evaluation result.

(步驟S311)評估結果輸出部308將評估結果輸出。例如,顯示於監視器等。(Step S311) The evaluation result output section 308 outputs the evaluation result. For example, it is displayed on a monitor.

(步驟S312)移動部302將計數器k之值遞增1。(Step S312) The moving unit 302 increments the value of the counter k by one.

(步驟S313)移動部302判斷有無第k個缺陷部分。若有,則返回步驟S304;若無,則進到步驟S314。(Step S313) The moving unit 302 determines whether there is a k-th defective portion. If yes, go back to step S304; if no, go to step S314.

(步驟S314)移動部302使缺口部朝預先指定方向移動,且取得工件10之中心移動到預先指定位置時所必須的工件10的旋轉角度。(Step S314) The moving part 302 moves the notch part in the predetermined direction, and acquires the rotation angle of the workpiece 10 necessary when the center of the workpiece 10 moves to the predetermined position.

(步驟S315)移動部302使缺口部朝預先指定方向移動,且取得使工件10的中心移動到預先指定位置時所必須的工件10的水平方向移動量。(Step S315) The moving unit 302 moves the notch in a predetermined direction, and acquires the amount of horizontal movement of the workpiece 10 necessary to move the center of the workpiece 10 to the predetermined position.

(步驟S316)移動部302依照步驟S314取得的旋轉角度及步驟S315取得的移動量,使工件10移動。該移動為例如用以使工件10與工件輸送裝置2等對準位置並遞交的移動。然後,結束處理。該處理結束時,返回圖6的步驟S100。(Step S316) The moving unit 302 moves the workpiece 10 in accordance with the rotation angle obtained in step S314 and the movement amount obtained in step S315. This movement is, for example, a movement to align and deliver the work 10 and the work conveying device 2. Then, the process ends. When this process ends, it returns to step S100 in FIG. 6.

此外,本實施形態的工件處理裝置3中,在圖6所示流程圖的步驟S122,判斷為非設定臨界值的時機後,再進行判斷情況受理部309是否已受理工件情況資訊的處理;已受理工件情況資訊時,影像情況資訊累積儲存部311可將具有所受理的工件情況資訊、及與該工件情況資訊對應的關於缺陷部分影像的資訊的影像情況資訊儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310,並返回步驟S100;若未受理時,返回步驟S100。In addition, in the workpiece processing device 3 of the present embodiment, after step S122 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 6 determines that the timing of the threshold is not set, the processing for determining whether the situation acceptance unit 309 has accepted the workpiece situation information is performed; When accepting workpiece condition information, the image condition information accumulation storage section 311 may store the image condition information having the accepted workpiece condition information and the information about the defective part image corresponding to the workpiece condition information in the image condition information storage section 310, And return to step S100; if not accepted, return to step S100.

再者,圖20所示的流程圖中,在步驟S316,移動部302移動工件10後,工件10例如藉由工件輸送裝置2等從工件處理裝置3往其他裝置等輸送。此外,此處省略說明,惟工件輸送裝置2將工件安置於移動部302的載置台3021等時,工件處理裝置3可與一般所謂對準器等同樣,使工件10旋轉,且針對工件10取得第一旋轉距離資訊,並儲存於第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部101。Furthermore, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 20, after the moving part 302 moves the workpiece 10 in step S316, the workpiece 10 is conveyed from the workpiece processing apparatus 3 to other apparatuses, for example, by the workpiece conveying apparatus 2 or the like. In addition, the description is omitted here, but when the workpiece conveying device 2 places the workpiece on the mounting table 3021 of the moving section 302 or the like, the workpiece processing device 3 can rotate the workpiece 10 and obtain the workpiece 10 in the same manner as a so-called aligner or the like. The first rotation distance information is stored in the first rotation distance information storage unit 101.

此外,圖20中,步驟S310與步驟S311等的處理、或影像輸出部305將缺陷部分的影像輸出的例如顯示的處理,可按照使用者等的指示適當進行。In addition, in FIG. 20, the processes of step S310 and step S311, or the process of outputting, for example, the display of the image of the defective portion by the video output unit 305, can be appropriately performed according to the instruction of the user or the like.

又,圖20所示的流程圖中,可將步驟S314及步驟S315的處理在步驟S301的瞬前進行;在步驟S301判斷為無缺陷部分時,進到步驟S316;在步驟S313判斷為無第k個缺陷部分時,也可進到步驟S316,並使用步驟S314及步驟S315取得的資訊,使工件10移動。In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 20, the processing of step S314 and step S315 can be performed immediately before step S301; when it is determined that there is no defective portion in step S301, it proceeds to step S316; in step S313, it is determined that there is no When there are k defective parts, it is also possible to proceed to step S316 and use the information obtained in step S314 and step S315 to move the workpiece 10.

其次,就本實施形態的工件處理裝置3的具體例加以說明。此外,此處是就由工件處理裝置3與工件輸送裝置2構成工件輸送系統的情況為例作說明。而且,該工件處理裝置3等雖可執行例如與上述實施形態1中說明的具體例同樣的處理,但此處,有關該處理等的詳細說明予以省略。Next, a specific example of the workpiece processing device 3 of this embodiment will be described. In addition, here, the case where the workpiece processing device 3 and the workpiece conveying device 2 constitute a workpiece conveying system will be described as an example. In addition, although the workpiece processing apparatus 3 and the like can perform the same processing as the specific example described in the first embodiment, for example, detailed description of the processing and the like will be omitted here.

與上述實施形態1的具體例同樣,工件處理裝置3針對一個工件10取得作為工件對準位置用的資訊的修正資訊、關於缺陷部分的資訊、及特定工件朝向用資訊,並設輸出部104已輸出這些資訊。輸出部104所輸出的修正資訊設為表示移動方向的旋轉角度α1 及移動長度h1 。而且,輸出部104所輸出關於缺陷部分的資訊,是與例如圖16所示者同樣,設為有關複數個缺陷部分的表示缺陷部分範圍的旋轉角度範圍與缺陷部分大小的最大值的組、或具有從工件10的旋轉中心至各缺陷部分兩端的長度等的資訊。此外,輸出部104所輸出的特定工件朝向用資訊,為表示與圖16所示者同樣的定向扁平部範圍的旋轉角度範圍。Similar to the specific example of the first embodiment described above, the workpiece processing device 3 acquires correction information as information for alignment of the workpiece, information about the defective portion, and information for specific workpiece orientation for one workpiece 10, and the output unit 104 has Output this information. The correction information output by the output unit 104 is set as the rotation angle α 1 and the movement length h 1 indicating the movement direction. Further, the information about the defective portion output by the output unit 104 is the same as, for example, as shown in FIG. 16, and is set to a group of a plurality of defective portions, a rotation angle range indicating the range of the defective portion, and a maximum value of the size of the defective portion, or It has information such as the length from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the ends of each defective portion. In addition, the information for the specific work orientation output by the output unit 104 is a range of rotation angles indicating the range of the oriented flat portion as shown in FIG. 16.

移動部302從輸出部104受理上述的資訊時,首先,判斷工件10中有無缺陷部分。此處,因關於缺陷部分的資訊表示具有缺陷部分,故判斷為有缺陷部分。When the moving unit 302 receives the above information from the output unit 104, it first determines whether there is a defective part in the workpiece 10. Here, since the information about the defective part indicates that there is a defective part, it is determined as a defective part.

由於藉移動部302判斷工件10中有缺陷部分,故檢測部306會從該缺陷部分中檢測大小較大的缺陷部分。此處,是對缺陷部分大小的絕對值為臨界值以上的缺陷部分進行檢測。此處,是例如全部缺陷部分的大小均判斷為臨界值以上。Since the moving part 302 determines that there is a defective part in the workpiece 10, the detection part 306 detects a large-sized defective part from the defective part. Here, the defect portion whose absolute value of the size of the defect portion is above the critical value is detected. Here, for example, it is determined that the size of all defective portions is equal to or greater than a critical value.

移動部302針對檢測部306所檢測的缺陷部分中的第一缺陷部分,使該缺陷部分的兩端連結線段的中點位於拍攝部303的拍攝範圍,且以下述方式取得用以使工件10移動的旋轉移動的旋轉角度與水平移動的移動量的組合,俾在將預先指定工件10交遞於工件輸送裝置2時,使工件10的中心位於其應配置的位置。The moving part 302 locates the midpoint of the connecting line segment at both ends of the defective part in the imaging range of the imaging part 303 for the first defective part detected by the detection part 306, and acquires to move the workpiece 10 as follows The combination of the rotation angle of the rotation movement and the amount of movement of the horizontal movement allows the center of the workpiece 10 to be located at the position where it should be arranged when the pre-designated workpiece 10 is delivered to the workpiece conveying device 2.

具體而言,使用表示第一缺陷部分範圍的表示旋轉角度範圍的資訊、或從工件10的旋轉中心至缺陷部分兩端的長度等,取得缺陷部分兩端的座標等,並取得通過該缺陷部分兩端的線段對旋轉角度為90°的線段所形成的角度。此處,旋轉角度為90°的線段,係為對取得上述旋轉角度α1 時表示0°的直線所形成的角度為90度的線段,該角度相當於圖19的θtSpecifically, using the information indicating the range of the rotation angle indicating the range of the first defective portion, or the length from the rotation center of the workpiece 10 to the ends of the defective portion, etc., the coordinates and the like of both ends of the defective portion are obtained, and the The angle formed by a line segment to a line segment with a rotation angle of 90°. Here, a line segment having a rotation angle of 90° is a line segment having an angle of 90 degrees formed by a straight line representing 0° when the rotation angle α 1 is obtained, and this angle corresponds to θ t in FIG. 19.

接著,移動部302會將預先儲存於未圖示的儲存部等的表示拍攝區域内的中心位置的旋轉角度讀取,並從該角度減去上文中取得的通過缺陷部分兩端的線段對旋轉角度為90°的線段所形成的角度。藉此方式所得的角度即為使工件10旋轉時所利用的旋轉角度,相當於圖19的角度γ。Next, the moving unit 302 reads the rotation angle indicating the center position in the shooting area previously stored in a storage unit (not shown), and subtracts the rotation angle of the line segment passing through both ends of the defective part obtained above from the angle The angle formed by the 90° line segment. The angle obtained in this way is the rotation angle used when the workpiece 10 is rotated, and corresponds to the angle γ in FIG. 19.

而且,移動部302會取得上文中取得的通過缺陷部分兩端的線段對旋轉角度為90°的線段所形成的角度加入修正資訊具有的旋轉角度α1 所得的值,作為使工件10移動時的旋轉角度,且取得修正資訊具有的長度h1 ,作為工件10的移動距離。但,由於此處所取得的旋轉角度是為用以使工件10的旋轉中心重疊於工件10的中心的表示移動方向的角度,所以,使工件10移動時,朝該取得的旋轉角度的相反方向(,亦即旋轉180°的方向)移動。Furthermore, the moving unit 302 obtains the value obtained by adding the rotation angle α 1 of the correction information to the line segment with the rotation angle of 90° obtained through the line segments at both ends of the defective part obtained above as the rotation when the workpiece 10 is moved Angle, and the length h 1 that the correction information has is obtained as the moving distance of the workpiece 10. However, since the rotation angle obtained here is an angle indicating the direction of movement so that the rotation center of the work 10 overlaps the center of the work 10, when the work 10 is moved, the direction opposite to the obtained rotation angle ( , That is, the direction that rotates 180°).

移動部302會使工件10以工件10的旋轉中心為中心旋轉上文中取得的旋轉角度所示的角度,並使工件10朝上文中取得的旋轉角度所示方向的相反方向移動一長度h1The moving portion 302 causes the workpiece 10 to rotate about the rotation center of the workpiece 10 by the angle indicated by the rotation angle obtained above, and moves the workpiece 10 by a length h 1 in the opposite direction to the direction indicated by the rotation angle obtained above.

拍攝部303藉由這種移動對已位於拍攝區域的工件10的第一缺陷部分進行拍攝。With this movement, the imaging unit 303 images the first defective portion of the workpiece 10 that is already in the imaging area.

再者,修正缺陷位置取得部304會使用輸出部104輸出的修正資訊所具有的表示定向扁平部範圍的旋轉角度等,進行與上述移動部302同樣的處理,取得連結定向扁平部兩端的直線對旋轉角度為90°的線段所形成的角度,並從上文中移動部302取得的通過第一缺陷部分兩端的線段對旋轉角度為90°的線段所形成的角度減去,而取得藉該減算所得之值,作為有關第一缺陷部分的修正缺陷位置資訊。該修正缺陷位置資訊為以工件10的中心當作旋轉中心時,以定向扁平部的旋轉角度為基準(亦即,0°)時的第一缺陷部分的旋轉角度。Furthermore, the correction defect position obtaining unit 304 performs the same processing as the above-described moving unit 302 using the rotation angle of the orientation flat portion included in the correction information output by the output unit 104 to obtain a straight pair connecting both ends of the orientation flat portion The angle formed by a line segment with a rotation angle of 90°, and subtracted from the angle formed by the line segment at both ends of the first defective portion obtained by the moving section 302 to the line segment with a rotation angle of 90°, and obtained by the subtraction The value is used as the corrected defect position information about the first defect part. The corrected defect position information is the rotation angle of the first defect portion when the center of the workpiece 10 is used as the rotation center and the rotation angle of the oriented flat portion is used as a reference (that is, 0°).

影像輸出部305使對拍攝部303拍攝的第一缺陷部分進行拍攝所得的影像,與工件10的識別符(例如,分配給工件10的代碼)、缺陷部分的ID(例如,缺陷部分的號碼等)、修正缺陷位置資訊、拍攝日期、輸出部104輸出的缺陷部分深度(高度)、及輸出部104輸出的缺陷部分範圍換算成長度所得的值的缺陷部分寬度形成對應,並儲存於未圖示的儲存部,同時使拍攝的影像與這些資訊形成對應,顯示於未圖示的監視器等。The image output unit 305 makes an image obtained by shooting the first defective portion photographed by the imaging unit 303 with the identifier of the workpiece 10 (for example, the code assigned to the workpiece 10), the ID of the defective portion (for example, the number of the defective portion, etc.) ), the corrected defect position information, the shooting date, the depth (height) of the defect part output by the output unit 104, and the width of the defect part converted from the length of the defect part output by the output unit 104 to the length, and stored in a non-illustrated At the same time, the stored image is corresponding to the captured image and displayed on a monitor (not shown).

圖21是用來管理影像輸出部305所儲存的缺陷部分影像的影像管理表。影像管理表具有:「影像」、「工件ID」、「缺陷ID」、「修正缺陷位置」、「日期」、「高度」、及「寬度」。「影像」為缺陷部分的影像,此處,是表示影像的檔案名。「工件ID」為工件的識別符。「缺陷ID」為工件10内的缺陷部分的識別符,此處,是設為以從旋轉角度較小者依序呈上升次序的方式分配給檢測部306檢測的缺陷部分的號碼。「修正缺陷位置」為修正缺陷位置取得部304取得的修正缺陷位置資訊。「日期」是從未圖示的時鐘等取得的影像拍攝日期。「高度」為缺陷部分的高度或深度,「寬度」指缺陷部分的寬度。FIG. 21 is an image management table for managing defective partial images stored in the image output unit 305. The image management table has: "image", "workpiece ID", "defect ID", "corrected defect position", "date", "height", and "width". "Image" is the image of the defective part. Here, it is the file name of the image. "Workpiece ID" is the identifier of the work piece. The "defect ID" is an identifier of a defective part in the workpiece 10, and here is a number assigned to the defective part detected by the detection unit 306 in ascending order from the one with a smaller rotation angle. The “corrected defect position” is the corrected defect position information acquired by the corrected defect position acquisition unit 304. "Date" is the date the image was captured from a clock or the like not shown. "Height" is the height or depth of the defective part, and "Width" refers to the width of the defective part.

圖22為影像輸出部305輸出的缺陷部分的影像顯示例圖。圖中,缺陷部分的影像是顯示在區域211。在區域212顯示的影像中,影像輸出部305在顯示預先準備的無缺陷部分的工件10的影像中,在修正缺陷位置資訊所示的旋轉角度所示方向的邊緣上的位置,配置有表示有缺陷部分的標記。在區域213中,顯示有與缺陷部分影像對應的工件的識別符。在區域214中,顯示有與缺陷部分影像對應的修正缺陷位置資訊表示的旋轉角度、缺陷部分的寬度及深度。在區域215中,顯示有拍攝日期。此外,顯示於區域211的影像可按照使用者等的指示,進行放大、縮小、顯示範圍的移動等。22 is a diagram showing an example of a video display of a defective part output by the video output unit 305. In the figure, the image of the defective part is displayed in the area 211. In the video displayed in the area 212, the video output unit 305 displays the pre-prepared image of the workpiece 10 in the defect-free position at the edge on the edge in the direction indicated by the rotation angle indicated by the defect position information. Marking of defective parts. In the area 213, the identifier of the workpiece corresponding to the defective part image is displayed. In the area 214, the rotation angle indicated by the corrected defect position information corresponding to the defective part image, and the width and depth of the defective part are displayed. In the area 215, the shooting date is displayed. In addition, the image displayed in the area 211 can be enlarged, reduced, moved in the display range, etc. in accordance with instructions from the user or the like.

圖23為用以管理儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310的影像情況資訊的影像情況資訊管理表的圖示。影像情況資訊管理表具有所謂「圖形」、「情況」等屬性。「圖形」是指從缺陷部分影像取得的缺陷部分特徵量的圖形。「情況」是指具有關於與「圖形」對應的缺陷部分的工件的工件情況資訊。FIG. 23 is a diagram of an image situation information management table for managing the image situation information stored in the image situation information storage unit 310. The image situation information management table has so-called "graphics", "situation" and other attributes. "Graphic" refers to a graphic of the characteristic amount of a defective part obtained from a defective part image. "Situation" refers to workpiece condition information about a workpiece with a defective portion corresponding to "Graph".

評估部307針對影像輸出部305輸出的第一缺陷部分影像,使用圖23所示的影像情況資訊進行評估。具體而言,評估部307會從圖23的影像情況資訊管理表的各紀錄(列)依序取得「圖形」的屬性值,並依序判斷所取得的屬性值表示的影像圖形是否與第一缺陷部分的影像匹配。有匹配時,取得有匹配的屬性值對應的「情況」的屬性值,作為評估結果。此外,在一個紀錄的圖形有匹配的時間點,可將處理結束,也可針對全部紀錄進行處理。此時,可取得複數個「情況」的屬性值作為評估結果。又,沒有匹配的圖形時,評估部307會取得以內定等指定的評估結果,例如,「無異常」等評估結果。此處,例如,拍攝第一缺陷部分的影像,由於與「圖形」中的「圖形2」匹配,故取得「工件破裂大」的評估結果。The evaluation unit 307 evaluates the first defective partial image output by the image output unit 305 using the image condition information shown in FIG. 23. Specifically, the evaluation unit 307 sequentially obtains the attribute value of "graphics" from each record (row) of the image situation information management table of FIG. 23, and sequentially determines whether the image graphic represented by the acquired attribute value is the same as the first Image matching of defective parts. When there is a match, the attribute value of the "case" corresponding to the matched attribute value is obtained as the evaluation result. In addition, when the graphics of a record have matching time points, the processing can be ended, or all records can be processed. At this time, a plurality of "case" attribute values can be obtained as the evaluation result. In addition, when there is no matching pattern, the evaluation unit 307 obtains the evaluation result specified by default, for example, "no abnormality" and the like. Here, for example, the image of the first defective part is photographed, and since it matches the "pattern 2" in the "pattern", the evaluation result of "large workpiece crack" is obtained.

然後,評估結果輸出部308將評估部307取得的評估結果與影像形成對應並加以儲存,再顯示於未圖示的監視器等。Then, the evaluation result output unit 308 associates and stores the evaluation result obtained by the evaluation unit 307 with the image, and displays it on a monitor or the like (not shown).

圖24是表示藉評估結果輸出部308所得的評估結果的輸出例圖。24 is a diagram showing an example of output of the evaluation result obtained by the evaluation result output unit 308.

藉由該輸出,使用者即可辨識該缺陷部分為後續程序中有發生大工件破裂的可能性的缺陷部分。With this output, the user can identify the defective part as a defective part that may cause a large workpiece to break in the subsequent procedure.

還有,針對檢測部306檢測的其他缺陷部分,也反覆進行上述的處理。In addition, the above processing is repeated for other defective parts detected by the detection unit 306.

然後,有關檢測部306檢測的全部缺陷部分的處理結束時,移動部302即與使缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域時同樣的,將工件10的定向扁平部朝預先指定方向配置,且取得用以使工件10的中心配置於預先指定位置的工件10旋轉角度及水平方向移動量,並使用所取得的旋轉角度及水平方向的移動量使工件10移動。藉此方式,就可將工件10朝預定的方向配置於預定的位置。Then, when the processing for all the defective parts detected by the detection unit 306 ends, the moving unit 302 arranges the oriented flat portion of the workpiece 10 in a predetermined direction in the same way as when the defective part is moved to the imaging area, and obtains The center of the work 10 is arranged at a predetermined angle of rotation of the work 10 and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction, and the work 10 is moved using the obtained rotation angle and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction. In this way, the workpiece 10 can be arranged at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction.

工件輸送裝置2會將以此方式對準位置及方向的工件10拾起並輸送。藉由工件輸送裝置2的輸送等,由於與上述實施形態1的具體例相同樣,故在此省略其說明。The workpiece conveying device 2 picks up and conveys the workpiece 10 aligned in position and direction in this way. The conveyance by the workpiece conveying device 2 is the same as the specific example of the first embodiment described above, and therefore its description is omitted here.

此外,影像輸出部305在例如從使用者經由未圖示的受理部等受理了顯示一個缺陷部分的影像的指示等時,也可以圖21所示方式將所指定的缺陷部分影像加以顯示。In addition, when the user receives an instruction to display a video of a defective part, for example, from a user via an unshown receiving part or the like, the video of the specified defective part may be displayed as shown in FIG. 21.

此處,例如使用者在後續程序中,會在一個工件10上,設為檢測到識別符「W001」的工件已發生破裂等異常。然後,使用者利用未圖示的輸入介面等輸入該已發生破裂的工件10的識別符及關於該破裂的工件情況資訊時,情況受理部309就受理這些資訊。例如,設為已受理工件10的識別符的「W001」、及工件情況資訊的「工件破裂」。Here, for example, in a subsequent program, the user may set an abnormality, such as cracking, on the workpiece 10 that the workpiece with the identifier "W001" has been detected. Then, when the user inputs the identifier of the broken workpiece 10 and information about the broken workpiece by using an input interface (not shown), the situation accepting unit 309 accepts the information. For example, it is assumed that “W001” of the identifier of the workpiece 10 has been accepted, and “workpiece breakage” of the workpiece condition information.

然後,影像情況資訊累積儲存部311會從圖21所示的影像管理表讀取與已受理的工件10的識別符「W001」形成對應的全部影像,具體而言為「img1001」至「img1005」,從各個影像取得特徵點,並針對各影像取得缺陷部分特徵點的圖形資訊。接著,使各圖形資訊與情況受理部309所受理的工件情況資訊形成對應,且儲存於影像情況資訊儲存部310。藉此方式,圖23所示的影像情況資訊管理表中即可追加5個紀錄(列)。藉此方式,就可使關於缺陷部分影像的資訊及缺陷部分對工件10造成的影響等形成對應並儲存,且利用缺陷部分影像進行缺陷部分評估時的精確度可獲得提升。Then, the image situation information accumulation storage unit 311 reads all the images corresponding to the identifier "W001" of the accepted workpiece 10 from the image management table shown in FIG. 21, specifically "img1001" to "img1005" , Get feature points from each image, and get graphic information of feature points of defective parts for each image. Next, each graphic information is matched with the workpiece situation information accepted by the situation acceptance unit 309 and stored in the image situation information storage unit 310. In this way, 5 records (rows) can be added to the image situation information management table shown in FIG. 23. In this way, the information about the image of the defective part and the influence of the defective part on the workpiece 10 can be correspondingly stored and stored, and the accuracy when using the defective part image to evaluate the defective part can be improved.

還有,工件破裂原因的缺陷部分可以特定時,也可藉由例如工件識別符與缺陷部分識別符的組合等來指定工件10的缺陷部分,以取代指定發生異常的工件10並將工件情況資訊輸入。或者,從圖22所示的顯示畫面的區域212所示的影像來受理缺陷部分的指定。In addition, when the defective part of the cause of the workpiece breakage can be specified, the defective part of the workpiece 10 can be specified by, for example, a combination of the workpiece identifier and the defective part identifier, etc. enter. Alternatively, the designation of the defective portion is accepted from the image shown in the area 212 of the display screen shown in FIG. 22.

此外,可使用未圖示的異常檢測裝置等將有關工件10的後續程序異常檢測及表示其異常情況的工件情況資訊的取得予以自動化。此時,該裝置會將該裝置等輸出的發生破裂的工件10的識別符及工件情況資訊輸入情況受理部309。In addition, an abnormality detection device (not shown) or the like can be used to automate the detection of subsequent program abnormalities of the workpiece 10 and the acquisition of workpiece condition information indicating its abnormality. At this time, the device inputs the identifier of the broken workpiece 10 and the workpiece condition information output from the device or the like to the situation accepting unit 309.

綜上所述,若依本實施形態,透過使工件的邊緣缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域内,以拍攝該缺陷部分,即可容易藉影像確認工件的邊緣。In summary, according to this embodiment, by moving the edge defect portion of the workpiece into the shooting area to photograph the defect portion, it is easy to confirm the edge of the workpiece by image.

再者,藉由以拍攝影像來輸出邊緣的缺陷部分,可容易將邊緣的缺陷部分放大顯示,難用肉眼確認的缺陷部分形狀等可容易進行確認。Furthermore, by outputting the defective portion of the edge by shooting the image, the defective portion of the edge can be easily enlarged and displayed, and the shape of the defective portion that is difficult to confirm with the naked eye can be easily confirmed.

又,若依本發明,藉由移動部302令工件10移動,使工件10的中心得以配置於預先指定位置(例如,將工件10遞交至工件輸送裝置2時,工件10的中心應配置的位置),而且,透過以使缺陷部分配置在拍攝部303的拍攝範圍的方式進行缺陷部分的拍攝,針對相同規格的工件10的不同缺陷部分拍攝的影像之間,影像内的工件10的缺陷部分位置、或缺陷部分以外的邊緣位置可保持在相同位置。藉此方式,影像間的比較容易進行,而且,從影像取得特徵點、或判斷影像的類似度時,可作精確度優異的處理。Moreover, according to the present invention, the moving part 302 moves the workpiece 10 so that the center of the workpiece 10 can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, when the workpiece 10 is delivered to the workpiece conveying device 2, the position where the center of the workpiece 10 should be arranged ), and by shooting the defective part in such a manner that the defective part is arranged in the imaging range of the imaging unit 303, the position of the defective part of the workpiece 10 within the image is captured between images captured for different defective parts of the workpiece 10 of the same specification , Or the edge position other than the defective part can be kept in the same position. In this way, the comparison between the images is relatively easy, and when obtaining feature points from the images or judging the similarity of the images, it can be processed with excellent accuracy.

另外,上述各實施形態中,各處理(各功能)可透過單一的裝置(系統)實施集中處理來實現,或者,也可藉由複數個裝置實施分散處理來實現。In addition, in the above embodiments, each process (each function) may be implemented by a single device (system) performing centralized processing, or it may be implemented by a plurality of devices performing distributed processing.

再者,上述各實施形態中,各構成要素也可藉專用的硬體來構成,或者,關於可藉軟體實現的構成要素,也可利用執行程式來實現。例如,透過CPU等程式執行部將記錄在硬碟或半導體記憶體等記錄媒體的軟體–程式讀取並執行,各構成要素即得以實現。在執行軟體–程式時,程式執行部也可一邊進出儲存部(例如,硬碟或記憶體等記錄媒體)一邊執行程式。此外,上述實施形態的工件處理裝置也可藉由軟體來實現。In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each constituent element may be constituted by dedicated hardware, or a constituent element that can be realized by software may also be realized by an execution program. For example, by reading and executing software-programs recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or semiconductor memory through a program execution unit such as a CPU, each constituent element can be realized. When executing a software-program, the program execution part can also execute the program while going in and out of the storage part (for example, a hard disk or a storage medium such as memory). In addition, the workpiece processing device of the above embodiment can also be realized by software.

本發明並不限定於以上的實施形態,而是可作各種變化,這些變化也應包含於本發明的範圍,實無庸贅言。The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, but various changes can be made, and these changes should also be included in the scope of the present invention, and needless to say.

[産業上的可利用性] 如以上所述,本發明的工件處理裝置適於作為處理工件的裝置,特別是作為執行工件的定位等的裝置,非常有用。[Industry availability] As described above, the workpiece processing device of the present invention is suitable as a device for processing a workpiece, and is particularly useful as a device for performing positioning of a workpiece or the like.

1、2、3‧‧‧工件處理裝置4‧‧‧容器 5‧‧‧容器/工件處理裝置6‧‧‧載置台 10‧‧‧工件11‧‧‧工件邊緣 14‧‧‧線段15‧‧‧感測器 17‧‧‧定向扁平部20、21、22、23a‧‧‧凹部 20a、21a、22a、23‧‧‧凸部25‧‧‧區域 52‧‧‧轉盤53‧‧‧轉盤旋轉機構 54‧‧‧電動馬達55‧‧‧邊緣檢測部 55a‧‧‧投光器55b‧‧‧感測器 56‧‧‧編碼器57‧‧‧儲存部 101‧‧‧第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部102‧‧‧邊緣位置檢測器 103‧‧‧取得部104‧‧‧輸出部 105‧‧‧評估相關資訊受理部106‧‧‧設定部 211、212、213、214、215‧‧‧區域301‧‧‧邊緣位置檢測器 302‧‧‧移動部303‧‧‧拍攝部 304‧‧‧修正缺陷位置取得部305‧‧‧影像輸出 306‧‧‧檢測部307‧‧‧評估部 308‧‧‧評估結果輸出部309‧‧‧情況受理部 310‧‧‧影像情況資訊儲存部311‧‧‧影像情況資訊累積儲存部 1000‧‧‧工件輸送系統1001‧‧‧輸送路徑 1031‧‧‧合成裝置1032‧‧‧合成處理裝置 1033‧‧‧修正資訊取得裝置1034‧‧‧第二距離資訊取得裝置 1035‧‧‧計算裝置1036‧‧‧缺口檢測裝置 1037‧‧‧缺陷檢測裝置1038‧‧‧修正資訊輸出裝置 1039‧‧‧距離差相關輸出裝置1901‧‧‧缺陷部分 3021‧‧‧載置台3022‧‧‧旋轉機構 3023‧‧‧x軸移動機構3024‧‧‧y軸移動機構 3025‧‧‧罩蓋1, 2, 3‧‧‧Workpiece processing device 4‧‧‧ container 5‧‧‧Container/workpiece processing device 6‧‧‧Mounting table 10‧‧‧Workpiece 11‧‧‧Workpiece edge 14‧‧‧Line 15‧‧‧Sensor 17‧‧‧Oriented flat part 20, 21, 22, 23a‧‧‧ concave part 20a, 21a, 22a, 23‧‧‧ convex part 25‧‧‧ region 52‧‧‧Turntable 53‧‧‧Turntable rotating mechanism 54‧‧‧Electric motor 55‧‧‧Edge detection department 55a‧‧‧Projector 55b‧‧‧Sensor 56‧‧‧ Encoder 57‧‧‧ Storage 101‧‧‧ First rotation distance information storage unit 102‧‧‧ Edge position detector 103‧‧‧ Acquisition section 104‧‧‧ Output section 105‧‧‧ Evaluation related information acceptance department 106‧‧‧ Setting department 211, 212, 213, 214, 215‧‧‧ region 301‧‧‧ edge position detector 302‧‧‧Moving Department 303‧‧‧Photography Department 304‧‧‧ Corrected defect position acquisition unit 305‧‧‧ video output 306‧‧‧ Testing Department 307‧‧‧ Evaluation Department 308‧‧‧ Evaluation result output department 309‧‧‧ Situation acceptance department 310‧‧‧Image condition information storage unit 311‧‧‧Image condition information accumulation storage unit 1000‧‧‧Work conveying system 1001‧‧‧Conveying path 1031‧‧‧synthesis device 1032‧‧‧synthesis processing device 1033‧‧‧ revised information acquisition device 1034‧‧‧ second distance information acquisition device 1035‧‧‧computing device 1036‧‧‧notch detection device 1037‧‧‧ Defect detection device 1038‧‧‧ Correction information output device 1039‧‧‧Distance related output device 1901‧‧‧Defective part 3021‧‧‧Platform 3022‧‧‧Rotating mechanism 3023‧‧‧x-axis moving mechanism 3024‧‧‧y-axis moving mechanism 3025‧‧‧Cover

圖1為實施形態1的工件處理裝置的方塊圖; 圖2(a)為用以說明工件處理裝置中所使用之圓形工件的一例的示意圖; 圖2(b)為用以說明工件處理裝置的修正資訊取得處理的示意圖; 圖3為工件處理裝置的邊緣位置檢測器的一例的示意圖; 圖4為具備工件處理裝置的工件輸送系統的一例的俯視圖; 圖5為工件處理裝置所利用的關係式的說明用圖示; 圖6為有關工件處理裝置的動作的說明用流程圖; 圖7為有關具備工件處理裝置的工件輸送系統的動作的說明流程圖; 圖8為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊管理表的圖示; 圖9為用以說明工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊的曲線圖; 圖10(a)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊在旋轉角度為0度以上未達90度範圍的曲線圖; 圖10(b)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊在旋轉角度為90度以上未達180度範圍的曲線圖; 圖10(c)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊在旋轉角度為180度以上未達270度範圍的曲線圖; 圖10(d)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊在旋轉角度為270度以上未達360度範圍的曲線圖; 圖10(e)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊的合成曲線圖; 圖10(f)為工件處理裝置的第一旋轉距離資訊的變化較小部分的曲線圖; 圖11為工件處理裝置的合成距離資訊管理表的圖示; 圖12為工件處理裝置的第二旋轉距離資訊管理表的圖示; 圖13為工件處理裝置的複數個第二旋轉距離資訊的圖示; 圖14為工件處理裝置的距離差資訊管理表的圖示; 圖15(a)為表示工件處理裝置所取得的距離差資訊與旋轉角度的關係的曲線圖; 圖15(b)為用以說明工件處理裝置的缺口檢測裝置所執行的處理的曲線圖; 圖15(c)為用以說明工件處理裝置的缺陷檢測裝置所執行的處理的曲線圖; 圖16為工件處理裝置的輸出例的圖示; 圖17為實施形態2的工件處理裝置的方塊圖; 圖18為工件處理裝置的一例的示意圖(圖18(a))、及工件處理裝置的邊緣位置檢測器的一例的示意圖(圖18(b)); 圖19為用以說明使該工件處理裝置的缺陷部分移動到拍攝區域内之處理的圖示,其中,圖19(a)為旋轉前圖示、圖19(b)為旋轉後圖示; 圖20為有關工件處理裝置的動作的說明用流程圖; 圖21為工件處理裝置的影像管理表的一例的圖示; 圖22為工件處理裝置的顯示例的圖示; 圖23為工件處理裝置的影像情況資訊管理表的一例的圖示; 圖24為工件處理裝置的顯示例圖;以及 圖25為實施形態1的工件處理裝置的其他例子的方塊圖。1 is a block diagram of a workpiece processing device according to Embodiment 1; 2(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a round workpiece used in a workpiece processing device; 2(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining correction information acquisition processing of the workpiece processing device; 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of an edge position detector of a workpiece processing device; 4 is a plan view of an example of a workpiece conveying system provided with a workpiece processing device; 5 is a diagram for explaining the relationship used by the workpiece processing device; 6 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the workpiece processing device; 7 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a workpiece conveying system equipped with a workpiece processing device; 8 is a diagram of a first rotation distance information management table of a workpiece processing device; 9 is a graph for explaining the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device; 10(a) is a graph showing that the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device does not reach the range of 90 degrees when the rotation angle is above 0 degrees; FIG. 10(b) is a graph of the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device when the rotation angle is more than 90 degrees and does not reach the range of 180 degrees; FIG. 10(c) is a graph of the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device when the rotation angle is 180 degrees or more and does not reach 270 degrees; 10(d) is a graph of the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device that does not reach the range of 360 degrees when the rotation angle is more than 270 degrees; 10(e) is a synthetic curve diagram of the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device; FIG. 10(f) is a graph of the portion of the first rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device that changes less; 11 is a diagram of a synthetic distance information management table of a workpiece processing device; 12 is a diagram of the second rotation distance information management table of the workpiece processing device; 13 is a diagram of a plurality of second rotation distance information of the workpiece processing device; 14 is a diagram of the distance difference information management table of the workpiece processing device; 15(a) is a graph showing the relationship between the distance difference information acquired by the workpiece processing device and the rotation angle; 15(b) is a graph for explaining the processing performed by the notch detection device of the workpiece processing device; 15(c) is a graph for explaining the processing performed by the defect detection device of the workpiece processing device; 16 is an illustration of an output example of a workpiece processing device; 17 is a block diagram of a workpiece processing apparatus according to Embodiment 2; 18 is a schematic diagram of an example of a workpiece processing apparatus (FIG. 18(a)), and a schematic diagram of an example of an edge position detector of the workpiece processing apparatus (FIG. 18(b)); 19 is a diagram for explaining the process of moving the defective part of the workpiece processing device into the imaging area, wherein FIG. 19(a) is a diagram before rotation and FIG. 19(b) is a diagram after rotation; 20 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the workpiece processing device; 21 is a diagram of an example of an image management table of a workpiece processing device; 22 is an illustration of a display example of a workpiece processing device; 23 is a diagram showing an example of an image situation information management table of a workpiece processing device; 24 is a diagram showing a display example of a workpiece processing device; and 25 is a block diagram of another example of the workpiece processing apparatus according to the first embodiment.

1‧‧‧工件處理裝置 1‧‧‧Workpiece processing device

101‧‧‧第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部 101‧‧‧ First Rotation Distance Information Storage

102‧‧‧邊緣位置檢測器 102‧‧‧Edge position detector

103‧‧‧取得部 103‧‧‧ Acquisition Department

104‧‧‧輸出部 104‧‧‧ Output

105‧‧‧評估相關資訊受理部 105‧‧‧Evaluation related information acceptance department

106‧‧‧設定部 106‧‧‧Setting

1031‧‧‧合成裝置 1031‧‧‧Synthetic device

1032‧‧‧合成處理裝置 1032‧‧‧synthesis processing device

1033‧‧‧修正資訊取得裝置 1033‧‧‧Amendment information acquisition device

1034‧‧‧第二距離資訊取得裝置 1034‧‧‧Second distance information acquisition device

1035‧‧‧計算裝置 1035‧‧‧computing device

1036‧‧‧缺口檢測裝置 1036‧‧‧Notch detection device

1037‧‧‧缺陷檢測裝置 1037‧‧‧Defect detection device

Claims (15)

一種工件處理裝置,具備: 第一旋轉距離資訊儲存部,供儲存複數個第一旋轉距離資訊,該等第一旋轉距離資訊為具有使圓形工件旋轉時的旋轉角度與第一距離資訊形成對應的資訊,而該第一距離資訊則為關於從對應該旋轉角度的工件旋轉中心至邊緣為止的距離資訊; 合成裝置,將包含於前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中對應旋轉角度逐次相異90度的複數個第一距離資訊合成; 合成處理裝置,在前述合成裝置將第一距離資訊合成並取得的資訊的複數個合成距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度相連續且值的大小變化較小的複數個合成距離資訊進行檢測,並取得檢測所得的複數個合成距離資訊中的一個以上對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊及與合成前的一個以上第一距離資訊對應的旋轉角度; 修正資訊取得裝置,使用前述合成處理裝置所取得的複數個第一距離資訊及旋轉角度,取得用以使前述工件的旋轉中心與前述工件的中心對準的修正資訊;以及 修正資訊輸出裝置,輸出前述修正資訊取得裝置所取得的修正資訊。A workpiece processing device with: The first rotation distance information storage unit is configured to store a plurality of first rotation distance information, the first rotation distance information is information having a rotation angle when the circular workpiece rotates and the first distance information form a corresponding, and the first Distance information refers to the distance information from the rotation center of the workpiece corresponding to the rotation angle to the edge; The synthesizing device synthesizes the plurality of first distance information included in the first distance information of the plurality of first rotation distance information corresponding to different rotation angles successively different by 90 degrees; A synthesis processing device, in the plurality of synthesized distance information obtained by synthesizing and acquiring the first distance information in the aforementioned synthesizing device, the corresponding plurality of synthesized distance information whose rotation angles are continuous and whose value changes little is detected, and Obtaining multiple first distance information before synthesis corresponding to more than one of the plurality of synthesized distance information obtained by the detection and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information before synthesis; A correction information obtaining device, using the plurality of first distance information and the rotation angle obtained by the synthesis processing device, to obtain correction information for aligning the rotation center of the workpiece with the center of the workpiece; and The correction information output device outputs the correction information obtained by the aforementioned correction information obtaining device. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述的工件處理裝置,具備: 第二距離資訊取得裝置,使用前述修正資訊輸出裝置所輸出的修正資訊,取得表示前述工件為邊緣無凹凸的圓形時的旋轉角度與第二距離資訊的關係的關係式,而該第二距離資訊則為關於與旋轉角度相應的工件至邊緣的距離的資訊,將與前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊對應的複數個旋轉角度分別代入該取得的關係式,並取得第二距離資訊; 計算裝置,使用前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊及前述第二距離資訊取得裝置所取得的複數個第二距離資訊,來取得與相同的旋轉角度形成對應的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差;以及 距離差相關輸出裝置,輸出前述計算裝置所計算關於差的資訊。The workpiece processing device as described in item 1 of the patent application scope includes: The second distance information obtaining device uses the correction information output by the correction information output device to obtain a relational expression indicating the relationship between the rotation angle and the second distance information when the workpiece is a circle with no unevenness on the edge, and the second distance The information is information about the distance between the workpiece and the edge corresponding to the rotation angle, and the plurality of rotation angles corresponding to the plurality of first rotation distance information are substituted into the obtained relational expression, and the second distance information is obtained; The computing device uses the plurality of first rotation distance information and the plurality of second distance information obtained by the second distance information obtaining device to obtain the first distance information and the second distance information corresponding to the same rotation angle Difference; and The distance difference correlation output device outputs information about the difference calculated by the aforementioned calculation device. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成處理裝置在前述複數個合成距離資訊中,將從值較大者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第一處理及從值較小者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第二處理的至少一個執行1次以上,並在該第一處理及第二處理未受檢測的其餘合成距離資訊中,取得與對應的旋轉角度在預先指定數以上的相連續合成距離資訊的一個以上合成距離資訊對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、與對應合成前的一個以上第一距離資訊的旋轉角度的組對。The workpiece processing device according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the synthesis processing device detects the first processing and the subordinate value of one or more synthetic distance information from the larger value among the plurality of synthetic distance information in sequence The smaller one executes at least one of the second processes that sequentially detect more than one synthesized distance information more than once, and obtains the corresponding rotation angle in the remaining synthesized distance information that is not detected by the first and second processes A pair of a plurality of first distance information before synthesis corresponding to more than one synthesized distance information of consecutively synthesized distance information of more than a predetermined number, and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information before synthesis. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成處理裝置在前述複數個合成距離資訊中,將從值較大者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第一處理及從值較小者依序檢測一個以上合成距離資訊的第二處理的至少一個執行1次以上,並在該第一處理及第二處理未受檢測的其餘合成距離資訊中,取得與對應的旋轉角度在預先指定數以上的相連續合成距離資訊的一個以上合成距離資訊對應的合成前複數個第一距離資訊、與對應合成前的一個以上第一距離資訊的旋轉角度的組對。The workpiece processing device as described in item 2 of the patent application range, wherein the synthesis processing device detects the first processing and the subordinate values of one or more synthetic distance information from the larger value among the plurality of synthetic distance information sequentially The smaller one executes at least one of the second processes that sequentially detect more than one synthesized distance information more than once, and obtains the corresponding rotation angle in the remaining synthesized distance information that is not detected by the first and second processes A pair of a plurality of first distance information before synthesis corresponding to more than one synthesized distance information of consecutively synthesized distance information of more than a predetermined number, and a rotation angle corresponding to more than one first distance information before synthesis. 如申請專利範圍第3項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成處理裝置將前述第一處理及前述第二處理分別執行1次以上。The workpiece processing device according to item 3 of the patent application scope, wherein the synthesis processing device executes the first processing and the second processing at least once. 如申請專利範圍第4項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成處理裝置將前述第一處理及前述第二處理分別執行1次以上。The workpiece processing device according to item 4 of the patent application scope, wherein the synthesis processing device executes the first processing and the second processing at least once. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的工件處理裝置,進一步具備: 缺口檢測裝置,使用前述計算裝置計算所得的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差,作為前述工件的朝向特定資訊,來取得表示該工件的朝向特定用缺口部的資訊; 前述距離差相關輸出裝置將表示該缺口檢測裝置所取得的缺口部的資訊,輸出作為關於前述計算裝置所計算的差的資訊。The workpiece processing device described in item 2 of the scope of the patent application further includes: The notch detection device uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device as orientation specific information of the workpiece to obtain information indicating the orientation specific notch of the workpiece; The aforementioned distance difference correlation output device outputs information indicating the notch portion obtained by the notch detection device as information about the difference calculated by the aforementioned calculation device. 如申請專利範圍第7項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述缺口部檢測裝置使用前述計算裝置所計算的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差及關於缺口部大小的一個以上臨界值,檢測設在前述工件邊緣的缺口部,並取得表示該缺口部的資訊。The workpiece processing device according to item 7 of the patent application scope, wherein the notch detection device uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device and one or more critical values regarding the size of the notch To detect the notch at the edge of the workpiece and obtain information indicating the notch. 如申請專利範圍第1項至第5項中任一項所述的工件處理裝置,進一步具備: 缺陷檢測裝置,使用前述計算裝置所計算的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差,取得關於前述工件邊緣的缺陷部分的資訊; 前述距離差相關輸出裝置將關於該缺陷檢測裝置所取得的缺陷部分的資訊,輸出作為關於前述計算裝置所計算的差的資訊。The workpiece processing device described in any one of items 1 to 5 of the patent application scope further includes: The defect detection device uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device to obtain information about the defect portion of the workpiece edge; The aforementioned distance difference correlation output device outputs the information about the defective part acquired by the defect detection device as the information about the difference calculated by the aforementioned calculation device. 如申請專利範圍第9項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述缺陷檢測裝置使用前述計算裝置所計算的前述第一距離資訊與第二距離資訊的差及關於缺陷部分大小的一個以上臨界值,檢測前述工件邊緣的缺陷部分,並取得關於該經檢測的缺陷部分的資訊。The workpiece processing device according to item 9 of the patent application scope, wherein the defect detection device uses the difference between the first distance information and the second distance information calculated by the calculation device and more than one critical value regarding the size of the defective portion, Detect the defective part at the edge of the aforementioned work piece and obtain information about the detected defective part. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成裝置在包含於前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊分別合成,並取得複數個合成距離資訊。The workpiece processing device as described in item 1 of the patent application range, wherein the synthesis device includes four rotation angles different from each other by 90 degrees in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information The first distance information is synthesized separately, and a plurality of synthesized distance information is obtained. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的工件處理裝置,其中,前述合成裝置在包含於前述複數個第一旋轉距離資訊的第一距離資訊中,將對應的旋轉角度逐次相異90度的4個第一距離資訊分別合成,並取得複數個合成距離資訊。The workpiece processing device as described in item 2 of the patent application range, wherein the synthesis device includes four rotation angles different from each other by 90 degrees in the first distance information included in the plurality of first rotation distance information The first distance information is synthesized separately, and a plurality of synthesized distance information is obtained. 一種工件輸送系統,具備: 如申請專利範圍第1項至第8項、第11項、及第12項中任一項所述的工件處理裝置;以及 對該工件處理裝置進行工件的傳送的工件輸送裝置。A workpiece conveying system with: The workpiece processing device as described in any one of the first to eighth, eleventh, and twelfth items of the patent application scope; and A workpiece conveying device that conveys workpieces to the workpiece processing device. 一種工件輸送系統,具備: 如申請專利範圍第9項所述的工件處理裝置;以及 對該工件處理裝置進行工件的傳送的工件輸送裝置。A workpiece conveying system with: A workpiece processing device as described in item 9 of the patent application scope; and A workpiece conveying device that conveys workpieces to the workpiece processing device. 一種工件輸送系統,具備: 如申請專利範圍第10項所述的工件處理裝置;以及 對該工件處理裝置進行工件的傳送的工件輸送裝置。A workpiece conveying system with: A workpiece processing device as described in item 10 of the patent application scope; and A workpiece conveying device that conveys workpieces to the workpiece processing device.
TW108112973A 2013-12-02 2014-10-20 Workpiece processing device, workpiece conveying system TWI695441B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-249159 2013-12-02
JP2013249159A JP6313030B2 (en) 2013-12-02 2013-12-02 Wafer information processing equipment
JP2014-067888 2014-03-28
JP2014067888 2014-03-28
JP2014-138373 2014-07-04
JP2014138373A JP6348789B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2014-07-04 Work processing equipment, work transfer system

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201929116A TW201929116A (en) 2019-07-16
TWI695441B true TWI695441B (en) 2020-06-01

Family

ID=68049173

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108112973A TWI695441B (en) 2013-12-02 2014-10-20 Workpiece processing device, workpiece conveying system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (2) KR102338111B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI695441B (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI756555B (en) * 2019-07-31 2022-03-01 超能高新材料股份有限公司 An alignment device for semiconductor wafer inspection
CN113064251B (en) * 2021-03-24 2023-03-14 上海晨兴希姆通电子科技有限公司 Lens positioning method and system thereof

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6224459B1 (en) * 1996-06-15 2001-05-01 Unova U.K. Limited Workpiece inspection and handling
JP2006084294A (en) * 2004-09-15 2006-03-30 Kawasaki Heavy Ind Ltd Defect detection apparatus for semiconductor wafer
EP1848193A2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2007-10-24 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Misalignment detecting apparatus, misalignment detecting method, and computer program product
JP2008020371A (en) * 2006-07-13 2008-01-31 Nikon Corp Inspection device
US20080234857A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Fanuc Ltd Numerical controller capable of executing G-code commands in path table operation
CN101339913A (en) * 2007-07-02 2009-01-07 日东电工株式会社 Method for detecting position of defect on semiconductor wafer
EP2056632A2 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-05-06 Fujitsu Ltd. Methods and apparatuses for allocating connection identifiers in wireless communication system

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2729297B2 (en) 1987-12-24 1998-03-18 株式会社ダイヘン Semiconductor wafer centering equipment
JP3074313B2 (en) * 1993-01-26 2000-08-07 株式会社メックス Wafer positioning device
JP6208419B2 (en) * 2012-09-19 2017-10-04 株式会社ダイヘン Calculation device, transfer robot system, and calculation method

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6224459B1 (en) * 1996-06-15 2001-05-01 Unova U.K. Limited Workpiece inspection and handling
JP2006084294A (en) * 2004-09-15 2006-03-30 Kawasaki Heavy Ind Ltd Defect detection apparatus for semiconductor wafer
EP1848193A2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2007-10-24 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Misalignment detecting apparatus, misalignment detecting method, and computer program product
JP2008020371A (en) * 2006-07-13 2008-01-31 Nikon Corp Inspection device
US20080234857A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Fanuc Ltd Numerical controller capable of executing G-code commands in path table operation
CN101339913A (en) * 2007-07-02 2009-01-07 日东电工株式会社 Method for detecting position of defect on semiconductor wafer
EP2056632A2 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-05-06 Fujitsu Ltd. Methods and apparatuses for allocating connection identifiers in wireless communication system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201929116A (en) 2019-07-16
KR20210068337A (en) 2021-06-09
KR102399860B1 (en) 2022-05-18
KR102338111B1 (en) 2021-12-09
KR20150063921A (en) 2015-06-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI661495B (en) Work piece processing device, work piece conveying system
JP6348789B2 (en) Work processing equipment, work transfer system
JP2008128651A (en) Pattern alignment method, and pattern inspecting device and system
EP1560017B1 (en) Glass bottle inspection device
TWI402927B (en) Method and inspection system for inspection conditions of semiconductor wafer appearance inspection device
TWI477764B (en) Image creation method, substrate inspection method, storage medium storing program for executing image creation method or substrate inspection method, and substrate inspection device
EP1560018A1 (en) Method and device for preparing reference image in glass bottle inspection device
KR20010101550A (en) Defect inspection data processing system
KR102399860B1 (en) workpiece processing device and workpiece conveying system
JPWO2009031612A1 (en) Observation apparatus and observation method, and inspection apparatus and inspection method
JP5273926B2 (en) Defect inspection equipment
JP6714477B2 (en) Board angle position identification method
CN116092984B (en) Method for determining the positioning accuracy of a wafer transport device
KR101452215B1 (en) Curve edge vision inspection method and apparatus thereof
JP3993044B2 (en) Appearance inspection method, appearance inspection device
JP2002303583A (en) Inspection method for container and inspection device for container
JP5409080B2 (en) Method for estimating center position of disk-shaped member and image processing apparatus
KR20150049799A (en) Method of inspecting a surface of a substrate and apparatus for performing the same
JP2007292606A (en) Surface inspection device
TWI726672B (en) Capacitor appearance detection device and method
JP4167482B2 (en) Image conversion method and image conversion apparatus
JP2013088342A (en) Defect inspection method for color filter substrate
JP2019168232A (en) Substrate inspection device, substrate processing device, substrate inspection method, and substrate processing method
JP2012068210A (en) Defect inspection method for antireflection transparent film
JP2001184508A (en) Method and device for inspecting appearance and producing method for semiconductor device